United States      Office of
          Environmental Protection   Research and Development
          Agency         Washington, DC 20460
EP A/625/6-90/016tl
July 1991
SEPA    Handbook
          Ground Wat^r
          Volume II: Methodology

-------

-------
         Handbook
       Ground Water
    Volume Me  Methodology
                                    EP A/625/6-90/016b
                                          July 1991
   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
   Office of Research and Development
Center for Environmental Research Information
         Cincinnati, OH 45268
                                 Printed on Recycled Paper

-------
                                           NOTICE
This document has been reviewed in accordance with the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's peer and
administrative review policies and approved for publication. Mention of trade names or commercial products
does not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

This document is not intended to be a guidance or support document for a specific regulatory program.
Guidance documents are available from EPA and must be consulted to address specific regulatory issues.

-------
                                          Contents
Chapter 1.  Monitoring Well Design and Construction
Chapter 2.  Ground-Water Sampling	
Chapter 3.  Transport and Fate of Contaminants in
Chapter 4.  Ground-Water Tracers	
Chapter 5.  Introduction to Aquifer Test Analysis.
Chapter 6.  Models and Computers in Ground-Water Investigations	  117
                                    Page
     	    1
	 .'..'.'."..'.'.'.'.'..'.'"  22
the Subsurface	   41
	   67
                                      96
                                            Jii

-------
                                        Acknowledgment
Many individuals contributed to the preparation and review of this handbook. The document was prepared by
Eastern Research Group, Inc.,  for EPA's Center for Environmental Research Information,  Cincinnati, OH.
Contract administration was provided by the Center for Environmental Research Information.

Volume I, Ground Water and Contamination, was published in September 1990 (EPA/625/6-90/016a). Volume
II, Methodology describes various investigative approaches and techniques. Although extensively revised, part
of Volume II was obtained from previous publications, "Handbook: Ground Water"  (EPA/625/6-87/016) and
"Protection of Public Water Supplies from Ground-Water Contamination" (EPA/625/4-85/016).

Authors and Reviewers

Michael J. Barcelona - Western Michigan University, Kalamazoo, Ml
Russell Boulding - Eastern Research Group, Inc., Arlington, MA
Ralph C. Heath - Private Consultant, Raleigh, NC
Wayne A. Pettyjohn - Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, OK
Ron Sims - Utah State University, Logan, UT
Judy Sims - Utah State University, Logan, UT
Paul van der Heijde - IGWMC, Holcomb Research Institute
H. Allen Wehrman - Illinois State Water Survey, Champaign, IL

Project Officer

Carol Grove - EPA-CERI, Cincinnati, OH
                                             iv

-------
                                             Preface
The subsurface environment of ground water is ch aracterized by a complex interplay of physical, geochemical
and biological forces that govern the release, transport and fate of a variety of chemical substances.  There are
literally as many varied hydrogeologic settings as there are types and numbers of contaminant sources.  In
situations where ground-water investigations are most necessary, there are frequently many variables of land
and ground-water use and contaminant source  characteristics which cannot be fully characterized.
The impact of natural ground-water recharge and discharge processes on distributions of chemical constituents
is understood for only a few types of chemical species. Also, these processes may be modified by both natural
phenomena and man's activities so as to further complicate apparent spatial or temporal trends in water quality.
Since so many climatic, demographic and hydrogeologic factors may vary from place to place, or even small areas
within specific sites, there can be no single "standardj" approach for assessing and protecting-the quality of ground
water that will be applicable in all cases.

Despite these uncertainties, investigations are under! way and they are used as a basis for making decisions about
the need for, and usefulness of, alternative corrective and preventive actions. Decision makers, therefore, need
some assurance that elements of uncertainty are minimized and that hydrogeologic investigations provide reliable
results.

A purpose of this document is to discuss measures th at can be taken to ensure that uncertainties do not undermine
our ability to make reliable predictions about the response of contamination to various corrective or preventive
measures.

EPA conducts considerable research in ground water to support its regulatory needs. In recent years, scientific
knowledge about ground-water systems has been increasing rapidly.  Researchers in the Office of Research and
Development have made improvements in technology for assessing the subsurface, in adapting techniques from
other disciplines to successfully identify specific contaminants in ground water, in assessing the behaviorof certain
chemicals in some geologic materials and in advancing the state-of-the-art of remedial technologies.

An important part of EPA's ground-water research program is to transmit research information to decision makers,
field managers and the scientific community.  This! publication has  been developed to assist that effort and,
additionally, to help satisfy an immediate Agency need to promote the transfer of technology that is applicable to
ground-water contamination control and prevention]

The need exists for a resource document that brings together available technical information in a form convenient
                                            and
for ground-water personnel within EPA and state
proper ground-water management.  The information contained in this
is applicable to many programs that deal with the ground
or support document for a specific regulatory program
local governments on whom EPA ultimately depends for
             handbook is intended to meet that need. It
-water resource. However, it is not intended as a guidance
GUIDANCE  DOCUMENTS  ARE AVAILABLE  Ffi6M  EPA AND MUST  BE CONSULTED  TO ADDRESS
SPECIFIC REGULATORY ISSUES.

-------

-------
                                             Chapter 1
                     MONITORING WELL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
The principal objective of constructing monitoring /veils
is  to  provide access to  an otherwise inaccessible
environment.  Monitoring wells  are used to evaluate
topics within  various disciplines, including geology,
hydrology,  chemistry, and biology. In ground-water
quality monitoring, wells are used for collecting grcjund-
water samples, which upon  analysis may allow
description of a contaminant plume, or the movement of
a particular chemical (orbiological) constituent, or ensure
that potential contaminants are not moving  past a
particular point.                               '
Ground-Water Monitoring Program Goals
                                           nbie
Each purpose for ground-water monitoring-ambient
monitoring,  source  monitoring, case preparation
monitoring,  and  research  monitoring-must satisfy
somewhat different requirements, and may necessitate
different strategies for well design  and construction
(Barcelona and others, 1984). At the outset.the goals
of the intended monitoring program must be clearly
understood and thought should be given to the potential
future use of the wells in other, possibly different,
monitoring programs.

Regional investigations of ground-water quality involve
ambient monitoring.  Such investigations seek to
establish an overall picture of the quality of water vlithin
all or parts of an aquifer. Generally, sample collection is
conducted routinely over a period of many years to
determine changes in quality overtime. Often, changes
in quality are related to long-term changes in land use
(e.g., the effects of urbanization). Monitoring conducted
for Safe Drinking Water Act compliance generally! falls
in this category.

Samples commonly  are collected from a  variety of
public and private water supply wells for ambient quality
investigations. Because of the diversity of sources, the
data obtained  through some  ambient monitoring
programs  may  not  meet the strict well design and
construction requirements imposed by the three other
types of monitoring. However,  such programs are
important for detecting significant changes in aquifer
water quality overtime and space and protecting public
health.

Regulatory monitoring at potential contaminant sources
is considered source monitoring. Under this  type of
program, monitoring wells are located and designed to
detect the movement of specific pollutants outside of
the boundaries of a particular facility (e.g., treatment,
storage, or disposal). Ground-water sampling to define
contaminant plume extent and geometry would fall into
this monitoring classification.  Monitoring well design
and construction are  tailored to the site geology and
contaminant chemistry.   With  source monitoring,
quantitative aspects of analytical results become most
important because the  level  of contaminant
concentration may require specific regulatory action.

Monitoring  for case preparation, such as  legal
proceedings in environmental enforcement, requires a
level of detail  similar to source monitoring.  Source
monitoring,  in  fact, often  becomes a part  of  legal
proceedings to establish whether or not environmental
damage ha,s occurred and to identify the responsible
party. This is a prime example of one type of monitoring
program evolving into another. The appropriateness
and integrity of monitoring well design and construction
methods will come  under close scrutiny  in  legal
proceedings. In such cases, the course of action taken
during the monitoring investigation, the decisions made
concerning well design and construction, and the reasons
for those decisions must be clearly established and
documented.

Monitoring for research generally requires a  level of
sophistication beyond that required of any other type of
monitoring (this, of course, depends upon the types and
concentrations of constituents being sought and the
overall objectives of the research). Detailed information
is often needed  to support the basic concepts and
expand understanding of the complex mechanisms of

-------
ground-water movement and solute/contaminant
transport.

The goals of any proposed ground-water monitoring
program should be clearly stated and understood before
making any decisions on the types  and numbers of
wells  needed, their locations, depth, constituents of
interest,  and  methods  of collection,  storage,
transportation, and analysis.

As each of these decisions is made, consideration must
be  given to the  costs involved in each step of the
monitoring program and how compromises in one step
may affect the integrity and outcome of the other steps.
Forexample, costsavings in well construction materials
may so severely limit the  usefulness of a well that
another well may need to be constructed at the same
location for the reliable addition of a single chemical
parameter.

Monitoring Well Design Components

Monitoring well design and construction methods follow
production well design and construction techniques; a
monitoring well .however, is  built specifically to give
access to the ground water so that a "representative"
sample of water can be withdrawn and analyzed. While
well efficiency and yield is important, the ability to
produce large amounts of water for supply purposes is
not the primary objective.

Emphasis is placed instead on constructing a well that
will provide  easily obtainable ground-water samples
thatwill give reliable, meaningful information. Therefore,
materials  and techniques used for constructing  a
monitoring well must not materially alter the quality of
the water being sampled. An understanding of the
chemistry  of suspected  pollutants and  the geologic
setting in which the monitoring well is to be constructed
play a major role  in the drilling technique and well
construction materials used.

Several components need to be considered in monitoring
well design:  location and number of wells, diameter,
casing and screen material, screen length and depth of
placement, sealing material, well development, and
well security. Often, discussion of one component will
impinge upon other components.

Location and Number
Locating monitoring wells  spatially  and  vertically to
ensure that the ground-water flow regime of concern is
being monitored is obviously one of the most important
components in ground-water quality monitoring design.
Monitoring well locations (sites) andthe numberofwells
in the monitoring program are closely linked. The number
of wells and their location are principally determined by
the purpose of  the monitoring program.  In most
monitoring situations, the goal is to determine the effect
that some surface or near-surface activity has had on
nearbyground-water quality. Mostdissolved constituents
will descend vertically through the unsaturated zone
beneath the area of activity and then, upon reaching the
saturated zone, move horizontally in the direction of
ground-water flow. Therefore, monitoring wells  are
normally completed downgradient in the first permeable
water-bearing unit encountered. Consideration should
be given to natural (seasonal) fluctuations, which can
amount to several feet throughout the year and from
one year to the next, and artificial fluctuations brought
about largely by pumping, which can amount to several
tens of feet in only a few hours.  Artificial fluctuations
also are caused by lagoon operation, which can cause
a rise or "mound" in the water table.

Preliminary boreholes and monitoring wells can be
constructed to collect  and analyze geologic material
samples, to measure ground-water levels, and to collect
water-quality samples, all  of which provide a guide to
thefuture placement of additional wells. Accurate water-
level information must be obtained to determine if local
ground-waterf low paths and gradients differ significantly
from the regional appraisal.

The  analysis  of  water-quality samples from  the
preliminary wells can direct the placement of additional
wells. Such data are helpful in the vertical arrangement
of sampling points, especially for a contaminant that is
denser than water. Without some preliminary chemical
data, it is usually very difficult to determine the location
of the most contaminated zone.

Site geology, site hydrology,  source characteristics,
contaminant characteristics, and the size of  the area
under investigation all help determine where  and how
many wells should be constructed. Certainly, the more
complicated the geology and hydrology, the more
complex the contaminant and source, and the largerthe
area being investigated, the greater the number of
monitoring wells that will be required.

Diameter
In the past, the diameter of a monitoring well was based
primarily on the size of the device (bailer, pump, etc.)
used to withdraw the water samples. This practice was
similarto that followed for water supply well design. For
example, a domestic water well is commonly 4 to 6
inches in  diameter,  which is of sufficient size to
accommodate a submersible pump capable of delivering
from 5 to 20 gallons per minute.  Municipal, industrial,

-------
and irrigation wells have greater diameters to handle
larger pumps, and to increase the available screen
open area so the well can produce water efficiently.

This practice worked well in very permeable formations,
where an aquifer capable of furnishing large volumes of
water was present. However, unlike most water-su Dply
wells, monitoring wells are quite often completed in very  2l
marginal water-producing zones. Pumping one or nWe
well volumes of water (the amount of water stored in the
well casing under nonpumping conditions) from a |well
built in low-yielding materials (Gibb and others, 1981)
may present a serious problem if the well has a large
diameter.

Figure 1-1 illustrates the amount of water in storage, per
foot of casing for different well casing diameters. Well
casings with diameters of 2 and 6 inches will contain
0.16 and 1.47 gallons of water  per foot of casing,
respectively.  Purging four well volumes  from a well
containing 10 feet of water would require removal of 6.4
gallons of water from a 2-inch well and 58.8 gallons of
waterfrom a 6-inch well. Under low-yielding conditions,
it can take considerable time to recover enough v\ ater
from the well to collect a sample (see Figure  1-2)
                     3456

                    Wall Diameter (Inches)
Figure 1-1. Volume of Water Stored Per Foot of
Well Casing for Different Diameter Casings (from
Rmaldo-Lee, 1983)
                                                  3!   30
                                                      20
                                                      10
                                                                     Wall Diameter (Inches)

                                                       Assumptions: K = 1 x 10"' cm/sec, well screen = 10', 10' of water
                                                                above screen, 6' of water Instantaneously
                                                                removed

                                                   Figure 1-2. Time Required for Recovery After
                                                   Slug of Water Removed (from Rinaldo-Lee, 1983)
                                                   In addition, when hazardous constituents are present in
                                                   the ground water, the purged water must be properly
                                                   disposed.  Therefore, the quantity of water pumped
                                                   from the well should be minimized for reasons of safety,
                                                   as well as disposal cost. Cost of well construction also
                                                   is a consideration. Wells less than 4 inches in diameter
                                                   are much less expensive  than large diameter wells in
                                                   terms of both cost of materials and cost of drilling.

                                                   For these reasons and with the advent of a variety of
                                                   commercially available small-diameterpumps (less than
                                                   2 inches OD) capable of lifting water over 100 feet, 2-
                                                   inch ID wells have become the  standard in monitoring
                                                   well technology.

                                                   Large diameter wells can be useful in situations where
                                                   monitoring may be followed by remedial actions involving
                                                   reclamation and treatment of the contaminated ground
                                                   water. In some instances, the  "monitoring" well may
                                                   become a "supply" well to  remove contaminated water
                                                   for treatment. Larger diameter wells also merit
                                                   consideration when monitoring is required at depths of
                                                   hundreds of feet and in situations where the additional
                                                   strength of large diametercasing is needed. For sampling
                                                   at several depths beneath one location,  several
                                                   monitoring wells have been nested in a single borehole
                                                   (Johnson, 1983). This type of technique will require
                                                   drilling a larger diameter hole to  accommodate the
                                                   multiple well casings. Again, the use of smallerdiameter

-------
casing provides advantages by allowing more wells to
be nested in the borehole, thus easing construction and
reducing drilling expenses.

Casing and Screen Material
The type of material used for a monitoring well can have
a distinct effect on the quality of the water sample to be
collected (Barcelona and others, 1985; Gillham and
others, 1983; and Miller, 1982). The materials of choice
should retain their structural integrity for the duration of
the monitoring  program  under actual  subsurface
conditions. They should neither adsorb nor leach
chemical  constituents  that  would  bias  the
representativeness of the samples collected.

Galvanized steel casing  can impart iron, manganese,
zinc, and cadmium to many waters, and steel casing
may contribute iron and manganese to a sample. PVC
pipe has been shown to  release and adsorb  trace
amounts of various organic constituents to water after
prolonged exposure (Miller, 1982). PVC solvent cements
used to attach sections of PVC pipe also have  been
shown to release significant  quantities  of organic
compounds.

TeflonR and glass are among the most inert materials
considered for  monitoring well construction. Glass,
however, is difficult and expensive to use under most
field conditions. TeflonR also is very expensive; with
technological advances,  TeflonR-coated casings and
screens may become available. Stainless steel also
offers desirable properties for monitoring, but it too is
expensive.

A reasoned strategy for ground-water monitoring must
consider the effects of  contaminated  water on well
construction materials as well. Unfortunately, there is
limited published information on  the performance of
specific materials  in varied hydrogeologic settings
(Pettyjohn  and  others,  1981). The  following is a
preliminary ranking of commonly used materials exposed
to different solutions representing the principal soluble
species present in hazardous waste site investigations
(Barcelona and others, 1984). They are listed in  order
of best to worst in terms  of chemical resistance:

       TefIonR
       Stainless Steel 316
       Stainless Steel 304
       PVC Type 1
       Lo-Carbon Steel
       Galvanized Steel
       Carbon Steel

Polyvinyl chloride (PVC Type I) is very chemically
resistant except to low molecular weight ketones,
aldehydes, and chlorinated solvents. Generally, as the
organic content of a solution increases, direct attack on
the polymer matrix or solvent absorption, adsorption, or
leaching may occur. This reaction, however, has not
been  observed with  TeflonR.  Provided that sound
construction practices are followed, TeflonR can be
expected to outperform all other casing and sampling
materials (Barcelona and others, 1984).

Stainless steels are the most chemically resistant of the
ferrous materials. Stainless steel, however, may be
sensitive to the chloride ion, which can  cause pitting
corrosion,  especially over long-term exposures under
acidic conditions. Given the similarity in price, workability,
and performance, the remaining ferrous  materials (lo-
carbon, galvanized steel, and  carbon)  provide little
advantage over one  another  for casing/screen
construction.

Significant levels of organic components found in PVC
primers and  adhesives  (such as tetrahydrofuran,
methylethylketone,     cyclohexanone,     and
methylisobutylketone) were detected in well water
several months after well installation (Sosebee and
others, 1982). The presence of compounds such as
these can mask the presence of other similar volatile
compounds (Miller, 1982). Therefore, when using PVC
and othersimilar materials, such as ABS, polypropylene,
or polyethylene, for well construction, threaded joints
are the preferred means forconnectingsectionstogether.

In many situations, it may be possible to compromise
accuracy or precision for initial cost, depending on the
objectives of the  monitoring program. For example, if
the contaminants of interest are already defined and
they do not include substances that might bleed or sorb,
it may be  reasonable to use wells cased with a less
expensive material.

Wells constructed of less than optimum materials might
be used for sampling  if identically fabricated wells are
constructed in uncontaminated parts of the monitored
aquifer to  provide ground-water samples for use as
"blanks" (Pettyjohn and others, 1981). Such blanks,
however, may not adequately  address problems of
adsorption on, or leaching from,  the casing material
induced by contaminants in the ground water. It may be
feasible to use two or more kinds of casing materials in
the saturated zone and above the seasonal high water
table, such as TeflonR or stainless steel, and use  a
rnore appropriate material, such as PVC or galvanized
steel casing, above static water level.

Trying to save money by compromising on material
quality or suitability, however, may eventually increase
program cost by creating the need for reanalysis, or

-------
worse, monitoring well reconstruction. Each case
requires  careful  consideration  and the  analytical
laboratory should be fully aware of the construction
materials used.

Care also must be taken in preparing the casing and
well screen materials priorto installation. At a minimum,
materials should be washed with detergent and rinsed
thoroughly with clean water. Steam-cleaning and tiigh
pressure, hot water cleaners provide excellent cleaning
of cutting oils and lubricants left on casings and screens
after their manufacture (particularly for metal casing
and screen materials). To ensure that these and other
sampling materials are protected from contamination
prior to placement down-hole,  materials should be
covered (with plastic sheeting oTotheFmaterial), and
kept off the ground.                          T

All wells should allow free entry of water. The water
produced  should be as clear and silt-free as possible.
For drinking water supplies, sediment in the raw water
can create additional pumping and treatment costs and
lead to the  general unpalatability of the water. With
monitoring wells, sediment-laden water can greatly
lengthen filtering time and create chemical interfere ice
in sample analyses.

Commercially manufactured well screens are preferred
for monitoring wells so long as the screen slot siz
appropriate. Sawed or torch-cut  casing may
                                             3 is
                                              be
satisfactory in deposits where medium to coarse shnd
or gravel predominate. In formations where fine se
                                              nd,
silt, and clay predominate, sawed or torch-cut slots will
be too large to retain the aquifer materials, and the well
may clog or fill with sediment. The practice of sawing
slots  in PVC pipe should be avoided  in monitoring
situations where organic chemicals are of concern,
because this procedure exposes fresh surfaces of PVC,
increasing the possibility of releasing  compound
ingredients or reaction products.

It may be helpful to have several slot-sized well screens
on site  so that the proper manufactured screen and
slots can be placed in the hole afterthe aquifer materials
have been inspected. Gravel pack of a size compatible
with the selected screen slot size will further help rejtain
the finer fractions of material and allow free entry of
water into the well by creating a zone of higher
permeability around the well screen.

For  natural-packed  wells,  where  relatively
homogeneous, coarse materials predominate,  a slot
size should be selected based on the effective size [and
uniformity coefficient of the formation materials.  The
effective size is equivalent to the sieve size that will
retain 90 percent (or passes 10 percent) of the formation
material; the uniformity coefficient is the ratio of the
sieve size that will retain 40 percent (orpass 60 percent)
of the formation material to the effective size (Aller and
others  1989).   If an artificial pack is used, a uniform
gravel-pack size that is from three to five times the 50
percent retained size of the formation and a screen size
that will retain at least 90 percent of the pack material
should be selected (Walker, 1974). The gravel-pack
should be composed of clean, uniform quartz sand.

The  gravel-pack should be placed carefully to avoid
bridging in the hole and to allow uniform settling around
the screen.  A tremie pipe can be used to guide the sand
to the bottom of the hole and around the screen. The
pipe should be lifted slowly as the annulus between the
screen and borehole as the borehole fills. If the depth of
water standing in the annulus is not great, the sand can
be simply poured from the surface. The volume of sand
required to fill the annulus to the desired depth (usually
about 1 foot above the top of the screen) should be
calculated.  Field measurements  should be taken  to
confirm that the pack has reached this level before
backfilling or sealing procedures start.

Screen Length and Depth of Placement
The  length of screen and the depth at which it is placed
depend,  to a  large degree, on the behavior of the
contaminant as it moves through the unsaturated and
saturated zones,  and  on the goal of the monitoring
program. When monitoring an aquifer used as a water
supply, the entire thickness  of  the  water-bearing
formation could be screened (just as a production well
might be). In regional aquifer studies, production wells
commonly are used for sampling. Such samples would
provide water integrated over the entire thickness of the
water-bearing zone(s), and would be similar in quality to
what would be found in a drinking-water supply.

When specific depth intervals must be sampled at one
location, vertical  nesting of wells is common.  This
technique is often necessary when the saturated zone
is too thick to adequately monitor with one long-screened
section (which would dilute the collected sample). Since
contaminants tend to stratify within the saturated zone,
collecting a sample integrated over a thick zone will
provide  little or no information on the depth and
concentration that a contaminant may have reached.
Furthermore, nested wells provide information on the
water level or potential that exists at each well screen.
These data are essential to an understanding of the
vertical component of flow.

Screen lengths of 1 to 2 feet are common in detailed
plume  geometry investigations. Thick  aquifers would
require that several wells be completed at different
depth intervals. In such situations (and depending on

-------
the magnitude of the aquifersaturated thickness), screen
lengths of no more than 5 to 10 feet should be used.
Monitoring wells can be constructed in separate holes
placed closely together or in one larger diameter hole,
as  shown in Figure  1-3. Vertical movement of
contaminants in  the well bore before and after well
completion may be difficult to prevent since it is difficult
to seal several wells in one hole.Thus, multiple holes
may needto be drilled to ensure well integrity. Specially
constructed installations have been developed to sample
a large number of points vertically over short intervals
(Morrison and Brewer,  1981;  Pickens, 1981; and
Torstensson, 1984;  Figures 1-4 and 1-5).
              sna
                       -Bukm ITyp.1
                    -F«I«fS»ndlTvp,l
                       Screened kilotval
Figure 1-3. Typical Multlwell Installations (from
Johnson,1983)


In other situations, only the first water-bearing zone
encountered will require monitoring (for example, when
monitoring near a potential contaminant source  in a
relatively impermeable glacial till). The "aquifer" or zone
of interest in such an instance may be only several
inches to  a few feet thick. Screen length should be
limited to 1 to 2 feet in these cases to minimize siltation
problems from surrounding fine-grained materials and
possible dilution  effects from water contributed by
uncontaminated zones.

Because of the chemical reactions that occur when
ground water contacts  the  atmosphere,  particularly
when dealing with volatile compounds, the screened
section should  not be aerated. Generally, well depth
should assure that the screened section is always fully
submerged. The design should consider fluctuations in
the elevation of the top of the saturated zone caused by
seasonal variations or human-induced changes.
FMd IniulUlkw
    ,— End Op
                                                                                 Crott Sectkm of
                                                                                 S«m(*ng Point
                                                    Gfouod Surfaca
                                                              -/
                                                                 -PVCPip«
                                                                 - Coupling
                                                               >
                                                                                              *-Se«tn
                                                                 -EndCip
                                                   Figure 1-4. Schematic Diagram of a Multilevel
                                                   Sampling Device (from Pickens and others, 1981)
                                                     BontoniM SurfKI  f~"
                                                                '  '"'* Ci«nd-W«W»L«vel '•_*>•;
                                                        A. Snub As Lilt S*H)!*t with PVC Citing
                                                   Figure 1-5. Single (a) and Multiple (b) Installation
                                                   Configurations for an Air-Lift Sampler (from
                                                   Morrison and Brewer, 1981)
                                                   Monitoring for contaminants  with densities different
                                                   than waterdemands special attention. In particular, low
                                                   density organic compounds, such as gasoline, will float
                                                   ontheground-watersurface(Gillham and others, 1983).
                                                   Monitoring wells constructed to detect floating
                                                   contaminants should contain screens that extend above
                                                   the zone of saturation so that these lighter substances
                                                   can enter the well. The screen length and position must

-------
accommodate the magnitude and depth of variations in
water-table elevation. However, the thickness of floating
products in the well does not necessarily indicate the
thickness of the product in the aquifer.

Sealing Materials and Procedures
It is critical that the screened part of each  monitoring
well access ground water from a specific depth interval.
Vertical movement of ground water in the vicinity of the
well can greatly  influence sample quality  (Keith -and
others, 1982). Rainwater can infiltrate backfill, potentially
diluting or contaminating samples; vertical seepagje of
leachate along  the well casing will also produce
unrepresentative samples (particularly  important  in
multilevel installations such as in Figures 1-3,1-4, land
1 -5). Even more importantly, the creation of a conduit in
the annulus of the monitoring well that could contribute
to or hasten the spread of contamination is to be strictly
avoided. Several  methods have  been  employed
successfully to isolate contaminated zones duringlthe
drilling process (Burkland and Raber, 1983; Perry and
Hart, 1985).

Monitoring wells  are usually sealed with neat cerr ent
grout, dry bentonite  (powdered,  granulated,  or
pelletized), or bentonite slurry. Well seals usually are
installed at two places within the annulus:  one just
above the screened interval and the other at the ground
surface  to inhibit downward leakage of  surface
contaminants.

Bentonite traditionally has been considered to provide
a much  better seal than cement.  However,  recent
investigations on the use of clay liners for hazardous
waste disposal have shown that some  organic
compounds migrate through bentonite with little or no
attenuation (Brown, and others, 1983).  Therefore,
cement may offer some benefits over bentonite.

Bentonite most often is used as a down-hole sea  to
prevent vertical migration within the well annulus. When
bentonite must be placed below the water table  (or
where water has risen in the borehole), it is recommended
that a bentonite slurry be tremied down the annulus to
fill the hole from the  bottom upward. In  collapsible
materiai conditions, where-the"borehole has collapsed
to a point just above  the water table, dry bentonite
(granulated or pelletized works best) can be pou
down the hole.
red
Bentonite clay has appreciable ion-exchange capacity,
which may interfere with the chemistry of collected
samples when the seal is adjacent to the screen or v/ell
intake. When improperly placed,  cement grout has
been known to seriously affect the pH of sampled wa er.
Therefore, special attention and care should be exercised
during placement of a down-hole seal. Approximately 1
foot (at a minimum) of gravel-pack or naturally collapsed
material should extend above the top of the well screen
to ensure that the sealing materials do  not migrate
downward into the well screen. If the sealing material is
too watery before being placed down the hole, sealing
matejiajsjnay settle or migrate into the gravel-pack or
screened area, and the fine materials in the seal may
penetrate the natural or artificial pack.

While a neat cement (sand and cement, no gravel) grout
is often recommended,  especially for surface sealing,
shrinkage and cracking of the cement upon curing and
weathering can create an improper seal. Shrink-resistant
cement  (such as Type K Expansive  Cement) and
mixtures of small amounts of bentonite with neat cement
have been used successfully to help prevent cracking.

Development
Development is a facet of monitoring well installation
that often is overlooked. During the drilling process,
fine-grained materials smearon the sidesoftheborehole,
forming a  mud  "cake" that reduces  the  hydraulic
conductivity of the materials opposite the screened part
of the well. To facilitate entry of water into the monitoring
well  (a  particularly important factor for  low-yielding
geologic materials), this mud cake must be broken
down and the fine-grained materials removed from the
well or well bore. Development also removes  fluids,
primarily water, which  are introduced to the water-
bearing formations during the drilling process.

Additionally, monitoring wells must be developed to
provide water free of suspended solids for sampling.
When sampling for metal  ions and other  inorganic
constituents, water samples must  be filtered and
preserved at the well site at the time of sample collection.
Improperly developed monitoring wells will  produce
samples containing suspended sediments that will both
bias the chemical analysis of the collected samples and
frequently cause clogging of  the field  filtering
mechanisms.

The time and money spent for this important procedure
will expedite  sample filtration and result in  samples
more representative of water contained in the formation
being monitored. The time saved in field filtration alone
will more than offset the cost of development.

Successful development  methods  include bailing,
surging, and flushing with airorwater. The basic principle
behind each method is to create reversals of flow in and
out of the well (and/or borehole), which tend to break
down the mud cake and draw the finer materials into the
hole for removal. This process also aids in removing the
finer fraction of materials in proximity to the borehole,

-------
leaving behind  a "natural" pack  of coarser-grained
materials.

Years ago, small-diameter well  development most
commonly was achieved through use of a bailer. The
bailer was about the only "instrument" that had been
developed for use in such wells. Rapidly dropping and
retrieving the bailer in and out of the water caused a
back-and-forth action of water in the well, moving some
of the more loosely bound fine-grained materials into
the well where they could be removed.

Depending on the depth of water in the well, the length
of the well screen, and the volume of water the bailer
could displace, this method was not always very efficient.
"Surge blocks," which could fit inside 2-inch diameter
wells,  provided some improvement over bailing
techniques. Such devices are simply plungers that,
when moved  vigorously up and down, transfer that
energy to an in-and-out action on the water near the well
screen. Surge blocks have the potential to move larger
quantities of water with higher velocities, but they pose
some risk to the well casing and  screen if the surge
block fits too tightly orifthe up-and-down action becomes
too vigorous.  Improved  surge block design has been
the subject of some recent investigation (Schalla and
Landick, 1985).

In more productive aquifers, "overpumping" has been a
popular method for well development. With this method,
a pump is alternately turned on (usually at  a slightly
higher rate than the well can sustain) and off to simulate
a surging action in the well. A problem with this method
is that overpumping does not create as pronounced an
outward movement of water  as  does  surging.
Overpumping may tend to bridge  the fine and coarse
materials, limiting the movement of the fine  materials
into the well and thereby limiting the effectiveness of the
method.

Pumping with air also has been used effectively (Figure
1-6). Better development has been accomplished by
attaching differently shaped devices to the end of an
airline to force the air out into the formation. Figure 1-7
shows an example. Such a device causes a much more
vigorous action on the movement of material in proximity
to the  well screen while also pushing water to the
ground surface.

Air development techniques rhay expose field crews to
hazardous constituents when highly contaminated
groundwateris present. The technique also may cause
chemical reactions with species present in the ground
water,  especially volatile  organic compounds. Care
also must be  taken to filter the injected air to prevent
contamination of the well environmentwith oil and other
lubricants present in the compressor and airlines.
Comprised Air
Jl
••-••[
• o . - I
o .
o . •
0 . 0
o '
. o
o
o
• o '
d
. * o
ft ' '
Air-Watw ,
Mixture
• o .
0 0 • .
0 '. 0 . '
• ' Nozzla -^
• . * a
0,o'
• o . ""
' o .
d . .
o

—
=
1
.
:
;f
[
;
I
;
I



1







>•
'I
l-V.o.

—

|
^
~
^
1
';
r
^:
: ;
N
- , ^
i ~
- ;
: -
J .
. " o
-tf— Well Screen
o
" " 0 •
o •
O
Stnd Formation
'. * '
'. • •
.«•; .'. o
•i.;t^i :.
.' e' "a • 'o
• O '
• . o
• o ' o . .
-* " * l>
. ' O -
0' • 0 ' .

                  Air Development
Figure 1-6. Well Developments with Compressed
Air
                    Continuous Slot Well Scresn
                  -Jet Nozzle
Figure 1-7. The Effects of High-Velocity Jetting
Used for Well Development through Openings in
a Continuous-Slot Well Screen
                                               8

-------
Development procedures  for  monitoring  wells  in
relatively unproductive geologic materials are somewhat
limited.  Due to the low hydraulic conductivity of tljie
materials, surging of water in and out of the well casing
is extremely difficult. Also, when the well is pumped, the
entry rate of the water is  inadequate  to effectively
remove fines from the well  bore and the gravel-pack
material outside the well screen.

Where an open borehole can be sustained in this type
of geologic setting, clean water can be circulated down
the well casing, out through the screen, and back up the
borehole (Figure 1-8). Relatively high water velocities
can be maintained and the mud cake from the borehole
wall can be broken  down  effectively and removed.
Because of the low hydrau lie conductivity of the geologic
materials outside the well, only a small amount of water
will penetrate the formation being  monitored. Trjis
development procedure can be done before and after
placement of a gravel-pack but must be conducted
before a well has been sealed. Afterthe gravel-pack has
been installed, water should not be circulated too quickly
or the gravel-pack will be lifted out of the boreho e.
Immediately following development, the well should be
sealed,  backfilled, and pumped for a short period jto
stabilize the formation around the outside of the screen
and to ensure that the well will produce fairly cle|ar
water.
                     Water
Figure 1-8. Well Development by Back-Flushing
with Water
Security
For most monitoring well installations, some precautions
must be exercised to protect the surface portions of the
well from damage.  In many instances, inadvertent
vehicular accidents  do occur; also, monitoring  well
installations seem particularly vulnerable to grass
mowers. Vandalism is often a major concern, from
spontaneous "hunters" looking  for a likely target to
premeditated destruction of property associated with
an unpopular operation. Several simple solutions can
be employed to help minimize the damage due to
accidental collisions. However, outwitting the determined
vandal may be an impossible undertaking and certainly
an expensive one.

The basic problem in maintaining the physical condition
of any monitoring  well is anticipating the hazards that
might befall that particular installation. Some situations
may call for making the well highly visible whereas
others may require keeping the well inconspicuous.

Where the most  likely problem is one  of vehicular
contact, be it mowers, construction traffic, orothertypes
of two-, three-, orfour-wheeled traffic, the first thing that
can be done is to make the top of the well easy to see.
It should extend far enough above ground to be visible
above grass, weeds, or small shrubs. If that is not
practical, use a "flag" that extends above the  well
casing. A flag is also helpful for periods when leaves or
snow have buried  low-lying objects.

The well casing should also be painted a bright color
(orange and yellow are the most visible). This not only
makes the well more visible but also protects metal
casing material  from rusting. Care  should be taken to
prevent paint from getting  inside the well casing or in
threaded fittings that may contact sampling equipment.

The owners/operators of the site being monitored should
also know the location of each installation. They should
receive maps clearly and exactly indicating the position
of the wells, and their employees should be informed of
the importance of those installations, the cost associated
with them, and the difficulty involved in replacement.

The segment of the well that extends above the ground
also can  be reinforced,  particularly  if the well  is
constructed of  PVC or TeflonR. The  well could be
constructed such that only the portion of the well above
the water table is metal. In this manner, the integrity of
the sample is maintained as ground watercontacts only
inert material, and the physical condition of the well is
maintained as the upper metal portion is better able to
withstand impact.

There are two argu ments to consider when constructing

-------
a well in this manner. The arguments focus on the weak
point in the well construction: at or near the juncture of
the metal and nonmetal casings. One argument suggests
that a longer section of metal casing is superior because
its additional length in the ground provides more strength.
Thus, a break is less likely to occur (although the casing
is likely to be bent). The other argument suggests that
should a break in the casing occur, a shorter length of
metal casing is superior because  a break nearer to
ground surface is easier to repair. Each argument has
its merits; only experience with site conditions is likely
to produce the best solution.

The use of "well protectors" is another popular solution
that involves the use of a larger diameter steel casing
placed around the monitoring well at the ground surface
and extending several feet below ground (Figure 1-9).
The protectors are usually seated in the cement surface
seal to a depth below the frost line.

Commonly, well protectors are equipped with a locking
cap, which ensures against tampering with the inside of
the well. Dropping  objects down the well may clog the
well screen or prohibit the sampling device from reaching
water, and the quality of the ground  water may  be
altered, particularly where small quantities (perhaps
drops) of an organic liquid may be suff icientto completely
contaminate the well.
       Monitoring Well
                                _Well Protector with
                                Lockable Cap
Figure 1-9. Typical Well Protector Installation
Problems associated with vandalism run from simple
curiosity to outright wanton destruction. Obviously, sites
within secured, fenced  areas are less likely to be
vandalized. However, there is probably no sure way to
deter the determined vandal, short of posting a 24-hour
guard. In such situations, well protectors are a must.
The wells should be kept as inconspicuous as possible.
However, the benefits of "hiding" monitoring wells must
be weighed against the costs of delays  in finding them
for sampling and the potential costs  for  repairs or
maintenance on untried security designs.

In some situations, it might be a good policy to notify the
public of the need for the monitoring wells. Properly
asserting that  each  well serves an  environmental
monitoring purpose and that the  wells have been
constructed to ensure public well-being may create a
civic conscience that would help to minimize vandalism.

As with all the  previously mentioned monitoring well
components, no single solution will best meet every
monitoring situation. Knowledge of the social, political,
and economic conditions of the geographic area  and
circumstances surrounding the need for ground-water
monitoring will dictate, to a large degree, the type of well
protection needed.

Monitoring Well Drilling Methods

As might be expected, different drilling techniques  can
influence the quality of a ground-water sample. This
applies to the drilling method employed  (e.g., augered,
driven, or rotary), as well as the driller. There is no
substitute for a conscientious driller willing to take the
extra time and care  necessary to  complete a good
monitoring well installation.

Among the criteria used to select an appropriate drilling
method are the following factors,  listed in order of
importance:

1. Hydrologic information
   a.  type of formation
   b.  depth of drilling
   c.  depth of desired screen setting below the top of
        the  zone of saturation
2. Types of pollutants expected
3. Location of drilling site, i.e., accessibility
4. Design of monitoring well
5. Availability of drilling  equipment

Table 1 -1 summarizes several different drilling methods,
and their advantages and disadvantages when used for
monitoring  well  construction.  Several  excellent
publications are referenced  for detailed discussions
(Campbell and Lehr, 1973;  Fenn and others, 1977;
                                                 10

-------
         Method
                                     Drilling Principle
                                            Advantages
                                               Disadvantages
       Drive Point
     Auger, Hollow-
     and Solid-stem
         Jetting
       Cable-tool
      (Percussion)
1.25 to 2 inch ID casing with
pointed screen mechanically
driven to depth.
Successive 5-foot flights of spiral-
shaped drill stem are rotated into
the ground to create a hole.
Cuttings are brought to the surface
by the turning action of the auger.
Washing action of water forced out
of the bottom of the drill rod clears
hole to allow penetration. Cuttings
brought to surface by water flowing
up the outside of the drill rod.
Hole created by dropping a heavy
"string" of drill tools into well bore.
crushing materials at bottom.
Cuttings are removed occasionally
by bailer. Generally, casing is
driven just ahead of the the bottom
of the hole; a hole greater than 6
inches in diamerter is usually
made.
Inexpensive.

Easy to install, by hand if
necessary.

Water samples can be collected as
driving proceeds.

Depending on overburden, a good
seal between casing and formation
can be achieved.
Inexpensive.

Fairly simple operation.  Small rigs
can get to difficult-to-reach areas.
Quick set-up time.

Can quickly construct shallow wells
in firm, noncavey materials.

No drilling fluid required.

Use of hollow-stem augers greatly
facilitates collection of split-spoon
samples.

Small-diameter wells can be built
inside hollow-stem flights when
geologic materisl are cavey.
Inexpensive. Driller often not
needed for shallow holes.

In firm, noncavey deposits where
hole will stand open, weU
construction fairly simple.
Can be used in rock formations as
well as unconsolidated formations.

Fairly accurate logs can be
prepared from cuttings if collected
often enough.

Driving a casing ahead of hole
minimizes cross-contamination by
vertical leakage of formation
waters.

Core samples can be obtained
easily.
Difficult to sample from smaller diameter
drive points if water level is below suction
lift Bailing possible.

No formation samples can be collected.

Limited to fairly soft materials. Hard to
penetrate compact, gravelly materials.

Hard to develop. Screen may become
clogged if thick clays are penetrated.

PVC and Teflon casing and screen are not
strong enough to be driven. Must use
metal construction materials which may
influence some water quality determina-
tions.

Depth of penetration limited, especially in
cavedy materials. Maximum depths 150
feet.

Cannot be used in rock or well-cemented
formations. Difficult to drill in cobbles/
boulders.

Log of well is difficult to interpret without
collection of split spoons due to the lag
time for cuttrings to reach ground surface.

Vertical leakage of water through borehole
during driling is likely to occur.

Solid-stem limited to fine grained,
unconsolidated materials that win not
collapse when  unsupported.

With hollow-stem flights, heaving materials
can present a problem. May need to add
water down auger to control heaving or
wash materials from auger  before
completing well.

Somewhat slow, especially with increasing
depth.

Extremely difficult to use in  very coarse
materials, i.e., cobbles/boulders.

A water supply is needed that is under
enough pressure to penetrate the geologic
materials present

Difficult to interpret sequence  of geologic
materisl from cuttings.

Maximum depth 150 feet, depending on
geology and water pressure capabilities.

Requires an experienced driller.

Heavy steel drive pipe used to keep hole
open and drilling "tools" can limit
accessibility.

Cannot run some geophysical logs due to
presence of drive pipe.

Relatively slow drilling method.
Table 1-1. Advantages and Disadvantages of Selected Drilling Methods for Monitoring Well
Construction

                                                                  11

-------
         Method
                                      Drilling Principle
                                             Advantages
                                             Disadvantages
     Hydraulic Rotary
     Reverse Rotary
        Air Rotary
     Air-Percussion
  Rotary or Downhote-
        Hammer
Rotating bit breaks formation;
cuttings are brought to the
surface by a circulating fluid
(mud). Mud is forced down the bit.
and up the annulus between the drill
stem and hole waU. Cuttings are
removed by settling in a "mud pir at
the ground surface and the mud is
circulated back down the drill stem.
Similar to Hydraulic Rotary method
except the drilling fluid is circulated
down the borehole outside the drill
stem and is pumped up the Inside, just
the reverse of the normal rotary
method.  Water Is used as the drilling
fluid, rather than a mud, and the hole
is kept open by the hydrostatic
pressure of the water standing in the
borehole.
Very similar to Hydraulic Roatary, the
main difference being that air is used
as the primary drilling fluid as opposed
to mud or water.
Air Rotary with a reciprocating hammer
connected to the bit to fracture rock.
Drilling is fairly quick in all types of
geologic materials.

Borehole will stay open from
formation of a mud wall on sides of
borehole by the circulating drilling
mud. Eases geophysical logging
and well construction.

Geologic cores can be collected.

Virtually unlimited depths possible.
Creates a very "clean" hole, not
dinted with drilling mud.

Can be used in all geolotc
formations.

Very deep penetrations possible.

Split-spoon sampling possible.
Can be used in all geologic
formations; most successful in
highly fractured environments.

Useful at any depth.

Fairly quick.

Drilling mud or water not required.
Very fast penetrations.

Useful in all geoloogic
formations.

Only small amounts of water
needed for dust and bit
temperature control.

Cross contamination potential
can be reduced by driving
casing.
Expensive, requires experienced driller
and fair amount of peripheral equipment

Completed well may be difficult to
develop, especially small-diameter wells,
because of mud wall on borehole.

Geologic logging by visual inspection of
cuttings is fair due to persence of drilling
mud.  Thin beds of sand, gravel, or day
may be missed.

Presence of drilling mud can contaminate
water samples, especially the organic,
biodegradable muds.

Circulation of drilling fluid through a
contaminated zone can create a hazard at
the ground surface with the mud pit and
cross-contaminate clean zones during
circulation.

A large water supply is needed to
maintain hydrostatic pressure in deep
holes and when highly conductive
formations are encountered.

Expensive-experienced driller and much
peripheral equipment required.

Hole diameters are usually large,
commonly 18 inches or greater.

Cross-contamination from circulating
water likely.

Geologic samples brought to surface are
generally poor, circulating water will
"wash" finer materials from sample.

Relatively expensive.

Cross-contamination from vertical
communication possible.

Air will be mixed with water in the hole
and that which is blown from the hole,
potentially creating unwanted reactions
with contaminants; may affect "represen-
tative" samples.

Cuttings and water blown from the hole
can pose a hazard to crew and
surrounding environment if toxic
compounds encountered.

Organic foam additives to aid cuttings
removal may contaminate samples.

 Relatively expensive.

 As with most hydraulic rotary methods,
 the rig is fairly heavy, limiting accessibil-
 ity.

 Vertical mixing of water and air creates
 cross-contamination potential.

 Hazard posed to surface environment if
 toxic compounds encountered.

 Organic foam additives for cuttings'
 removal may contaminate samples.
Table 1-1. Continued
                                                                   12

-------
Johnson, Inc., 1972; and Scalf and others, 1981). The
table  also gives a concept of  the  advantages and
disadvantages  that  need  to be considered  wrlen
choosing a  drilling technique for different site and
monitoring situations (see, also, Lewis, 1982; Luhdbrff
and Scalmanini, 1982; Minning, 1982; and Voyt|ek,
1983).

Hollow-stem  augering is one of the most  desirable
drilling methods for constructing monitoring wells. No
drilling fluids are used and disturbance of the geologic
materials penetrated is minimal. Depths are usually
limited to no more than 150 feet.  Typically, auger rigs
are not used when consolidated rock must be penetrated.
In formations where the borehole will not stand open,
the monitoring well can be constructed inside the hollow-
stem auger priorto its removal from the hole. Genera lly,
this limits the diameter of the well that can be built 13 4
inches. The hollow-stem has an added advantage in
offering the ability to collect continuous in situ geologic
samples without removal of the auger sections.
The  solid-stem auger is most useful in fine-grain
pd,
unconsolidated materials that will not collapse when
unsupported. The method is similar to the hollow-st 3m
except that the auger flights must be removed from the
hole to allowthe insertion of the well casing and screen.
Cores cannot be collected when using a solid-stem.
Therefore, geologic sampling must rely on cuttings that
come to the  surface, which is an unreliable method
because the depth from which the cuttings are derived
is not precisely known.                          |

Cable-tool drilling is one of the oldest methods used in
the water  well industry.  Even though the rate
penetration is rather slow, this method offers many
advantages for monitoring well construction. With
cable-tool, excellent formation samples can be collec
and  the presence of thin permeable  zones can
 of
tie
:ed
be
detected. As drilling progresses, a casing is normally
driven and this provides an ideal temporary cas ng
within which to construct the monitoring well.

In air-rotary drilling, air is forced down the drill stem and
back  up the borehole  to remove the cuttings. This
technique has been found to be particularly well sui:ed
to drilling in fractured rock. If the monitoring is intended
for  organic  compounds, the  air must be filtered to
ensure that oil from the air compressor is not introduced
into the formation to be monitored. Air-rotary should jiot
be used in highly contaminated environments because
the water and cuttings blown out of the hole are difficult
to control and can pose a hazard to the drill crew and
observers. Where volatile compounds are of  interest,
air-rotary can volatilize them and cause water samples
to be unrepresentative of in situ conditions. The use of
foam additives to aid cuttings' removal presents the
opportunity for organic contamination of the monitoring
well.

Air-rotary with  percussion hammer increases  the
effectiveness of air-rotary for  materials likely to cave
and highly  creviced formations. Addition of  the
percussion hammer gives air-rotary the ability to drive
casing,  which reduces the loss of air circulation in
fractured rock and aids in maintaining an open hole in
soft formations. The capability to construct monitoring
wells inside the driven casing, prior to its being pulled,
adds to the appeal of air-percussion. However, the
problems with contamination and crew safety must be
considered.

Reverse circulation rotarydrilling has limited application
for  monitoring well construction. Reverse circulation
rotary requires that large quantities of water be circulated
down the borehole  and up the drill stem to remove
cuttings. If permeable formations are  encountered,
significant quantitiesof watercan move into the formation
to be monitored, thus altering the quality of the water to
be sampled.

Hydraulic or "mud" rotary is probably the most popular
method used in the waterwell industry. Hydraulic rotary,
however, presents some disadvantages for monitoring
well construction. In hydraulic rotary technique, adrilling
mud (usually bentonite) is circulated down the drill stem
and up the  borehole to remove  cuttings. The  mud
creates a wall on the side of the borehole that must be
removed from the  screened area by development
procedures. With small diameterwells, the drilling mud
is not always completely removed. The ion-exchange
potential of most drilling muds is high and may effectively
reduce the concentration of trace metals in water entering
the well. In addition,  the use of biodegradable, organic
drilling muds, rather than  bentonite, can introduce
organic components to water sampled from the well.

Most ground-water monitoring wells will be completed
in glacial or unconsolidated materials, and generally will
be  less than 75  feet in depth. In these applications,
hollow-stem augering usually will be the method of
choice. Solid-stem auger, cable-tool, and air-percussion
also offer advantages depending on the geology and
contaminant of interest.

Geologic Samples
Permit applications fordisposal of waste materials often
require that geologic samples be collected at the disposal
site. Investigations  of ground-water  movement  and
contaminant transport also should include the collection
of geologic samples for physical inspection and testing.
                                                13

-------
Stratigraphic samples  are  best collected  during
monitoring well drilling.

Samples can be collected continuously, at each change
in Stratigraphic unit, or, in homogeneous materials, at
regular intervals. These samples may later be classified,
tested, and analyzed for physical properties, such as
particle-size distribution, textural classification, and
hydraulic conductivity, and for chemical analyses, such
as ion-exchange capacity, chemical composition, and
specific parameter teachability.

Probably the most common method of material sampling
is a "split-spoon" sampler.  This device consists of a
hollow cylinder, 2  inches in diameter, that is 12 or 18
inches long, and split in half lengthwise. The halves are
held together with threaded couplings at each end; the
top end attaches to the drill rod, and the bottom end is
a drive shoe (Figure 1 -1 Oa). The sampler is lowered to
the bottom of the hole and driven ahead of the hole with
a weighted "hammer" striking an anvil  at the upper end
of the drill rod. The sample is forced up the inside of the
hollow tube and is held in place with a basket trap or flap
valve. The trap or valve allows the sample to enter the
tube but not exit,  although retention  of noncohesive,
sandy material in  the tube is often difficult. After the
sampler is withdrawn from the  hole, the sample is
removed by unscrewing the couplings and separating
the collection tube.

Anothercommon sampler is the thin wall tube or "Shelby"
tube. These tubes are usually 2 to  5-1/2  inches in
diameter and about 24 inches long. The cutting edge of
the tube is sharpened and the upper end is attached to
a coupling head by means of cap screws or a retaining
pin (Figure 1-1 Ob). A Shelby tube has a minimum ratio
of wall area to sample  area and creates the least
disturbance to the sample of any drive-type sampler in
current use (for hydraulic conductivity tests, minimal
disturbance is critical). After retraction, the tube is
disconnected from the head and the sample is forced
fromthetubewith a jackorpress. If sample preservation
is a majorconcern, the tube can be sealed and shipped
to the laboratory.

Apart from permit requirements, material samples are
very helpful for deciding  at what depth to complete a
monitoring  well.  Unexpected changes encountered
during drilling can alter preconceived ideas concerning
the local ground-waterflow regime. In  many instances,
the driller will be able to  detect a  variation in the
formation by a change in penetration rate,  sound, or
"feel" of the drilling rig. However, due to the lag time for
cuttings to come to the surface  and the  amount of
mixing the cuttings may undergo as they come up the
           Kl
          44-

             :...

          til
      a.
b.
Figure 1-10. Cross-Sectional Views of (a) Split
Spoon and (b) Shelby Tube Samplers (from
Mobile Drilling Co., 1972)

borehole, the only way to exactly determine the character
of the subsurface is to stop drilling and collect a sample.

Case History

Several different types of  monitoring wells were
constructed during the investigation of a volatile organic
contaminant plume  in northern Illinois (Wehrmann,
1984). A brief summary of the types of wells employed
and the reasons for their use helps illustrate how an
actual ground-water quality monitoring problem was
approached.

During the final  weeks of a 1 -year study of nitrate in
ground water in north-central Illinois, the presence of
several organic compounds was detected in the drinking
water of all five homes sampled within a large rural
residential  subdivision. The principal compound,
trichloroethylene (TCE), was present in concentrations
ranging from 50 to 1,000 micrograms per liter (u.g/L). All
the homes in the subdivision used private wells, 65 to 75
feet  deep, that  tapped a  surficial sand and gravel
deposit. Figure 1-11 shows a geologic cross section of
the study area.

Two immediate concerns needed to be addressed.
First, how many other water wells were affected and,
second, what was the contaminant source? Early
thoughts  connected the TCE to the contamination
potential of the large number of septic systems in the
subdivision. Earlier work (Wehrmann, 1983)  had
established a south-southwest direction of ground-
                                               14

-------
                                                                              High Terrace    T
                                                                                       WW
                                                  Rock River Floodplain      Low Terrace   I
       Glenwood-St. Peter Sandstone
            WW - Water Well
              T - Tollway boring
     ;':':[•'.:.-] Outwash sand snd gravel ^-Vj-':.'Vji-:'--.';.'-.:}i':'--.'V::' v.5'•;
i    |V',vM Lacustrine sands, silt and

          Organic materials (or) buried soil XiivvV-'.'^Vvi^'
  BOO-
                                                                                                L-BOO
 Figure 1-11. East-West Cross Section Across R^ock River Valley at Roscoe (from Berg and others,
 1981)
water flow beneath the subdivision. Because the area
upgradient of the subdivision was primarily farmland,
several monitoring wells were placed in that area to help
confirm or deny the possibility that the septic systems
were the source of the TCE.

Five "temporary" monitoring wells were construct 3d
upgradient of the affected subdivision. Original plans
called for driving a 2-inch diameter sandpoint to deptjhs
from 40 to 70 feet. Water samples would be collected at
10-foot intervals as the point was driven. Once 70 feet
was reached, the sandpoint would be pulled, the hole
properly abandoned, and the point driven  at a new
sampling location. The first hole was to be placed north
(upgradient) of a domestic  well found to be  highly
contaminated, and additional holes were to be placed
successively in an upgradient direction across the fie d.
In this manner, ground-watersamples could be collected
quickly at many depths and locations, the well materials
recovered, and the field left relatively undisturbed.

Once drilling  commenced, however, it became clear
that driving sandpoints into the coarse sand and grav el
                         was not possible. Consequently, an air-percussion rig
                         was brought on site and a new approach was established.
                         A 4-inch diameter screen, 2 feet long and with a drive
                         shoe, was welded to a 4-inch diameter steel casing.
                         This assembly was driven by air hammer to the desired
                         sampling depth. The bottom of the drive shoe, being
                         open, forced the penetrated geologic materials into the
                         casing and screen. These materials were then removed
                         by air rotary once the desired depth was reached. All
                         well construction materials were steam-cleaned priorto
                         use to avoid cross-contamination.  Figure 1-12 shows
                         the locations of the temporary well sitesand the analytical
                         results forTCE from samples bailed at depths of 40 and
                         50 feet.

                         The temporary  sampling program revealed that the
                         contaminant source was outside of the subdivision. Due
                         to the construction and sampling methods employed for
                         these wells, emphasis was not placed on the quantitative
                         aspects of the sampling results; however, important
                         qualitative conclusions were made. The temporary wells
                         confirmed the presence of VOCs directly upgradient of
                         the subdivision and provided information  for the
                                                15

-------
I
                                        HOUSE WELL
                                         SAMPLED
                                        SAME WEEK.
                                      2178 ppb TCE 6> 65"
           Figure 1*12. Locations and TCE Concentrations for Temporary Monitoring Wells at Roscoe, Illinois
           (from Wehrmann, 1984)
           subsequent location and  depth of  nine  permanent
           monitoring wells.

           Due to the problems associated withorganic compound
           leachability and adsorptionf rom PVC casing and screen,
           flush-threaded stainless steel casing and screen, 2
           inches  in diameter, were used for the  permanent
           monitoring wells.  The screens were 2 feet long with
           0.01-inch wire-wound slot openings. All materials
associated with the monitoring well  construction,
including the drill rig, were steam-cleaned prior to the
commencement of drilling to avoid organic contamination
from cutting oils and grease. Priorto use, the casing and
screen materials were kept off site in a covered, protected
area.  To ensure that the sandy materials would not
collapse after drilling, casing lengths and the screen
were  joined  aboveground and placed  inside of the
augers before the auger flights were pulled out of the
                                                          16

-------
hole.  The sand and gravel below the water tabl
collapsed around the screen and casing as the auger
were removed. To prevent vertical movement of watejr
down along the casing, about 3 feet of a wet bentonite/
cement mixture was placed in the annulus just above
the water table. Cuttings  (principally clean, fine to
medium sand) were backfilled above the bentonite/
cement seal to within 4 feet of  land surface. Another
bentonite/cement mixture was placed to form a seal at
ground surface, further preventing movement of water
down along the well casing. A 4-inch diameter steel
protective cover with locking cap was placed over the
casing and into the surface  seal to protect against
vandalism.

The nine wells were drilled at four locations with paired
wells at three sites and a nest of three wells at one site
(Figure 1-13). The locations were based on the analytical
results of the samples taken from the temporary wells
and basic knowledge of the ground-water flow direction.
                                 JH'E HAVEN] 11 j-M
                                 3CIVISION HILH     I

                            \l=f^^  "^TvER

Figure 1-13. Location of Monitoring Well Nests ar|d Cross Section A-A* at Roscoe, Illinois (from
Wehrmann, 1984)
                                               17

-------
Locations were numbered as nests 1 through 4 in order
of their construction. Nest 1, located immediately north
of the affected subdivision,  consists of three wells
completed at depths of approximately 60, 70, and 80
feet below ground surface. Nest 2 consists of two wells,
one 50 feet deep, and the other 60 feet deep. Nest 3
consists of two wells 40 and 55 feet deep, while nest 4
consists of two wells 50  and  60 feet deep.

Prior to completing the monitoring wells, it was felt an
additional well, 100 feet deep and adjacent to nest 1,
was needed to further define  the vertical extent of the
contaminant plume. Because the hollow-stem auger rig
was no longer available,  arrangements were made to
use a cable-tool rig. The well was constructed over a
period of 2 days, which was somewhat slower than any
of the other methods previously used (but typical of
cable-tool speeds). A 6-inch casing was driven several
feet, a bit was used to break up the materials inside the
casing, and then the materials were removed from the
casing with  a dart-valve bailer. This procedure  was
repeated until 100 feet  was  reached; then the  well
casing and screen were screwed together and lowered
down the hole. The 6-inch casing was then pulled back,
which allowed the hole to  collapse about the well, which
was constructed of stainless steel exactly like the other
nine monitoring wells. All drilling equipment and well
construction materials were  steam-cleaned prior to
use.

Appraisal of the sampling results of the monitoring wells
and the domestic wells in the area produced the pictorial
representations shown in Figures 1-14 and 1-15. Figure
1-14 conceptually  illustrates a  downgradient cross
section of the TCE plume in the vicinity of monitoring
nests 2,3, and 4. Figure 1-15 shows the likely extent of
the VOC contaminant plume. This map includes a
limited amount of data from privately owned monitoring
wells located on industrial property just upgradient of
monitoring nests 2 and 4. The dashed lines indicate the
probable extent of the contaminant plume based on the
dimensions of the plume where it passes beneath the
developed area along the Rock River.

This monitoring situation clearly  indicates the  role
different drilling and construction techniques can play in
a ground-water sampling strategy. In  each  instance,
much consideration was given to the effect the methods
used for construction and sampling would  have on the
resultant chemical data. Where quantitative results for
a  fairly "quick" preliminary investigation were not
necessary and driving sandpoints was too difficult, air-
percussion rotary methods were deemed  acceptable.
For the placement of the permanent monitoring wells,
wells that may become crucial for contaminant source
identification and possibly for litigation, the hollow-stem
auger was the technique of choice. Finally,  when the
hollow-stem auger was not available,  a cable-tool rig
was chosen. Since only one hole was to be drilled, the
relative slowness of the method became less important.
Also, the depth of completion (100 feet) in the cavey
sand and gravel made the cable-tool preferable over
the hollow-stem. In addition, each method chosen was
capable of maintaining an open hole without the use of
drilling mud, which could have affected the results of the
chemical analyses of the ground water.
                      JNest4
                                                    Land Surface
                                    A
                                   Nest 2
                                    i
                                      Top of Saturated Zone (Water Table)
                                                                                  \\
                                                               \   500-1000 Hg/L )    \\
                                                                   100-250M9/L
                                                                     <100 H9/L
                                      \
Figure 1-14. Cross Section A-A' through Monitoring nests 2,3, and 4, Looking in the Direction of
Ground-Water Flow (from Wehrmann, 1984)
                                                18

-------
                       OLOE FARM/TRESEMER SUBDIVISION
                           21 DOMESTIC WELLS
                           SAMPLED 10/3-4/83
                                10 A
Figure 1-15. General Area of Known TCE Contamination (from Wehrmann, 1984)
Summary

Critical considerations for the design of ground-water
quality monitoring networks include alternatives for wel
design and drilling techniques. With a knowledge of thq
principal chemical constituents of interest and the local
hydrogeology,  and  appreciation of subsurfac
geochemistry, appropriate materials for well design an
drillingtechniques can be selected. Wheneverpossible
physical disturbance and the amount of foreign material^
introduced into the subsurface should be minimized.

The choices of drilling methods and well construction
materials are very important  in every type of ground-
water  monitoring  program.  Details of network
construction can introduce significant bias into monitoring
data, which frequently  may be corrected only by
repeating the process  of well  siting, installation,
completion, and development. This can be quite costly
in time, effort, money, and loss of information. Undue
expense  is avoidable if planning decisions are made
cautiously with an eye to the future.

The expanding scientific literature on effective ground-
water  monitoring techniques  should be  read  and
evaluated on a continuing basis. This information will
help supplementguidelines, such as this.forapplications
to specific monitoring efforts.

-------
References

Aller, and  others, 1989, Handbook  of Suggested
Practices forthe design and installation of ground-water
monitoring wells:  National Water Well Association,
Dublin, OH EPA 600/4-89/034.

Barcelona,  M.J., J.P. Gibb, J.A. Helfrich, and E.E.
Garske, 1985, Practical guideforground-water sampling:
Illinois State Water Survey,  U.S.  Environmental
Protection  Agency,  Robert S. Kerr  Environmental
Research  Laboratory, Ada,  OK, and  Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV.

Barcelona, M.J., 1984, TOC determinations in ground
water: Ground Water, v.22, no.1, pp.18-24.

Barcelona,  M.J., J.A. Helfrich, E.E. Garske, and J.P.
Gibb, 1984, A  laboratory evaluation of ground water
sampling  mechanisms:  Ground Water  Monitoring
Review, v.4, no. 2, pp. 32-41.

Barcelona,  J.J., J.P. Gibb, and R.A. Miller, 1984. A
guide to the selection of materials for monitoring well
construction and ground-water sampling. Illinois State
Water Survey Contract Report 327. Illinois State Water
Survey, Champaign, IL.

Berg, R.C., J.P. Kempton, and A.N.  Stecyk. 1981,
Geologyforplanning in Boone and Winnebago Counties,
Illinois: Illinois State Geological Survey Circular 531,
Illinois State Geological Survey, Urbana,

Brown, K.W., J. Green, and J.C. Thomas, 1983, The
influence of selected organic liquids on the permeability
of clay liners:  Proc. of the Ninth Annual Research
Symposium: Land Disposal, Incineration, and Treatment
of Hazardous Wastes. U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency SHWRD/EPCS, May 2-4, 1983, Ft. Mitchell,
KY.

Burkland, P.W., and E. Raber, 1983, Method to avoid
ground-watermixingbetweentwoaquifersduringdrilling
and  well  completion procedures: Ground  Water
Monitoring Review, v. 3, no. 4, pp. 48-55.

Campbell,  M.D. and J.H. Lehr, 1973, Water well
technology: McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York,
NY.

Fenn, D., E. Cocozza, J. Isbister, 0. Braids, B. Yare, and
P. Roux, 1977, Procedures manual for ground water
monitoring at solid waste disposal facilities (SW-611).
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH.

Gibb, J.P.,  R.M.  Schuller,  and  R.A. Griffin, 1981,
Procedures for the collection of representative water
quality data  from monitoring wells:  Cooperative
Groundwater Report. Illinois State Water and Geological
Surveys, Champaign, IL.

Gillham, R.W., M.J.L Robin,  J.F. Barker, and J.A.
Cherry, 1983, Groundwater monitoring and sample
bias: American Petroleum Institute Publication 4367,
Environmental Affairs Department.

Illinois State Water Survey and Illinois State Geological
Survey, 1984, Proceedings of the 1984 ISWS/ISGS
Groundwater  Monitoring Workshop. February 27-28,
Champaign, IL.

Illinois State Water Survey and Illinois State Geological
Survey, 1982, Proceedings of the 1982 ISWS/ISGS
Groundwater  Monitoring Workshop. Illinois Section of
American Water Works Association. February 22-23,
1982, Champaign, IL.

Johnson, T.L., 1983,  A comparison of well nests  vs.
single-well completions: Ground Water Monitoring
Review, v. 3, no. 1, pp. 76-78.

Johnson, E.E., Inc., 1972,  Ground water and wells.
Johnson Division, Universal Oil Products Co., St. Paul,
MN.

Keith, S.J., LG. Wilson, H.R. Fitch, and D.M. Esposito,
1982, Sources of spatial-temporal variability in Ground-
Water Quality Data and Methods of Control: Case
Study of the  Cortaro  Monitoring  Program, Arizona:
Proc. of the Second National Symposium on Aquifer
Restoration and Ground Water Monitoring. National
Water Well Association, May 26-28, Columbus, OH.

Lewis, R.W.,  1982, Custom designing of monitoring
wellsforspecific pollutants and hydrogeologicconditions:
Proc. of the Second National Symposium on Aquifer
Restoration and Ground Water Monitoring. National
Water Well Association, May 26-28, Columbus, OH.

Luhdorff, E.E., Jr., and J.C. Scalmanini, 1982, Selection
of drilling method, well design and sampling equipment
for wells for monitoring organic contamination: Proc. of
the Second National Symposium on Aquifer Restoration
and  Ground Water Monitoring, National Water Well
Association, May 26-28, Columbus, OH.

Mackay, D.M., P.V. Roberts, and J.A. Cherry, 1985,
Transport  of  organic contaminants in  groundwater:
Environmental Science & Technology, v. 19, no. 5,  pp.
384-392.

Miller, G.D., 1982, Uptake and release of lead, chromium
and trace level volatile organics exposed to synthetic
well casings: Proc. of Second National Symposium on
                                               20

-------
Aquifer  Restoration  and Ground Water Monitoring.
National Water Well Association, May 26-28, Columbus,
OH.

Minning, R.C.,  1982, Monitoring well design  aid
installation: Proc. of Second National Symposium jn
Aquifer  Restoration  and Ground Water Monitoring.
National Water Well Association, May 26-28, Columbijis,
OH.

Mobile  Drilling  Company,  1972,  Soil sampling
equipment-accessories: Catalog 650. Mobile Drillipg
Company, Indianapolis, IN.

Morrison, R.D. and P.E. Brewer, 1981, Air-lift sampldrs
for zone of saturation monitoring:  Ground Wat,er
Monitoring Review, v. 1, no. 1, pp. 52-55.

Naymik, T.G. and M.E. Sievers, 1983, Groundwater
tracer experiment (II)  at Sand Ridge State Forest,
Illinois: Illinois State WaterSurvey Contract Report 33J4,
Illinois State Water Survey, Champaign, IL.

Naymik, T.G. and JJ. Barcelona, 1981, Characterization
of a  contaminant plume in groundwater, Meredosi|a,
Illinois: Ground Water, v. 16, no. 3, pp. 149-157.

O'Hearn, M., 1982,  Groundwater monitoring at the
Havana Power Station's ash  disposal  ponds  arid
treatment lagoon: Confidential Contract Report, Illincjis
State Water Survey, Champaign, IL.

Perry,  C.A. and R.J. Hart, 1985,  Installation of
observation wells on hazardous waste sites in Kansas
using a hollow-stem auger: Ground Monitoring Review,
v. 5,  no. 4, pp. 70-73.

Pettyjohn, W.A. and A.W. Hounslow, 1982, Organic
compounds and ground-waterpollution: Proc. of Second
National Symposium on Aquifer Restoration and Ground
Water Monitoring. National Water Well Associatiop,
May  26-28, Columbus, OH.

Pettyjohn, W.A.,  W.J. Dunlap,  R. Cosby,  and J.
Keeley,  1981, Sampling  ground water  for organic
contaminants: Ground Water v. 19, no. 2, pp.  180-189.
Pfannkuch, H.O., 1981, Problems of monitoring network
design to detect unanticipated contamination: Proc. of
First  National  Ground  Water Quality Monitoring
Symposium and Exposition,  National Water Wejll
Association, May 29-30, Columbus, OH.

Pickens, J.F., J.A. Cherry, R.M. Coupland, G.E. Grisak,
W.F. Merritt, and B.A. Risto, 1981, A multi-level device
for ground-water sampling: Ground Water Monitoring
Review, v. 1, no. 1, pp. 48-51.

Rinaldo-Lee, M  . B ., 1983, Small- vs. large-diameter
monitoring wells: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v.
3, no. 1, pp. 72-75.

Scalf, M.R., J.F. McNabb, W.J. Dunlap, R.L. Cosby,
and  J.  Fryberger,  1981, Manual of  ground-water
sampling procedures:  NWWA/EPA Series,  National
Water Well Association, Worthington, OH. EPA-600/2-
81-160.

Schalla, R.,and R.W. Landick, 1985, Anew valved and
air-vented surge plungerfor developing small-diameter
monitor wells: Proc. of Third National Symposium and
Exposition on Ground-Water Instrumentation, National
Water Well Association, October 2-4, San Diego, CA.

Sosebee, J.B., Jr. and others 1982. Contamination of
groundwater samples with PVC adhesives and PVC
primer from monitor wells: Environmental Science and
Engineering, Inc., Gainesville, FL.

Torstensson,  B.A.,  1984, A  new system  for ground
water monitoring: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v.
4, no. 4, pp. 131-138.

Voytek, J.E., Jr., 1983, Considerations in the design
and  installation  of monitoring  wells:  Ground  Water
Monitoring Review, v. 3, no. 1, pp. 70-71.

Walker, W.H., 1974, Tube  wells, open  wells, and
optimum ground-water resource development: Ground
Water, v. 12, no. 1, pp. 10-15.

Wehrmann, H.A., 1984, An investigation of a volatile
organic chemical plume in northern Winnebago County,
Illinois: Illinois State WaterSurvey Contract Report 346,
Illinois State Water Survey, Champaign,

Wehrmann, H.A., 1983, Monitoring well  design and
construction: Ground Water Age, v. 17, no. 8, pp. 35-38.

Wehrmann, H.A., 1983, Potential nitrate contamination
of groundwater in the Roscoe Area, Winnebago County,
Illinois: Illinois State WaterSurvey Contract Report 325,
Illinois State Water Survey, Champaign, IL.

Wehrmann, H.A., 1982, Groundwater monitoring for fly
ash leachate, Baldwin Power Station, Illinois Power
Company. Confidential Contract Report, Illinois State
Water Survey, Champaign, IL.
                                              21

-------
                                            Chapter 2
                                 GROUND-WATER SAMPLING
introduction

Background
Ground-water sampling  is conducted to provide
information  on the condition of subsurface water
resources. Whether the goal of the monitoring effort is
detection or assessment of contamination, the
information gathered during sampling efforts must be of
known quality and be well documented. The most
efficientway to accomplish these goals is by developing
a sampling protocol, which is tailored to the information
needs of the program and the hydrogeology of the site
or region under investigation. This  sampling protocol
incorporates detailed descriptions of sampling
procedures and other techniques that, of themselves,
are not sufficient to document data quality or reliability.
Sampling protocols are central parts of  networks  or
investigatory strategies.

The need for reliable ground-water sampling procedures
has  been  recognized for years by a variety  of
professional,  regulatory, public, and private  groups.
The technical basis for the use of selected sampling
procedures for environmental  chemistry studies has
been developed for surface-water applications overthe
last four decades.  Ground-water quality monitoring
programs, however, have unique needs and goals that
are fundamentally different from previous  investigative
activities. The reliable detection and assessment  of
subsurface contamination require minimal disturbance
of  geochemical and hydrogeologic conditions during
sampling.

At this time, proven well construction, sampling, and
analytical protocols for ground-water sampling have
been developed for many of  the  more problematic
chemical constituents of interest. However, the
acceptance of these procedures and protocols must
await more careful documentation and firm regulatory
guidelines for monitoring program execution. The time
and  expense of characterizing actual subsurface
conditions place severe restraints on the methods that
can  be employed.  Since the technical basis for
documented, reliable drilling, sample collection, and
handling procedures  is in the  early stages  of
development, conscientious efforts to document method
performance under real conditions should be a part of
any ground-water investigation (Barcelona and others,
1985; Scalf and others, 1981).

Information Sources
Much of the literature on routine ground-water monitoring
methodology has been published in the last 10 years.
The bulk of this work has emphasized ambient resource
or contaminant resource  monitoring (detection and
assessment),  rather than case  preparation  or
enforcement efforts. General references that are useful
to the design and execution of sampling efforts are the
U.S.  Geological Survey (1977), Wood (1976), the U.S.
Environmental  Protection Agency (Brass and others,
1977; Dunlap and others, 1977; Fenn and others, 1977;
Sisk, 1981) and others (National Council of the Paper
Industry, 1982;Tinlin, 1976). In large part, these works
treat sampling  in  the context of overall monitoring
programs, providing descriptions of available sampling
mechanisms, sample collection techniques, and sample
handling  procedures. The impact of  specific
methodologies on the usefulness or reliability of the
resulting data has received little discussion (Gibb and
others, 1981).

High-quality chemical data collection is essential in
ground-water monitoring  programs. The  technical
difficulties involved in "representative" samplings have
been recognized only recently (Gibb and others, 1981;
Grisak and  others, 1978). The long-term collection of
high-quality ground-water chemistry  data  is more
involved than merely selecting a sampling mechanism
and agreeing on sample handling procedures. Efforts to
detect and assess contamination can be unrewarding
without accurate (i.e., unbiased) and  precise  (i.e.,
comparable and complete) concentration  data  on
                                               22

-------
ground-waterchemical constituents. Also, the expense
of data  collection and management argue tor
documentation of data quality.

Gillham and others (1983)  published a  very useul
reference on the principal sources of bias and imprecision
in ground-water monitoring results. Their treatment is
extensive and stresses the minimization of random
error, which can enter into well construction, sample
collection, and sample handling operations. They furth'er
stress the importance of collecting precise data ovjer
time to maximize the effectiveness of trend analysis,
particularly for regulatory purposes. Accuracy also is
very important, since the ultimate reliability of statistical
comparisons  of results from different wells (e.g.,
upgradient versus downgradient samples) may depend
on differences  between mean values for selected
constituents from relatively small replicate sample sets.
Therefore,  systematic error must be controlled  by
selecting proven methods for establishing  sampling
points and sample collection to ensure known levels pf
accuracy.

The Subsurface Environment
The subsurface environment may be categorized broad y
into two zones, the unsaturated or vadose zone and the
saturated zone. The use of the term "vadose" is morje
accurate because isolated saturated areas may exist in
the unsaturated  zone  above the  water table  of
unconfined aquifers.

Investigators  have discovered  recently  that th
subsurface is neither devoid of oxygen (Winograd an!
Robertson, 1982) nor sterile  (Wilson and  McNabl
1983; Wilson and others, 1983).  These facts  m
significantly influence the mobility and persistence
chemical species, as well as the transformations of th
original  components  of  contaminant mixture
(Schwarzenbach and others,  1985)  that have bee
released to the subsurface.

The subsurface environment also is quite different f ror i
surface water systems  in that vertical gradients in
pressure and dissolved gas content have been observed
within the usual depth ranges of monitoring interest
(i.e., 1 to 150 m [3 to 500 ft]). In some cases, these
gradients can be linked to well-defined hydrologic ojr
geochemical processes. However, reports of apparently
anomalous geochemical processes have increased in
recent years,  particularly at contaminated sites
(Barcelona and Garske, 1983;Heatonand Vogel, 1981
Schwarzenbach and others, 1985; Winograd and
Robertson, 1982; Wood and Petraitis, 1984).

The subsurface environment is not as readily accessible i
as surface water systems, and some disturbance is
necessary to collect samples of earth  materials or
ground water. Therefore, "representative" (i.e., artifact
or error free) sampling is really a function of the degree
of detail needed to characterize subsurface hydrologic
and geochemical conditions and the care taken to
minimize disturbance of these conditions in the process
(Claasen,  1982).  Each well or boring represents  a
potential conduit for short-circuited contaminant
migration or ground-water flow,  which  must be
considered a potential liability to investigative activities.

The subsurface environment is dynamic over extended
time frames and the processes of recharge and ground-
water  flow are  very  important  to a thorough
understanding of the system. Detailed descriptions of
contaminant distribution, transport, and transformation
necessarily rely on the understanding of basic flow and
fluid transport processes. Short-term investigations may
only provide a snapshot of contaminant  levels or
distributions. Since water-quality monitoring data are
normally collected on discrete dates, it is very important
that reliable collection methods are used to assure high
data quality over the course of the investigation. The
reliability of the  methods  should  be  investigated
thoroughly during the preliminary phase of monitoring
network implementation.

Although the scope  of this discussion is on  sampling
ground water for  chemical  analysis, the same data
quality requirements apply to water-level measurements
and to hydraulic conductivity testing.  These hydrologic
determinations form the basis for interpreting chemical
constituent data and  may well limit the validity of fluid or
solute transport model applications. Hydrologic
measurements must be included in the development of
the quality assurance/quality control (QA/QC) program
for ground-water quality monitoring networks.

The Sampling Problem  and Parameter Selection
Cost-effective water-quality sampling is difficult in
ground-water systems because provenfield procedures
have not been extensively documented. Regulations
that call for  "representative  sampling" alone are not
sufficient to  ensure  high-quality data collection. The
most appropriate monitoring  and sampling procedures
for a ground-water quality network will depend on the
specific purpose of the program. Resource evaluation,
contaminant detection, remedial action assessments,
and litigation studies are purposes for which effective
networks can be designed once the information needs
have been identified. Due to the time, personnel needs,
and cost of most water-quality monitoring programs, the
optimal network design should be phased so as to make
the most of the available  information as it is collected.
This approach allows for the gradual refinement of
program goals as the network is implemented.
                                                23

-------
Two fundamental considerations are common to most
ground-waterqualitymonitoringprograms: establishing
individual sampling points (i.e., in space and time) and
determining the elements of the water sampling protocol
that will be sufficient to meet the information needs of
the overall program. The placement and number of
sampling points can be phased to gradually  increase
the scale of the monitoring program. Similarly, the
chemical constituents of initial interest should provide
background ground-water quality data from which a list
of likely contaminants may be prepared as the program
progresses. Table 2-1 shows candidate chemical and
hydrologic parameters for  both  detective  and
assessment monitoring activities. Special care should
be  taken to account for possible subsurface
transformation of the principal pollutant species. Ground-
water transport of contaminants can produce chemical
distributions that vary substantially overtime and space.
In particular, transformation of organic compounds can
change  substantially  the  identity of the original
contaminant mixture (Mackay  and  others,  1985;
Schwarzenbach and others, 1985).

                  Detective Monitoring
  Chemical Parameters*
     pH. 2", TOC, TOX, Alkalinity, TDS, Eh, CI", NO,; SO/, PO,',
     SK3,, Na: K*, Ca", Mg", NH,', Fe, Mn
  Hydrologic Parameters
     Water Level, Hydraulic Conductivity
                  Assessment Monitoring
  Chemical Parameters*
     pH, Q". TOC, TOX, Alkalinity. TDS, Eh, CI', NO,: SO.: P0,s,
     SiO,, B, Na', K", Ca", Mg", NH/. Fe,  Mn. Zn. Cd, Cu, Pb, Cr.
     NS. Ag, Hg, As, Sb, Se, Be
  Hydrologic Parameters
     Water Level, Hydraulic Conductivity
  •Q ' = specific conductance, a measure of the charged species in
       solution.
In this respect, monitoring in the vadose zone is attractive
because it should provide an element of "early" detection
capability. The methodologies available for this type of
monitoring have been under development for some
time. There are distinct limitations, however, to many of
the available monitoring devices (Everett and McMillion,
1985; Everett and others, 1982; Wilson, 1981; Wilson,
1983), and it is  frequently difficult to relate observed
vadose zone concentrations quantitatively  to  actual
contaminant distributions in ground water (Everett and
others,  1984; Lindau and Spalding, 1984). Soil gas
sampling techniques and underground storage tank
monitors have been commercially developed that can
be extremely useful for source scouting.  Given the
complexity of vadose zone monitoring procedures and
the  need for additional investigation  (Bobbins and
Gemmell, 1985), implementing these techniques in
routine ground-water  monitoring networks may  be
difficult.

This chapter addresses water-quality sampling in the
saturated zone, reflecting  the  advanced state of
monitoringtechnology appropriate forthis compartment
of the subsurface. There are a numberof useful reference
materials forthe development of effective ground-water
sampling protocols, which include information on the
types of drilling  methods, well construction materials,
sampling mechanisms, and sample handling methods
currently available (Barcelona  and others,  1985;
Barcelona and others, 1983; Gillham and others, 1983;
Scalf and others, 1981; Todd and others, 1976).  To
collect sensitive, high-quality contaminant concentration
data, investigators must identify the type and magnitude
of errors  that may arise in  ground-water sampling.
Figure 2-1 presents a generalized diagram of the steps
involved in sampling and the principal sources of error.
Table 2-1. Suggested Measurements for Ground-
Water Monitoring Programs

Contaminant detection is generally the most important
aspect of a water-quality program, and must be assured
in network design. False negative contaminant readings
due to the loss of chemical constituents orthe introduction
of interfering substances that mask the presence of the
contaminants in water samples can be very serious.
Such  errors may delay  needed  remedial action and
expose  either the public  or the environment  to an
unreasonably high risk. False positive observations of
contaminants may call for costly remedial actions or
more intensive study, which are not warranted by the
actual situation. Thus, reliable sample collection and
data interpretation procedures are central to an optimized
network design.
                                                                Step
                                                            In-Situ Condition
    Establishing a Sampling Point
       Field Measurements

            t
       Sample Collection

     Sample Delivery/Transfer
     Field Blanks, Standards

      Field Determinations

      Preservation / Storage

        Transportation
                                                                              Sources of Error
Improper well construction/
placement; inappropriate
materials selection
Instrument malfunction;
operator error
Sampling mechanism bias;
operator error
Sampling mechanism bias;
sample exposure, degassing,
oxygeriation; field conditions
Operator error; matrix
interferences
Instrument malfunction;
operator error; tield conditions
Matrix interferences; handling/.
labeling errors
Delay; sample loss
 Figure 2-1. Steps and Sources of Error in Ground-
 Water Sampling
                                                   24

-------
 Strict error control at each step is necessary for
 collection of high-quality data representative of in
 conditions.

 There are two major obstacles to controlling grot nd-
 water sampling errors. First, field blanks, standa'ds,
 and split samples  used  in data quality assuraice
 programs cannot account for changes that may occur in
 the integrity of samples prior to sample delivery to
 land surface. Second, most of the sources of error
 may affect sample integrity prior to delivery are not \jvell
 documented inthe literature formany of the contaminants
 of current interest. Among these sources of error are the
 contamination of the subsurface by drilling fluids, grouts,
 or sealing materials; the sorptive or leaching eff ects| on
 water samples due  to well casing;  pump or sampl
 tubing materials'  exposures; and the effects on
 solutionchemistryduetooxygenation.depressurization,
 or gas exchange caused by the sampling mechanism.
 These sources of error have been investigated to sojme
 extentforvolatile organic contaminants underlaboratory
 conditions. However, to  achieve  confidence in field
 monitoring and sampling  instrumentation for routine
 applications, common sense and a "research" approach
 to regulatory monitoring may be needed. Two of jthe
 most critical  elements of a monitoring program are
 establishing both reliable sampling points and simple,
 efficient sampling protocols that will yield data of known
 quality.

 Establishing a Sampling Point

 Taking adequate care in selecting drilling methods, well
 construction materials, andwelldevelopmenttechniques
 should allowthe approximation of representative ground-
 water sampling from   a monitoring  well.  The
 representative nature of the water samples can be
 maintained consistently with a trained sampling staff
 and  good field-laboratory  communication. Also,
 important hydrologic  measurements, such  as wa|ter
 level and hydraulic conductivity, can be made from the
 same sampling point. A representative water sample
 may then be defined as a minimally disturbed sample
 taken after proper well purging, which will allow the
/determination of the chemical constituents of interest at
 predetermined levels of  accuracy and precision.
 Sophisticated monitoring technology and  sampling
 instrumentation are poor substitutes for an experienced
 sampling team that can  follow a proven  sampling
 protocol.

 This  section details some of the considerations in
 establishing  a reliable sampling point. There are  a
 number of  alternative approaches  for selecting  a
 sampling point in monitoring network design, includi ig
the  deploying arrays of either nested monitoring wells or
situ  multilevel devices  (Barvenik and  Cadwgan, 1983;
     Pickens and others, 1978) at various sites within the
     area of  interest.  Different  approaches  have their
     individual merits, based on the ease of verifying sampling
     point isolation, durability, cost, ease of installation, and
     site-specific factors.

the  The most effective option for specific programs should
hat  be chosen with representative sampling criteria in mind.
     The sampling points must be durable, inert towards the
     chemical constituents of interest, allow for purging of
     stagnant water, provide sufficient water for analytical
     work with minimum  disturbance, and permit  the
     evaluation of the hydrologic characteristics  of  the
ing  formation of interest. Monitoring wells can be constructed
the  to meet  these criteria because a  variety of  drilling
     methods,  materials, sampling mechanisms,  and
     pumping regimes for sampling  and hydrologic
     measurements can be selected to  meet the current
     needs of most monitoring programs.

     The placement and number of wells will depend on the
     complexity of the hydrologic setting and the degree of
     spatial and temporal detail  needed to meet the goals of
     the program. Both the directions and approximate rates
     of ground-water movement must be known in order to
     satisfactorily interpret the chemical data. With this
     knowledge, it also may be possible to estimate  the
     nature and location of pollutant sources {Gorelick and
     others, 1983). Subsurface geophysical techniques can
     be very helpful in determining the optimum placement
     of monitoring wells under  appropriate conditions and
     when sufficient hydrogeologic information is available
     (Evans and Schweitzer, 1984). Well placement should
     be viewed as an evolutionary activity that may expand
     or contract as the needs of the program dictate.

     Well Design and Construction
     Effective monitoring well design and construction require
     considerable care and at least some understanding of
     the hydrogeology and subsurface geochemistry of the
     site. Preliminary borings, well drilling experience, and
     the details of the operational history of a site can be very
     helpful. Monitoring well design criteria include depth,
     screen size, gravel-pack specifications,  and yield
     potential. These considerations differ substantially from
     those applied to production wells. The simplest, small
     diameter well completions that will permit development,
     accommodate the sampling gear,  and  minimize  the
     needto purge large volumesof potentially contaminated
     water  are  preferred for effective  routine monitoring
     activities. Helpful references include Barcelona and
     others (1983), Scalf and others (1981), and Wehrmann
     (1983).
                                                 25

-------
Well Drilling
The selection of a particular drilling technique should
depend on the geology of the site, the expected depths
of the wells, and the suitability of drilling equipment for
the contaminants of interest (see Chapter 1). Regardless
of the technique used, every effort should be made to
minimize  subsurface disturbance.  For critical
applications, the drilling rig and tools should be steam-
cleanedto minimizethe potential forcross-contamination
between formations or successive borings. The use of
drilling muds can be a liability  for trace chemical
constituent  investigations  because  foreign organic
matterwill be introduced into the penetrated formations.
Even "clay" muds without polymeric additives contain
some organic matter, which is added to stabilize the
clay suspension and may interfere with some analytical
determinations. Table 2-2 contains information on the
total and  soluble organic  carbon contents  of some
common drilling and grouting materials (Wood, 1976).
The effects of drilling muds on ground-water solution
chemistry have not been investigated in detail.

However,  existing reports  indicate that  the organic
carbon introduced during drilling can cause false water-
quality observationsforlong periods of time (Barcelona,
1984; Brobst, 1984). The fact that these interferences
are observable for gross indicators of levels of organic
carbon compounds (i.e., TOC) and reduced substances
(i.e., COD)  strongly suggests that drilling aids are a
potential source of serious error. Special situations may
call for innovative drilling techniques (Yare, 1975).

Well Development, Hydraulic Performance, and
Purging Strategy
Once a well is completed, it is necessary to prepare the
sampling pointforwatersampling and beginto evaluate
the hydraulic characteristics of the producing zone.
  These steps provide a basis for maintaining  reliable
  sampling points over the duration of a ground-water
  monitoring program.

  Well Development.  The proper development  of
  monitoring wells is  essential to the collection  of
  "representative"  water  samples. During the drilling
  process, fine particles are forced through the sides of
  the borehole into the formation, forming a mud cake that
  reduces the hydraulic conductivity of the materials in
  the immediate area of the well bore. To allow waterfrom
  the  formation  being monitored to freely  enter the
  monitoring well, this mud cake must be broken down
  opposite the well screen and the fine material removed
  from the well. This process also enhances the yield
  potential  of the well, which is a critical factor when
  constructing monitoring wells in low-yielding geologic
  materials.

  More importantly, monitoring wells must be developed
  to  provide water free  of  suspended solids. When
  sampling for metal ions and other dissolved inorganic
  constituents,  water samples  must be filtered and
  preserved at the well site at the timeof sample collection.
  Improperly developed monitoring wells will produce
  samples  containing suspended sediments that may
  both bias the chemical analysis of the collected samples
  and cause frequent clogging of field filtering mechanisms.
  The additional  time  and  money spent for well
  development will expedite sample filtration and result in
  samples that are more representative of water chemistry
  in the formation being monitored.

  Development procedures used for monitoring wells are
  similar to those used for production wells. The first step
  in development  involves the movement of water at
  alternately high and low velocity into and out of the well
                                                  Ash
                                                (%bywt)
         Organic Content
           (%bywt)
           Soluble Carbon
             (%bywt)
               Soluble
            Carbon in Total
            Organic Content
              (%bywtl
 "Bontonita" muds/grouts
   Volclay* (~90% montmorlllonite)
   Benseal'
 "Organic" muds/drilling aids
   Ez-Mud* (acrylamlde-sodium acrylate copolymer
      dispersed in food-grade oil
      [normally used in 0.25% dilution])
   Revert' (guar bean starch-based mixture!	
98.2
B8.5

11.5


 1.6
 1.8
11.5

21.5


98.4
<0.001
<0.001

 17.9


 33.8
94.4
 3.7

 2.1


85.6
 'All percentages determined on a moisture-free basis.
 'Trademark of American Colloid Co.
 'Trademark of NL Baroid/NL Industries Inc.
 Trademaik of Johnson Division, UOP Inc.
 Source: Wood, 1976.
 Table 2-2. Composition of Selected Sealing and Drilling Muds
                                                  26

-------
screen and gravel-pack to break down the mud cake pn
the well bore and loosen fine particles in the borehojle.
This step is followed by  pumping to remove these
materials from the well and the immediate area outside
the well screen. This procedure should be continued
until the water pumped from the well is visually free of
suspended materials or sediments.

Hydraulic Performance of Monitoring Wells. The
importance of understanding the hydraulics of the
geologic materials at a site cannot be overemphasized.
Collection of accurate water-level data from prope'rly
located and constructed wells provides information on
the direction of ground-water flow. The success of a
monitoring program also depends on knowledge of the
rates of travel of both the ground water and solutes. The
response of a monitoring well to pumping also must be
known to determine the proper rate and length of tirne
of pumping prior to collecting a water sample.

Hydraulic conductivity measurements provide a basis
for judging the hydraulic connection of the monitorijig
well and adjacent screened  formation to the
hydrogeologic setting. These measurements also allow
an experienced  hydrologist to estimate an optimal
sampling frequency for the monitoring  program
(Barcelona and others, 1985).

Traditionally, hydraulic conductivity testing has been
achieved by collecting drill samples, which were then
taken to the laboratory for testing. Several techniques
involving laboratory permeameters are routinely used.
Falling head or constant head permeameter tests on
recompacted samples in fixed wall ortriaxial test ceils
are among the most common. The relative applicability
of these techniques depends on both operator skill and
methodology since calibration standards  are not
available. The major  problem with laboratory test
procedures is that the determined values are based on
recompacted geologic samples ratherthan undisturbed
geologic materials. Only limited work has been done to
date on performing  laboratory tests on "undisturbed"
samples to improve the field applicability of laboratory
hydraulic conductivity results.  Melby (1989) reported
that laboratory-determined values of hydraulic
conductivity for cores of unconsolidated, fine-grained
material from Oklahoma were three to six orders jof
magnitude smaller than values determined by aquifer
testing.  Considerable care  must be exercised when
                                              ty
coefficients.
Hydraulic conductivity is most effectively determined
under field conditions by aquifer testing methods, such
as pumping or slug testing (see Chapter 4). The water-
level drawdown  can be measured during  pumping.
Alternatively, water levels can be measured after the
static water level is depressed by application of gas
pressure or elevated  by the introduction of a slug of
water. These procedures are rather straightforward for
wells that have been properly developed.

Well Purging Strategies. The number of well volumes
to be removed from a monitoring well prior to collecting
a water  sample must  be tailored to  the hydraulic
properties of the geologic materials being monitored,
the well construction parameters, the desired pumping
rate, and the sampling methodology to be employed.
No single number of well volumes to be pumped fits all
situations. The goal in establishing awell purging strategy
is to obtain water from the geologic materials being
monitored while minimizing  the  disturbance of  the
regional flow system and  the  collected sample. To
accomplish this goal, a basic understanding of well
hydraulics and the effects of pumping on the quality of
water samples is essential. Waterthat has remained in
the well casing more than about 2 hours has had the
opportunity to exchange gases with  the atmosphere
and to interact with the well casing material. Therefore,
the chemistry of water stored in the well casing is not
representative of that in the aquifer and should not be
collected for analysis. Purge volumes and pumping
rates should be evaluated on a case-by-case basis.

Gibb (1981) has shown how the measurements of
hydraulic conductivity can be used to estimate the well-
purging requirement. Figures 2-2a and 2-2b show an
example of this procedure.  In practice, it  may be
necessary to test the hydraulic conductivity of several
wells within  a network.  The  calculated  purging
requirement should then be verified by measurements
of pH and specific conductance during pumping to
signal equilibration of the water being collected.

The selection of purging rates and volumes of water to
be pumped  prior to  sample collection also can be
influenced by the anticipated waterquality. In hazardous
environments where purged water must be contained
and disposed of in a permitted facility, it is desirable to
minimize this amount. This can be accomplished by
pumping the wells at very low pumping rates (100 mU
min) to minimize the drawdown in the well and maximize
the percentage of aquiferwaterdelivered to the surface
in the shortest period of time. Pumping at low rates, in
effect, isolates the column of stagnant water in the well
bore and negates the need for its removal. This approach
is only valid in cases where the pump intake is placed
at the top of, or in, the well screen.

In summary,  well  purging strategies  should be
established by (1) determining the hydraulic performance
of, the well; (2)  calculating  reasonable  purging
                                                27

-------
requirements, pumping rates, and volumes based on
hydraulic conductivity data, well construction data, site
hydrologic conditions, and anticipated water quality; (3)
measuringthe well purging parameters to verify chemical
"equilibrated" conditions; and (4) documenting the entire
effort (actual  pumping rate,  volumes pumped, and
purging parameter measurements  before and  after
sample collection).
  Given:
   48-foot deep, 2-Inch diameter wall
   2-foot long screen
   3-foot thick aquifer
   lUtlc water level about 15 feet below land surface
   hydraulic conductivity = 10" cm/sec

  Assumptions:
   A detlred purge rate of BOO mL/min and sampling rate of 100
    mL/mln will be used.

  Calculations:
   On» w«tl volume * (48 ft -16 ft) x 613 mL/ft (2-inch diameter
               well)
              » 20.2 Ihore
   Aquifer Transmlsslvlty = hydraulic conductivity x aquifer thickness
                 • 10'* m/sec x 1 meter
                 » 10" mVsec or 8.64 mVday
   From Figure 2-2b:
     At 5 minutes: 95% aquifer water and
              (5 mln x 0.5 L/mlnl/20.2 L
              - 0.12 well volumes
     At 10 minutes: 100% aquifer water and
               (10 min x 0.5 L/min)/20.2 L
               «  0.24 well volumes

    It appears that a high percentage of aquifer water can be obtained
  within a relatively short timo of pumping at 500 ml-mirr'. This
  pumping rato 'a below that used during well development to prevent
  well damange or further development.


Figure 2-2a. Example of Well Purging
Requirement Estimating Procedure (Barcelona

and others, 1985)
      1201-
      100
   5   60
   1
      ,
      20
         620.0m1/day
                                   Q = 500 mL/min
                                 Diameter = 5.08 cm
                     10     15    20
                       Time (minutes)
                                        25
                                              30
 Figure 2-2b. Percentage of Aquifer Water Versus
 Time for Different Transmissivities
Sampling  Materials and Mechanisms.   In many
monitoring situations, it is not possible to predict the
requirements that either materials for well casings,
pumps, and tubing, or pumping mechanisms must meet
in order to provide error-free samples of ground water.
Ideally, these components of the system  should be
durable and inert relative to the chemical properties of
samples or the subsurface so as to neither contaminate
nor remove chemical constituents from  the water
samples. Due to the long duration of regulatory program
requirements, well casing materials, in particular, must
be sufficiently durable and nonreactive to last several
decades. It is generally much easier to substitute more
appropriate sampling pumps or pump/tubing materials
as knowledge of subsurface conditions improves than
to drill additional wells to replace inadequate well casing
or screen materials. Also, there is no simple way to
account for errors that occur prior to handling a sample
at the land surface. Therefore, it is good practice to
carefully choosethe components of the sampling system
that make up the rigid materials in well  casing/screens
or pumps, and the flexible materials used in sample
delivery tubing.

Rigid Materials. An experienced hydrologist can base
well construction details mainly on hydrogeologic criteria,
even  in  challenging situations where a separate
contaminant phase may be present (Villaume, 1985).
However, the best material for a  specific  monitoring
application must be selected by considering subsurface
geochemistry and the likely contaminants of interest.
Therefore, strength, durability, and inertness should be
balanced with cost considerations in the choice of rigid
materials for well casing, screens, pumps, etc. (see
Chapter 1).

Common well casing materials include TFE (Teflon^),
PVC (polyvinyl chloride), stainless steel, and other
ferrous materials. The strength, durability, and potential
for sorptive or  leaching interferences with chemical
constituents have been reviewed  in detail for these
materials (Barcelona and others, 1985; Barcelona and
others,  1983).  Unfortunately, there is  very little
documentation  of the severity or  magnitude of well
casing interferences from actual field investigations.
This is the point at which optimized monitoring network
design takes on an element of  "research,"  as the
components of the monitoring installation will need to
be systematically evaluated.

Polymeric  materials have the potential to absorb
dissolved chemical constituents  and  leach  either
previously sorbed substances or components  of the
polymer formulations. Similarly, ferrous materials may
adsorb dissolved chemical constituents and leach metal
                                                   28

-------
ions or corrosion products, which may introduce errors
into the results of chemical analysis. This potential in
both cases is real, yet not completely understood. The
recommendations in the references noted above can
be summarized as follows:

Teflon'"' is the well casing material least likely to cause
significant error in ground-water monitoring programs
focused on either organic  or inorganic chemibal
constituents.  It has sufficient strength for  most
applications at shallow depth (i.e., <  100 m) and is
among the most inert materials ever made. For deeper
installations, it can be linked to another material abpve
the highest seasonal water level.

Stainless steel (either 316 or 304 type) well  casing,
undernoncorrosive conditions, is the second least liksiy
material to cause significant error for organic chemical
constituent  monitoring  investigations.  Fe, Mn, or Cr
may be released, under corrosive conditions. Orgaiic
constituent sorption effects also may provide significant
sources of error after corrosion processes have altered
the virgin surface.
Rigid PVC well casing  material  that  has  National
Sanitation Foundation approval should be  used! in
monitoring well applications when noncemented 1 or
threaded joints are  used,  and  organic chemical
constituents are not expected to be of either presenter
future interest. Significant losses of strength, durability
and inertness (i.e., sorption or leaching) maybe expected
under  conditions where organic  contaminants are
                        Material*
           present in high concentration. PVC should, however,
           perform adequately in inorganic chemical constituent
           studies when concentrations of organic constituents
           are not high and tin or antimony species are not being
           targeted.

           Monitoring  wells made  of appropriate  materials and
           screened over discrete sections of the saturated
           thickness of geologic formations can yield a wealth of
           chemical  and hydrologic information. Whether or not
           this  level of performance is achieved frequently  may
           depend on  the care taken in evaluating the hydraulic
           performance of the sampling point.

           Flexible  Materials. Pump components and  sample
           delivery tubing may  contact a water  sample more
           intimately than othercomponents of a sampling system,
           including  storage  vessels and well casing. Similar
           considerations of inertness and noncontaminating
           properties apply to tubing, bladder, gasket and  seal
           materials. Experimental evidence (Barcelona and others,
           1985) has supported earlier recommendations drawn
           from manufacturers'  specifications (Barcelona  and
           others, 1983). A summary is provided in Table 2-3.
           Again, the  care taken in materials' selection for the
           specific needs of the  sampling program can pay real
           dividends and provides greater assurance of error-free
           sampling.

           Sample Mechanisms. It  is important to remember that
           sampling mechanisms themselves are  not protocols.
           The sampling protocolforaparticular monitoring network
                                                            Recommendations
                 Polytatrafkioroethylene
                 (Teflon-)
                 Polypropylene
                 Polyethylene (linear)
                 PVC (flexible)
                 Viton'
                 Silicone (medical grade only)
                 Neoprene
Recommended for moct monitoring work, particularly for detailed
organic analytical schemes. The material least likely to Introduce
significant sampling bias or imprecision. The easiest material to clean
in order to prevent cross-contamination.
Strongly recommended for corrosiva high dissolved solids solutions.
Less likely to introduce significant bias into analytical results than
polymer formulations (PVC) or other flexible materials with the
exception of Teflon*.
Not recommended for detailed organic analytical schemes. Plasticizers
and ttabljlzert make up a sizable percentage of the material by weight
as long as it remain!; flexible. Documented interferences are likely with
several priority pollutant classes.
Flexible etestomeric materials for gaskets, O-rlngs. bladder, and tubing
applications. Performance expected to be a function of exposure type
and the ordar of chemical resistance as shown. Recommended only
when a moro suitable material is not available for the specific use.
Actual controlled exposure trials may be useful in assessing the
potential for analytical bias.
     "Trademark of DuPont, Inc.
Table 2-3. Recommendations for Flexible Materials in Sampling Applications
                                                    29

-------
is basically a step-by-step written description of the
procedures used for well purging, delivering samples to
the surface, and handling samples in the field. Once the
protocol has been developed and used in a particular
investigation, it provides a basis for modifying the
program, if the extent or type of contamination requires
more intensive work.  An  appropriate sampling
mechanism  is,  however, an important part of  any
protocol. Ideally, the pumping mechanism should be
capable of purging the well of stagnant water at rates of
liters or gallons perminute and also of delivering ground
waterto the surface so that sample bottles may be filled
at low flow rates (i.e., about 100 mL/min"') to minimize
turbulence and degassing of the sample. In this way the
criteria for representative sampling can be met while
keeping the pu rging and sample collection steps simple.
Nielsen and Yeates (1985) reviewed the types of sample
collection mechanisms  commercially available
(Anonymous, 1985). This review supports the results,
of research studies of their performance (Barcelona
and others,  1984; Stoltzenburg and Nichols, 1985).
Figure 2-3 shows examples of types of pumps or other
samplers, which are fully described in a number of
references (Barcelona and others, 1985; Gillham and
others, 1983; Scalf and others, 1981). Given all of the
varied hydrogeologic settings and potential chemical
constituents  of  interest, several types of pumps or
sampling  mechanisms may  be suitable  for specific
applications.   Figure   2-4   contains   some
recommendations for reliable sampling mechanisms
relative  to the sensitivity of the sample to error.  The
main criteria for sampling pumps are the capabilities to
purge stagnant  water from the well and to deliver the
water samples  to the surface with  minimal loss of
sample integrity. Clearly, a mechanism that is shown to
provide accurate and precise samples for volatile organic
compound determinations should be suitable for most
chemical constituents of interest.

After establishing a sampling point and the means to
collect a sample, the next step is the development of the
detailed sampling protocol.

Elements of the Sampling Protocol

There are few  aspects of this  subject that generate
more controversy than the sampling steps, which make
up the sampling protocol.  Efforts to  develop reliable
protocols  and optimize sampling  procedures require
particular attention to sampling mechanism effects on
the integrity of ground-water samples (Barcelona and
others, 1984; Stolzenburg and Nichols, 1985), as well
as to the potential errors involved  in well  purging,
delivery tubing exposures (Barcelona and others, 1985;
Ho, 1983), sample handling, and the impact of sampling
frequency on both the sensitivity and reliability of
chemical  constituent monitoring results.  Quality
assurance measures, including field blanks, standards,
and split control samples, cannot account for errors in
these steps of  the sampling protocol. Actually,  the
sampling protocol is the focus of the overall study
network design (Nacht, 1983), and it should be prepared
flexibly so that it can be refined as information on  site
improves.

Each step within the protocol has a bearing on  the
quality and  completeness  of the information being
collected. This is perhaps best shown by the progression
of steps depicted in Figure 2-5. Corresponding to each
step is a goal and recommendation for achieving that
goal. The principal utility of this description is that it
provides an outlined agenda for high-quality chemical
and water-quality data.

To ensure maximum utility of the  sampling effort and
resulting data, it is essential to document the sampling
protocol as performed in the field.  In addition to noting
the obvious  information (i.e., persons conducting the
sampling,  equipment used, weather conditions,
adherence to the protocol, and unusual observations),
three basic elements of the sampling protocol should be
recorded: (1) water-level measurements made prior to
sampling, (2) the  volume and rate at which water is
removed from the well prior to sample collection (well
purging), and (3) the actual sample collection, including
measurement of  well-purging  parameters,  sample
preservation, sample handling, and chain of custody.

Water-Level Measurement
Priorto well purging or sample collection, it is extremely
important to measure and record the water level in the
well. These measurements are needed to estimate the
amount of waterto be purged priorto sample collection.
Likewise,this informationcanbeusefulwhen interpreting
monitoring results. Low water levels may reflect the
influence of the cone of depression surrounding  a
nearby production well. High water levels, compared to
measurements made at othertimes of the year, may be
indicative of recent recharge events. In relatively shallow
settings, high water levels from recent natural recharge
events may result in the increase of certain constituents
leached from the unsaturated zone or in the dilution of
the dissolved solids content  in the collected sample.

Documenting the nonpumping water levels for all wells
at a site will provide historical information on the hydraulic
conditions at the site. Analysis of this  information may
reveal changes  in flow paths and serve as a check on
the effectiveness of the wells  to monitor changing
hydrologic conditions. It is very useful to develop an
                                                30

-------
Sample line-

 Lifting bail-
          Discharge Check
           Valve Assembly •
             (Inside Body)
               Perforated
               Flow Tube
                  Bladder
        Intake Check Valve
                Assembly
            (Inside Screen)
                                       Air Line
                                       to Pressure
                                                                                              Water Flow
                                        Annular
                                        Space
                                       - Anti-Clogging
                                        Screen

                         Cut-Away Diagram
                   of a Gas-Operated Bladder Pump
            3/16* riser tube
            1/2'gas drive tube

            Compression tube fitting

            Sampler body
            Teflon seat

            Porous filter
                                                                       Bailer Lln«
                                                       -M/4-O.D. x1*I.D.
                                                        Rigid Tubing,
                                                        Usually 18 to 36* Long
                                                                                                      —Water Flow
                                                                                                 Motor
                                              f—'-Jf	3/4* Diameter Ball
                                              IZ^
                                                        1 * Diameter Threaded Seat
                                                                                           Helical Rotor Electric
                                                                                            Submersible Pump
                                                              j-. ** -

                                                             ^ -
                                                            Bailer
                                                        5/16* Diameter Hole
                                                                            Gas Entry Tube



                                                             Sample Discharge Tube
                                                      1. Sampler length can be increased
                                                        for special applications
                                                      2. Fabrication materials can be selected
                                                        to meet analysis requirements
                                                        and in situ chemical environment
                                                      3. Tubing sizes can be modified for
                                                        special applications

         Polypropylene Tubing
         Threaded Access Cap
                                                                                                         PVC Pipe
                                                                                        Simple Slotted Well Point
                                                                                        Gas-Drive Sampling Device
                                          Well Casing
        Gas-Drive Sampler Designed
      for Permanent Installation in a
        Borehole (Barcsd Systems)
igftkL,   Check Valve
Ijyyfii— Arrangement
                                                                                                          Slotted Well Screen
                                                Sample Collection Bottle
Figure 2-3. Schematic Diagrams of Common Ground-Water Sampling Devices (Neilsen and Yeates,
1985)
                                                              31

-------
Type of
constituent
VolaW*
Organic
Compoundi
Orainom*t*1Kc*
DJuoh/ad Glut
Well-purging
Paramotert
Tnco Inorganic
Metal SpocJe*
Reduced
Spaciot
Major Cattona
& Anlons
Examptaof
constituent
Chloroform
TOX
CH,H8
0,, CO,
pH. B"
Eh
F«, Cu
NO,-. S-
Na*. K*. Ca"
Mg~
ci-, so«-
Poartiva
displacement
bladder pump*
Thief, in sriu or
dual check valve
bailers
Mechanical
positive
displacement
pumps
INCREASING RELIABILITY OF SAMPLING MECHANISMS
NG SAMPLE SENSITIVITY 	 »-
INCREASI
Superior
performance
for most
application*
Superior
performance
for most
application*
Superior
parformanca
for most
applications
Superior
performance
for most
applications
Maybe
adequate if woll
purging la
assured
May bo
adequate if well
purging la
assured
Maybe
adequate if well
purging \»
assured
Adequate
Maybe
adequate If well
purging is
assured
May be ade-
quate if design
and operation are
controlled
May be ade-
quate If design
and operation are
controlled
Adequate
Adequate
Gas-drive
devices


Not recom-
mended
Not recom-
mended
Maybe
adequate
Adequate
Suction
mechanisms

Not recom-
mended
Not recom-
mended
May be ade-
quate if materials
are appropriate
Adequate
Figure 2-4. Matrix of Sensitive Chemical Constituents and Various Sampling Mechanisms
                     Step

         Hydrotoflk Measurements

         Well Purging


         Sample Collection


         Filtration/ Procorvatton
         Field Determinations
         Field Blanks/Standards
         Simple Storage/Transport
            Goal

Establish nonpumplng water level.

Remove or isolate stagnant HaO
which would otherwise bias repre-
sentative sample.

Collect samples at land surface
or in well-bora with minimal distur-
bance of sample chemistry.

Filtration permits determination of
soluble constituents and is a form of
preservation. It should be done in the
field as soon as possible after
collection.

Field analyses of samples will effec-
tively avoid bias In determining
parameters/constituents which do
not store well; e.g., gases, alkalinity,
pH.

These blanks and standards will
permit the correction of analytical
results for changes which may occur
after sample collection: preservation,
storage, and transport.

Refrigerate and protect samples to
minimize their chemical alteration
prior to analysis.
             Recommendations

Measure the water level to ± 0.3 cm (±0.01 ft).

Pump water until well purging parameters (e.g., pH,
T, Q-', Eh) stabilize to ± 10% over at least two
successive well volumes pumped.

Pumping rates should be limited to ~ 100 mL/min
for volatile organics and gas-sensitive parameters.


Filter: Trace metals, inorganic anions/cations,
alkalinity.
Do not filter: TOC, TOX, volatile organic com-
pound samples; other organic compound samples
only when required.

Samples for determining gases, alkalinity and
pH should be analyzed in the field if at all possible.
At least one blank and one standard for each
sensitive parameter should be made up in the field
on each day of sampling. Spiked samples are also
recommended for good QA/QC.


Observe maximum sample holding or storage periods
recommended by the Agency. Documentation of
actual holding periods should be carefully performed.
Figure 2-5. Generalized Ground-Water Sampling Protocol
understanding of the seasonal changes in water levels
and associated chemical concentration variability at the
monitored site.

Purging
The volume of stagnant water that should be removed
from the monitoring well should be calculated from the
analysis of field hydraulic conductivity measurements.
                    Rule-of-thumb guidelines for the volume of water to be
                    purged can cause time delays and unnecessary pumping
                    of excess contaminated water. These rules (i.e., 3-, 5-
                    or  10-well volumes)  largely  ignore  the  hydraulic
                    characteristics of individual wells and geologic settings.
                    One advantage of using the same pump to both purge
                    stagnant water and collect samples is the ability to
                    measure pH and specific conductance in an in-line flow
                                                           32

-------
cell.  These parameters aid in verifying the purping
efficiency and also provide a consistent  basis  for
comparing samples from a single well or wells jat a
particular site. Since pH is a standard variablej  for
aqueous solutions that is affected by degassing and
depressurization (i.e., lossof C02), in-line measurements
provide more accurate and precise determinations than
discrete samples collected by grab  sampling
mechanisms.

The  following example illustrates some of the other
advantages  of verifying the  purge  requirement  for
monitoring wells.

Documentation of the actual well purging process
employed should be a part of a standard field sampling
protocol. The calculated well purging requirement (e.g.,
>90 percent aquifer water) calls for the removal ofjfive
well volumes prior  to  sample collection. Field
measurements of the  well purging parameters  have
historically confirmed this recommended procedure.
During a subsequent sampling effort, 12 well volumes
were pumped before stabilized well purging parameter
readings were obtained. Several possible causes could
be explored: (1) a limited plume of contaminants jnay
have been present at the well at the beginning of
sampling and inadvertently discarded while pumping in
an attempt to obtain  stabilized indicator parameter
readings; (2) the hydraulic properties of the well may
have changed due to  silting  or  encrustation of I the
screen, indicating the need for well rehabilitation or
maintenance; (3) the flow-through device used  for
measuring the indicator parameters  may have  bjeen
malfunctioning; or (4) the well may have been tampered
with  by the introduction of a contaminant or relatij/ely
clean water in an attempt to bias the sample resul

Sample Collection and Handling
Water samples should be collected when the solution
chemistry of  the  ground water  being pumped |has
stabilized as indicated by pH, Eh, specific conductance,
and temperature readings.

In practice, stable sample chemistry is indicated wjien
the purging parameter measurements have stabilized
over two successive well volumes. First, samples for
volatile constituents, TOC, TOX, and those constituents
that require field filtration or field determination should
be collected. Then large-volume samples for extractable
organic compounds, total metals, or nutrient anion
determinations should be collected.

All samples should be collected as close as possible to
the well head. A "tee" fitting placed ahead of the in-
devicefor measuring the well purging parameters makes
ine
this  more convenient.  Regardless of the sample
mechanism in use or the components of the sampling
train, wells that are located upgradient of a site, and
therefore are  expected  to  be representative of
background quality, should be sampled first to minimize
the  potential for cross-contamination.  Laboratory
detergent solutions and distilled water should be used
to clean the sampling train  between samples. An acid
rinse (0.1 N HCI) or solvent rinse (i.e., hexane or
methanol) may be used to supplement these cleaning
steps, if  necessary.  Cleaning procedures should be
followed by distilled water rinses, which may be saved
to check cleaning efficiency.

The order in which samples are taken for specific types
of chemical analyses should be decided by the sensitivity
of the samples to handling (i.e., most sensitive first) and
the need for specific  information. For example, the
flowchart shown in Figure 2-6 depicts a priority orderfor
a generalized sample collection effort. The samples for
organic chemical constituent determinations are taken
in decreasing order of sensitivity to handling errors,
while the inorganic chemical constituents, which may
require filtration, are taken afterwards.

I nstances arise, even with properly developed monitoring
wells, that call  for the filtration  of water samples. It
should  be evident,  however,  that adequate well
development procedures, which require 2 to 3 hours of
bailing, swabbing, pumping, or air purging at each well,
may save many hours in  sample filtration. Well
development may have to be repeated at periodic
intervals to minimize the collection of turbid samples. In
this respect, it is important to minimize the disturbance
of fines that accumulate  in the well bore. This can be
achieved by careful placement of the sampling pump
intake at the top of the screened interval, low pumping
rates, and avoiding the use of bailing techniques that
disturb sediment accumulations.

It is advisable to refrain from filtering TOC, TOX, or other
organic compound samples because  the increased
handling required may result in the loss of chemical
constituents of  interest. Allowing any fine material to
settle priorto analysis, followed by decanting the sample,
is preferable to filtration in these instances. If filtration is
necessary for the determination of extractable organic
compounds, it  should  be performed in the laboratory
using nitrogen pressure. When samples must be filtered,
it may be necessary to run parallel sets of filtered and
unfiltered samples with standards to establish the
recovery of hydrophobic compounds. All of the materials'
precautions used in the  construction of the sampling
train should be observed forfiltration apparatus. Vacuum
filtration of ground-watersamples is not recommended.
                                                 33

-------
                    STEP


                 Wil Inspection


                 Wei Purging
                 Sample Cofoctlon
                 nitration*
                 TkU
                 Determinations**
                 Preservation
                 FtaM Blanks
                 Standards
          PROCEDURE

       Hydrologic Measurements


  Removal or Isolation of Stagnant Water


             I
  Determination of Well-Purging Parameters
        
-------
Parameters
(Type)
Well Purging
pH (grab)
0- (grab)
T (grab)
Eh (grab)
Contamination Indicators
pH, a- (grab)
TOC
TOX
Water Quality
Dissolved gases
(0,, CH4, CO,)
Alkalinity/Acidity





(Fe, Mn, Na",
10, Ca",
Mg")
Volume
Required (mL)
1 Sample*

50
100
1000
1000

As above
40
500

10 mL minimum

100

Filtered under
pressure with
appropriate
media
All filtered
1000 mL

Container
(Material)

T,S,P,G
T.S.P.G
T,S,P,G
T,S,P,G

As above
G,T
G,T

G,S

T,G,P





T,P


Preservation
Method

None; field det.
None; field dat.
None; field det.
None; field det.

As above
Dark, 4°C
Dark, 4°C

Dark, 4°C

4°C/None





Field acidified
to pH <2 with
HNO,
Maximum
Holding
Period

<1 hr"
<1 hr**
None
None

As above
24 hr
5 days

<24hr

<6hr"/
<24hr




6 months***


  Silicate)


NO,-

so«-

NH/


Phenols
Drinking Water Suitability
  As, Ba, Cd, Cr,
   Pb, Hg, Se, Ag
F-
Romainlng Organic
  Parameters
                              @>50



                              100

                              50

                              400


                              500
                              Same as above
                              for water
                              quality cations
                              (Fa, Mn, etc.)

                              Same as chloride
                              above
(T.P.G
glass only)
T,P,G

T,P,G

T,P,G


T,G
Same as
above
                                                      Same as
                                                      above
4°C



4°C

4°C

4°C/H,SO, to
pH<2

4°C/H,PO.to
pH<4


Same as above
                                                                           Same as above
                              As for TOX/TOC, except where analytical method calls for acidification
                              of sample	   J	
24 hr/
7 days;
7 days

24 hr

7 days

24 hr/
7 days

24 hr
6 month*




7dayt


24 hr
  *lt is assumed that at each site, for each sampling date, replicates, a field blank and standards must be taken at equal volume to those of
   the samples.                                     I
 "Temperature correction must be made for reliable reporting. Variations greater than ± 10% may result from longer holding period.
""In the event that HNOj cannot be used because of shipping restrictions, the sample should be refrigerated to 4°C, shipped immediately,
   and acidified on receipt at the laboratory. Container should be rinsed with 1:1 HN03 and included with sample.
Note: T =  Teflon; S = stainless steel; P = PVC, polypropylene, polyethylene; G = borosilicate glass.
From Scalfetal., 1981.


                                                 id Preservation Procedures for a Detective Monitoring
Table 2-4. Recommended Sample Handling ar
Program

As discussed earlier, the need to begin QA/QC plar ning
with the installation of the sampling point cannot be
overemphasized.

The use of field blanks, standards, and spiked samples
forfield QA/QC performance is analogous to the use of
laboratory blanks, standards,  and procedural  or
                                                        validation standards. The fundamental goal of field QC
                                                        is to ensure that the sample protocol is being executed
                                                        faithfully and that situations that might lead to error are
                                                        recognized before they seriously impact the data. The
                                                        use of field blanks, standards, and spiked samples can
                                                        account  for changes in samples  that occur during
                                                        sample collection.
                                                      35

-------
 Field Wanks and standards enable quantitative correction
 for bias (i.e., systematic errors), which arise due to
 handling, storage, transportation,  and  laboratory
 procedures. Spiked samples and blind controls provide
 the means to correct combined sampling and analytical
 accuracy or recoveries for the actual conditions to
 which the samples have been exposed.

 All QC measures should be performed for at least the
 most sensitive chemical constituents for each sampling
 date.  Examples of sensitive constituents would be
 benzene or  trichloroethylene as volatile  organic
 compounds and lead or iron as metals. It is difficult to
 use laboratory blanks alone for determining the limits of
 detection orquantitation. Laboratory distilled water may
 contain apparently higher levels  of volatile organic
 compounds  (e.g., methylene chloride) than  would
 uncontaminated ground-watersamples. The field blanks
 and spiked samples should be used for this purpose,
 conserving the results of  lab blanks as checks on
 elevated laboratory background levels.

 Whether or not the ground water is contaminated with
 interfering compounds, spiked samples provide a basis
 for both identifying the constituents of interest and
 correcting their recovery (or accuracy) based on the
 recovery of the spiked standard compounds.  For
 example, if trichloroethylene in a spiked  sample is
 recovered at a mean level of 80 percent (-20 percent
 bias),theconcent rations of trichloroethylene determined
                                  in the samples for this sampling date may be corrected
                                  by afactorof 1.2 for low recovery. Similarly, if 50 percent
                                  recovery (-50 percent bias) is  reported for the spiked
                                  standard, it is likely that sample handling or analytical
                                  procedures are out of control and corrective measures
                                  should be taken at once. It is important to know if the
                                  laboratory has performed these corrections or taken
                                  corrective action when it reports the results of analyses.
                                  It should be further noted that many regulatory agencies
                                  require evidence of QC and analytical performance but
                                  do not generally accept data that have been corrected.

                                  Field blanks, standards, and  blind control  samples
                                  provide independent checks on handling and storage,
                                  as well as the performance of the analytical laboratory.
                                  Grou nd-water analytical data are incomplete unless the
                                  analytical performance data (e.g., accuracy, precision,
                                  detection, and quantitation limits) are reported with
                                  each set of results.  Discussions of whether ground-
                                  waterquality has changed significantly must be tempered
                                  by the accuracy and precision performance for specific
                                  chemical constituents.

                                  Table 2-5 is a useful guide to  the preparation of field
                                  standards and spiking solutions for split samples. It is
                                  important that the field blanks and standards are made
                                  on the day of sampling and are subjected to all conditions
                                  to which the samples are exposed. Field spiked samples
                                  or blind controls should be prepared  by spiking with
                                  concentrated stock standards  in an appropriate
                                                             Stock Solution for Field Spiko of Split Samples
Simple Type
Alkalinity
Anfocw
Cations
Trice Metals
Volume
50 mL
1 L
1 L
1 L
Composition
Na'. HCOr
K-. Na', Cf, SO,'
F; NO,; PQt*. SI
Na'. K*
Ca~, Mg". CI-. NCy
Cd", Cu". Pb"
Cr~ , Ni", Ag'
Fa1", Mn"
Field Standard
(Concentration)
10.0; 25 Ippm)
25, 50 Ippm)
5.0; 10.0 (ppml
10.0; 25.0 (ppm)
Solvent
H,0
H,0
H,0, H' (acid)
H,0, H' (acid)
Concentration of
Components
10,000; 25,000 Ippm)
25,000; 50.000 (ppm)
5,000; 10,000 (ppm)
10,000; 25,000 (ppml
Raid Spike
Volume
(50 nU
(ImL)
(1mU
(ImL)
       TOC


       TOX


       Voiattlas


       Bclractables A

       Extractables B
40 mL


50 mL


40 mL


1 L

1 L
Acetone
KHP
0.2; 0.5 (ppm-CI
1.8;4.5(ppm-C)
                                                         H,O
200; 500 (ppm-C)
1.800; 4,500 (ppm-C)
Chloroform
2,4,6 Trichlorophenol
Dlchlorobutane, Toluene
Dibromopropane, Xylene
Phenol Standards
Polynuclear Aromatic
12.5; 25 (ppb)
12.5; 25 (ppb)
25; 50 (ppb)
25; 50 (ppb)
25; 50 (ppb)
H,O/poly*
(ethylene glycol)
H,0/poly*
(ethylene glycol)
Methanol"
Methanol
12,500; 25 (ppm)
12.500; 25 (ppm)
25; 50 (ppm)
25; 50 (ppm)
25; 50 (ppm)
       Extractables C   1 L
                           Standards

                           Standards as Required
                         _25; 50 (ppb)
                                      Methanol
                                                   25; 50 (ppml
        •75:25 water/polyathylane glycol (400 amu) mixture.
        •Glass distilled methano).
Table 2-5. Field Standard and Sample Spiking Solutions
(40 HU


(500 MU


(40 ML)

(1 mL)

11 mL)


(1mU
                                                  36

-------
background solution priorto the collection of any actual
samples. Additional precautions should be taken against
the depressurization of samples during air transport
and the effects of undue exposure to light during sample
handling and storage. All of the QC measures noted
above will provide both a basis for high-quality data
reporting  and a known degree of confidence in data
interpretation.  Well-planned  overall quality  control
programs also will minimize the uncertainty in long-term
trends when different personnel have been involved in
collection and analysis.

Sample Storage and Transport
The storage and transport of ground-water  samples
often are the most neglected elements of the sampl ng
                                        CHAIN or
                 Sampling Date
                                           Site :
                 Well or Sampling Points:
                   protocol. Due care must be taken in sample collection,
                   field determinations, and handling. Transport should be
                   planned so as not to exceed sample holding time before
                   laboratory analysis. Every effort should be made to
                   inform the laboratory staff of the approximate time of
                   arrival so that the most critical analytical determinations
                   can be made within  recommended  storage  periods.
                   This may require that sampling schedules be adjusted
                   so that the samples arrive at the laboratory during
                   working hours.

                   The documentation  of actual  sample  storage  and
                   treatment may be  handled by chain of  custody
                   procedures. Figure 2-7 shows an example of a chain of
                   custody form. Briefly, the chain of custody record should
                                                CUSTODY RECORD
                                               lane
                 Sample Seta for Each;  Inorganic,

                 Inclusive Sample Numbers;

                 Company's Nama	

                 Address 	
                         number   street

                 Collector's Name 	

                 Date Sampled	
               Organic, Both •
                          Telephone (	>
                city
       Time Sti
                 Field Information  (Precautions,
                 Boxes, Etc.):

                 1.      	   	
               ted
      state

  Telephone (    )

  Time Completed
zip
               Number of Samples,  Number  of Sample
                     name
                 2.
                                           organization
              T
                                                                     location
                     name
                                           organization
                                                                     location
                 Chain  of  Possession  (After  samples  ar
-------
contain the dates and times of collection, receipt, and
completion of all the analyses on a particular set of
samples. Frequently, ft is the only record that exists of
the actual storage  period prior  to the reporting of
analytical  results. The sampling staff members who
initiate the chain of custody should require that a copy
of the  form be  returned to them with the analytical
report. Otherwise, verification  of sample storage and
handling will be  incomplete.

Shipping should be arranged to ensure that  samples
are neither lost nor damaged enroute to the laboratory.
Several commercial suppliers  of sampling kits permit
refrigeration by freezer packs  and include proper
packing. It may  be useful to include special labels or
distinctive storage vessels for acid-preserved  samples
to accommodate shipping restrictions.

Summary

Ground-water sampling is conducted for a variety of
reasons, ranging from detection or assessment of the
extent of a contaminant release to evaluations of trends
in regional water quality.  Reliable sampling of the
subsurface is inherently more difficult than either air or
surface water sampling because of the inevitable
disturbances that  well drilling  or pumping can cause
and the inaccessibility of the sampling zone. Therefore,
"representative" sampling generally requires minimal
disturbance of the subsurface environment  and the
properties of a representative sample are  scale
dependent. For any particular case, the applicable
criteria should be  set at the beginning of the effort to
judge representativeness.

Reliable  sampling protocols  are based on the
hydrogeologic setting of the study site and the degree
of analytical detail required by the monitoring program.
Quality control begins with the evaluationof the hydraulic
performance of the sampling point  or well  and the
proper selection of mechanisms and materials for well
purging and sample collection. All other elements of the
program and variables that affect data validity may be
accounted for by field blanks,  standards,  and control
samples.

Although research is needed on a host of topics involved
in ground-watersampling, defensible sampling protocols
can be developed to ensure the collection of data of
known quality for many types of programs. If properly
planned and developed, long-term sampling efforts can
benefit from the refinements that research progress will
bring. Careful documentation will provide the key to this
opportunity.
References

Anonymous, 1985, Monitoring products, a buyers guide:
Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 5, no. 3, pp. 33-45.

Barcelona,  M.J., J.P.  Gibb, J.A. Helfrich, and  E.E.
Garske, 1985, Practical guide forground-water sampling:
Illinois State Water Survey Contract Report 374,  U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Robert  S.  Kerr
Environmental Research  Laboratory, Ada,  OK, and
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV.

Barcelona, M.J., J.A. Helfrich, and E.E. Garske, 1985,
Sampling tubing effects on ground water samples:
Analytical Chemistry, v. 47, no. 2, pp. 460-464.

Barcelona,  M.J., J.A. Helfrich, E.E. Garske, and J.P.
Gibb, 1984, A laboratory  evaluation of  ground-water
sampling mechanisms: Ground Water Monitoring
Review, v. 4, no, 2, pp. 32-41.

Barcelona, M.J., 1984, TOC determinations in ground
water: Ground Water, v. 22, no. 1, pp. 18-24.

Barcelona,  M.J., and E.E. Garske, 1983, Nitric oxide
interference in the determination of dissolved oxygen
by the azide-modified Winkler method: Analytical
Chemistry, v.  55, pp. 965-967.

Barcelona,  M.J., J.P. Gibb, and R.A. Miller,  1983, A
guide to the selection of materials for monitoring well
construction and ground-water sampling: Illinois State
Water Survey Contract Report, U.S. EPA-RSKERL,
EPA-600/S2-84-024. 78 pp.

Barcelona, M.J., 1983, Chemical problems in ground-
water monitoring: Proc. of Third National Symposium
on Aquifer Rehabilitation and Ground Water Monitoring,
May 24-27, Columbus, OH.

Barvenik, M.J. and R.M.  Cadwgan, 1983, Multilevel
gas-drive sampling of deep fractured rock aquifers in
Virginia: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 3, no. 4,
pp. 34-40.

Brass,  H.J., M.A. Feige, T. Halloran, J.W. Mellow, D.
Munch, and R.F. Thomas, 1977, The national organic
monitoring survey, samplings and analyses forpurgeable
organic compounds:jnPojasek, R.B., ed. Drinking Water
Quality Enhancement through Source Protection, Ann
Arbor, Ml: Ann Arbor Science Publishers.

Brobst, R.B., 1984, Effects of two selected drilling fluids
on ground water sample chemistry: irj Monitoring Wells,
                                                38

-------
Their Place  in the Water Well Industry Educational
Session, NWWA National Meeting and Exposition, Las
Vegas, NV.

Claasen, H.C., 1982, Guidelines and techniques for
obtaining water samples that accurately represent the
water chemistry of an aquifer: U.S. Geological Sur/ey
Open File Report, Lakeland, CO.

Dunlap, W.J., J.F. McNabb, M.R. Scalf, and R.L. Cos by,
1977,  Sampling for  organic  chemicals  and
microorganisms in the subsurface: U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Robert S.  Kerr Environmental
Research Laboratory, Ada, OK. EPA-600/2-77-176.

Evans, R.B., and G.E. Schweitzer,  1984, Assessing
hazardous waste problems:  Environmental Science
and Technology, v. 18, no.  11 pp. 330A-339A.

Everett, L.G. and L.G. McMillion, 1985, Operatic nal
rangesforsuctionlysimeters:Ground Water Monitoring
Review, v. 5, no. 3, pp. 51-60.

Everett, L.G., L.G. Wilson, E.W. Haylman, and L.G.
McMillion, 1984, Constraints and categories of vadose
zone  monitoring devices: Ground  Water Monitoring
Review, v. 4, no. 4.

Everett, L.G., L.G. Wilson,  and L.G. McMillion, 19|82,
Vadose zone monitoring concepts for hazardous waste
sites: Ground Water, v. 20, no. 3, pp. 312-324.

Fenn, D., E. Cocozza, J. Isbister, 0. Braids, B. Yare, and
P. Roux, 1977,  Procedures manual for ground water
monitoring  at  solid waste disposal facilities: ll.S.
Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH: EPA-
530/SW611.

Gibb, J.P.,  R.M. Schuller, and R.A.  Griffin,  1981,
Procedures for the collection of representative water
quality data from monitoring wells: Illinois State Water
Survey Cooperative Report 7, Champaign, IL: Illinois
State WaterSurvey and Illinois State Geological Survey.

Gillham, R.W.,  M.J.L. Robin, J.F. Barker, and ,I.A.
Cherry, 1983, Ground water monitoring and sanrple
bias: API Pub. 4367 American Petroleum Institute.

Grisak, G.E., R.E. Jackson, and J.P. Pickens, 1978,
Monitoring groundwaterquality, the technical difficult es:
Water Resources Bulletin, v. 6, pp. 210-232.

Gorelick, S.M.,  B.  Evans, and I. Remsan,  1983
Identifying sources of ground  water  pollution, an
optimization  approach: Water Resources Research, v.
19, no. 3, pp. 779-790.
Heaton, T.H.E., and J.C. Vogel, 1981, "Excess air" in
ground water: Journal Hydrology, v. 50, pp. 201-216.

Ho, J.S-Y., 1983, Effect of sampling variables on recovery
of volatile organics in water: Journal American Water
Works Association, v. 12, pp. 583-586.

Kennedy, V.C., E.A. Jenne, and J.M. Burchard, 1976,
Backflushingfiltersforfield processing of watersamples
prior to trace-element analysis: OpenFile Report 76-
126,  U.S.  Geological  Survey  Water- Resources
Investigations.

Lindau, C.W., and R. F. Spalding, 1984, Majorprocedural
discrepancies in soil extracted nitrate levels and nitrogen
isotopic values: Ground Water, v. 22, no. 3, pp. 273-
278.

Mackay, D.M., P.V. Roberts, and J.A. Cherry, 1985,
Transport of organic contaminants in ground water:
Environmental Science and Technology, v. 19, no. 5,
pp. 384-392.

Melby, J.T., 1989,  A comparative study of hydraulic
conductivity determinations for a fine-grained aquifer:
unpubl.  M.S.  theses,  School of Geology, Oklahoma
State University, 171 p.

Nacht, S.J.,  1983, Monitoring sampling protocol
considerations: Ground Water  Monitoring  Review
Summer, pp. 23-29.

National Council of the  Paper Industry for  Air and
Stream Improvement, 1982, A guide to groundwater
sampling: Technical Bulletin 362, NCASI, New York,
NY.

Nielsen, D.M., and G.L. Yeates, 1985, Acomparison of
sampling mechanisms available for small diameter
ground water monitoring wells: Ground Water Monitoring
Review , v.  5, no. 2, pp. 83-99.

Pickens, J.F., J.A.  Cherry, G.E. Grisak, W.F. Merritt,
and B.A. Risto, 1978, A multilevel device for ground-
water sampling and piezometric monitoring: Ground
Water, v. 16, no. 5, pp. 322-327.

Robbins, G.A., and M.M.  Gemmell, 1985,  Factors
requiring resolution in installing vadose zone monitoring
systems: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v.  5, no. 3,
pp. 75-80.

Scalf, M.R., J.F. McNabb, W.J. Dunlap, R.L. Cosby,
and J. Fryberger, 1981, Manual of ground water quality
sampling procedures: National Water Weil Association,
OH EPA-600/2-81-160..
                                                39

-------
Schwarzenbach, R.P. and others, 1985, Ground-water
contamination by volatile halogenated alkanes, abiotic
formation of volatile sulfurcompounds under anaerobic
conditions: Environmental Science and Technology, v.
19, pp. 322-327.

Sisk,  S.W.,  1981, NEIC manual for groundwater/
subsurface investigations at hazardous waste sites:
U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency,  Office of
Enforcement, National Enforcement Investigations
Center, Denver, CO.

Skougstad, M.W., and G.F. Scarbo, Jr., 1968, Water
sample filtration unit: Environmental Science  and
Technology,  v. 2, no. 4, pp. 298-301.

Stolzenburg, T.R., and D.G. Nichols, 1985, Preliminary
results on chemical changes in ground water samples
due to sampling devices: Report to Electric Power
Research Institute, Palo Alto, California,  EA-4118.
Residuals Management  Technology, Inc., Madison,
Wl.

Tinlin, R.M., ed., 1976, Monitoring groundwater quality,
illustrative examples:  U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Environmental Monitoring and  Support
Laboratory, Las Vegas, NV, EPA-600/4-76-036.

Todd, O.K., R.M. Tinlin, K.D. Schmidt, and L.G. Everett,
1976,  Monitoring ground-water quality,  monitoring
methodology: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Las Vegas, NV, EPA-600/4-76-026.

U.S. Geological Survey,  1977, National handbook of
recommended methods for water-data acquisition: U.S.
Geological Survey, Office of Water Data Coordination,
Reston, VA.

Villaume.J.R.,1985, Investigations at sites contaminated
with dense,  non-aqueous phase  Liquids  (NAPLS):
Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 5, no. 2, pp. 60-74.

Wehrmann,  H.A., 1983, Monitoring well design and
construction: Ground Water Age, v. 4, pp. 35-38.

Wilson, J.T., and J. F. McNabb,  1983, Biological
transformation of organic pollutants in ground water:
EOS, v. 64, no. 33, pp. 505-506.

Wilson, J.T.  and others, 1983, Biotransformation of
selected organic pollutants in ground water in Volume
24 Developments in Industrial Microbiology, Society for
Industrial Microbiology.

Wilson, L.G., 1983, Monitoring in the vadose zone, part
III: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 3, no. 2, pp.
155-166.
Wilson, L.G., 1982, Monitoring in the vadose zone, part
II: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 2, no. 1, pp. 31-
42.

Wilson, L.G., 1981, Monitoring in the vadose zone, part
I: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 1, no. 3, pp. 32-
41.

Winograd,  I.J., and  F.N. Robertson,  1982, Deep
oxygenated ground  water, anomaly or common
occurrence?: Science, v. 216, pp. 1227-1230.

Wood, W., and M.J. Petraitis,  1984, Origin and
distribution of carbon dioxide in the unsaturated zone of
the southern High  Plains of Texas: Water Resources
Research, v. 20, no. 9, pp. 1193-1208.

Wood, W.W., 1976, Guidelines for collection and field
analysis of groundwater samples for selected unstable
constituents:  Techniques  for  Water Resources
Investigations,  U.S. Geological  Survey.

Yare, B.S., 1975, The use of a specialized drilling and
ground-water sampling  technique for delineation of
hexavalent chromium contamination  in an unconfined
aquifer,  southern New Jersey Coastal Plain: Ground
Water, v. 13, no. 2, pp. 151-154.
                                               40

-------
                                           Chapter 3

                                           :or
TRANSPORT AND FATE OF CONTAMINANTS IN THE SUBSURFACE
Introduction

Protection and remediation of ground-water resources
require an understanding of processes that affect fate
and transport of contaminants in the subsurfajce
environment. This understanding allows: (1) prediction
of the time of arrival and concentration of contaminants
at a receptor, such as a monitoring well, a water supply
well, or a body of surface water; (2) design of cost-
effective  and  safe waste management facilities; (3)
installation of effective monitoring  systems; and (4)
development of efficient and cost-effective strateg es
for remediation of contaminated aquifers (Palmer and
Johnson, 1989a).

Contaminants in ground water will move primarily in a
horizontal direction that is determined by the hydraulic
gradient. The  contaminants  will  decrease in
concentration because of such processes as dispersion
(molecular  and  hydrodynamic), filtration, sorption,
various chemical  processes, microbial degradation,
time rate release of  contaminants, and distance of
travel (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,  1985).
Processes such as hydrodynamic dispersion affect all
contaminants equally,  while sorption, chemical
processes, and  degradation  may affect vario'us
contaminants at different rates. The complex factors
that control the movement of contaminants in groujnd
water andthe resulting behaviorof contaminant plumes
are commonly difficult to assess  because of the
interaction of the many factors that affect the extent a|nd
rate of contaminant movement. Predictions of movement
and behavior can  be used only as estimates, aVid
modeling is often a useful tool to integrate the variqus
factors.

The  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency  (ERA)
sponsored a series of technology transfer seminars
between October 1987 and February 1988 that provided
an overview of the physical, chemical, and biological
processes  that govern the transport and  fate
contaminants in the subsurface. The following discussion
is a summary of the workshops, and is based on Ihe
                                    of
                                       seminar publication, Transport and Fate of Contaminants
                                       in the Subsurface (U.S. Environmental Protection
                                       Agency, 1989).

                                       Physical Processes Controlling the Transport of
                                       Contaminants in  the Aqueous Phase in the
                                       Subsurface

                                       Advection-Dispersion Theory

                                       The study of advection and dispersion processes is
                                       useful for predicting the time when an action limit, i.e.,
                                       a concentration limit used in regulations such as drinking
                                       water standards, will be  reached. Knowledge of
                                       advection-dispersion  also can  be used to  select
                                       technically  accurate and  cost-effective  remedial
                                       technologies for contaminated aquifers.

                                       If concentrations of a contaminant were measured in a
                                       monitoringwellthat was located between a contaminant
                                       source and a receptor such  as a water supply well, a
                                       graph of concentrations versus time would  show a
                                       breakthrough curve,  i.e., the  concentrations do not
                                       increase in a step-function (i.e., plug flow), but rather in
                                       an S-shaped curve (Figure 3-1). In a one-dimensional,
                                       homogeneous system, the arrival of the center of the
                                       mass is due to advection,  while the  spread of the
                                       breakthrough curve is the result of dispersion (Palmer
                                       and Johnson, 1989a).
Advection
Advection is defined by the transport of a non-reactive,
conservative tracer at an average ground-water velocity
(Palmer and Johnson,  1989a). The average linear
velocity is dependent on (1) the hydraulic conductivity of
the subsurface geologic formation in the direction of
ground-waterflow, (2) the porosity of the formation and
(3) the hydraulic gradient in the direction of ground-
water flow. For waste contaminants that react through
precipitation/dissolution, adsorption, and/orpartitioning
reactions within the subsurface formation, the velocity
can bedifferentfromthe average ground-watervelocity.
                                               41

-------
                                  BREAKTHROUGH CURVE
                     1.0
                o
                    0.5
                8
                    0.0
                  PLUG r
                                               FLOW
                                                         ADVECTION
ACTION LIMIT
                                               0.1
                        t

                       TIME
Figure 3-1. Breakthrough Curve for a Contaminant, as Measured in a Monitoring Well (Palmer and
Johnson, 1989a)
Dispersion
Dispersion of waste contaminants in an aquifer causes
the concentration of contaminants to decrease with
increasing length of flow (U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, 1985). Dispersion is caused by: (1) molecular
diffusion (important only at very low velocities) and (2)
hydrodynamic mixing (occurring at higher velocities in
laminar flow through porous media). Contaminants
travelingthrough porous media have different velocities
and flow paths with different  lengths.  Contaminants
moving along a shorter flow path or at a higher velocity,
therefore, arrive  at a  specific point  sooner than
contaminants following a longer path or traveling at a
                     lower velocity, resulting in hydrodynamic dispersion.

                     Figure 3-2 shows that dispersion can occur in both
                     longitudinal (in the direction of ground-water flow) and
                     transverse   (perpendicular to  ground-water flow)
                     directions, resulting in the formation of a conic waste
                     plume downstream from a continuous pollution source
                     (U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,  1985). The
                     concentration of waste contaminants is  less at the
                     margins of the plume and increases towards the source.
                     A plume will increase in size with more rapid flow within
                     a time period, because dispersion is directly related to
                     ground-water velocity.
Figure 3-2. The Effects of Ground-Water Velocity on Plume Shape. Upper Plume Velocity: 1.5 ft/day
and Lower Plume Velocity: 0.5 ft/day (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1985).
                                               42

-------
The dispersion coefficient varies with ground-water
velocity. At low velocity, the dispersion coefficient is
relatively constant, but increases linearly with velocity
as ground-water velocity increases. Based on these
observations, investigators proposed thatthe dispersion
coefficient can be expressed as a sum of an effective
molecular diffusion coefficient and  a mechanical
dispersion coefficient (Palmer and Johnson, 1989a).
The effective molecular diffusion coefficient is af unction
of the solution diffusion coefficient and the tortuosity of
the medium. Tortuosity accounts for the  increased
distance a diffusing ion must travel around sand grains.
The mechanical dispersion coefficient is proportional to
velocity. Specifically, mechanical dispersion is a result
of: (1) velocity variations within a pore, (2) different pore
geometries, and (3) divergence  of flow lines around
sand grains present in a porous medium (Gillham and
Cherry, 1982).
The term dispersivity is often confused with dispersion.
Dispersivity does not include velocity, so to conyert
dispersivity to dispersion requires  multiplication
velocity. Since dispersion is dependent on site-specific
velocity parameters and configuration of pore spates
within an aquifer, a dispersion coefficient should be
determined experimentally or empirically for a specific
aquifer. The  selection  of  appropriate dispersion
coefficients that adequately reflect  existing  aquifer
conditions is critical to the success of chemical transport
modeling (U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1985).

Advection-Dispersion Equation
An advection-dispersion equation is used to  exprjess
the mass balance of a waste  contaminant within an
aquifer as a result of dispersion, advection, and cha ige
in storage. The mass balance is a function of the
dispersion coefficient,  the ground-water velocity,
concentration of the contaminant, distance, and t^me
(Palmer and Johnson, 1989a). An advection-dispersion
equation can be applied to the description of three-
dimensional transport of waste contaminants  in an
aquifer, using three dispersion coefficients  (one
longitudinal and two transverse). Mathematically detailed
descriptions of the advection-dispersion equation]are
presented in Bear (1969,1979).

Discrepancies  between results generated from
advection-dispersion equations and laboratory and field
experiments have been found. These  discrepancies
have been attributed to: (1) immobile zones  of water
within the aquifer, (2) solution-solid interface processes,
(3) anion exclusion, and (4) diffusion  in and oqt of
aggregates (Palmer and Johnson, 1989a).
Field observations using field tracer studies also rjave
     shown that longitudinal dispersivity values are usually
     much largerthan transverse dispersivity measurements
     (Palmer and Johnson, 1989a). Figure 3-3 shows three-
     dimensional field monitoring that has corroborated these
     observations by  identifying  long, thin contaminant
     plumes ratherthan plumes spread overthe thickness of
     an aquifer. (Kimmel and Braids, 1980; MacFarlane and
     others,  1983). The large  longitudinal dispersion
     coefficients  are thought to   result  from aquifer
     heterogeneity. In an ideally stratified aquifer with layers
     of  sediment of  different hydraulic conductivities,
     contaminants move rapidly  along layers with  higher
     permeabilities and more slowly along the lower
     permeability layers (Figure 3-4) (Palmer and Johnson,
     1989a). Sample concentration of a contaminant is an
     integration of the concentrations of each layer, if water
     is sampled from  monitoring wells that are screened

                A. HYPOTHETICAL CONTAMINANT PLUME
               WITH A LARGE TRANSVERSE DiSPERSIVITY
by     I  —
                                                               B. HYPOTHETICAL CONTAMINANT PLUME

                                                              WITH A SMALL TRANSVERSE DI8PER81VITY
     Figure 3-3. Hypothetical Contaminant Plumes for
     Large (A) and Small (B) Dispersivities (Palmer
     and Johnson, I989a)


     through  the various layers.  Results from plotting
     concentration versus distance show a curve with large
     differences  in concentrations,  even though only
     advection is considered. This dispersion is the result of
     aquifer heterogeneity and not pore-scale processes.

     However, defining  hydraulic conductivities  in the
     subsurface is difficult, since not all geologic formations
     are perfectly stratified, but may  contain cross-
     stratification or graded bedding (Palmer and Johnson,
     1989a). To quantify heterogeneity in an aquifer, hydraulic
     conductivity is considered to be random, and statistical
     characteristics, such  as mean,  variance, and
     autocorrelation function, are determined.
                                                 43

-------
                      DISTANCE
 Figure 3-4. Contaminant Distributions and
 Concentrations in an Ideally Stratified Aquifer
 (after Gillham and Cherry, 1982, by Palmer and
 Johnson,1989a)
 In addition to aquifer heterogeneity, other processes
contributing to the spread of contaminants include: (1)
diverging flow  lines resulting in the spread of
contaminants by advection over a larger cross section
of the aquifer, (2) temporal variations in the water table
resulting in change of direction of ground-water flow
and lateral spread of contamination, and (3) variations
in concentration of contaminants at the sou rce resulting
in apparent dispersion inthe longitudinal direction (Frind
and Hokkanen, 1987; Palmer and Johnson, 1989a).

Ground-water sampling methods also may  result in
detection of apparent spreading of contaminant plumes
(Palmer and Johnson, 1989a). An underestimation of
contaminant concentrations at specific locations in an
aquifer may be  due to insufficient  well-purging.
Monitoring  wells  with different  screen lengths that
integrate ground water from different sections  of the
aquifermayyielddissimilarcontaminant concentrations.

Diffusive Transport through  Low  Permeability
Materials

In materials with low hydraulic conductivities (e.g.,
unfractured clays and rocks with conductivities less
than 10 to 9 m/s),  diffusive  transport of waste
contaminants is large compared to advective transport
(Neuzil, 1986;  Palmer and  Johnson, 1989a).
Contaminants can diffuse across natural aquitards or
clay liners with low hydraulic conductivities, resulting in
aquifer  contamination. The extent of movement is
dependent on diffusive flux, rate of ground-water flow in
the aquifer, and the length of the source area in the.
direction of ground-water flow.

Effects of Density on Transport of Contaminants

The density of a contaminant plume may contribute to
the  direction  of  solute transport  if dissolved
concentrations  of  contaminants are large  enough
(Palmer and Johnson, 1989a). For example,  assume
that the density of ground waterwithin an aquifer is 1.00,
the natural horizontal gradient is 0.005, and the natural
vertical gradient is 0.000. If the density ofthe contaminant
plume is equal to the density of the ground water, the
plume  moves horizontally with the naturally  existing
hydraulic gradient.  If the density of the  contaminated
water is 1.005 (a concentration of approximately 7,000
mg/L total dissolved solids), then the driving force in the
vertical direction is the same as the driving force in the
horizontal direction. If the aquifer is isotropic, then the
resulting vector of  these two forces  descends at 45
degrees   into the  aquifer.  The contaminant plume
moves deeply into the aquifer and may not be detected
with shallow monitoring systems installed under the
assumption of horizontal flow.

Retardation of Contaminants

If contaminants undergo chemical reactions while being
transported through an aquifer, their  movement  rate
may be less than the average  ground-water flow rate
(Palmerand Johnson, 1989a). Such chemical reactions
that slow movement of contaminants  in an  aquifer
include precipitation, adsorption, ion exchange, and
partitioning into organic matter or organic solvents.
Chemical reactions affect  contaminant breakthrough,
as shown in  Figure 3-5.  If  the retardation factor, R
(calculated from equations for contaminant transport
that include retardation), is equal to 1.0, the solute is
 i
  o
  o
     1.0
     0.6  -
     0.0
                         TIME
Figure 3-5. Time Required for Movement of
Contaminants at Different Retardation Factors
(Palmer and Johnson, 19893)
                                                44

-------
 nonreactive and moves with the ground water. If R
 greater than 1.0, the average velocity of the solute is
 less than the velocity  of the ground water, and the
 dispersion of the solute is reduced. If a monitoring well
 is located a distance from a contaminant source such
 that a nonreactive solute requires time, t1, to travel f rojm
 the source to the well, a contaminant with a retardation
 factor of 2 will require 2t1 to reach the well, and 4t1 will
 be required for a contaminant with a retardation factor
 of 4.

 Contaminants with lower retardation factors are
 transported greater distances over  a given time than
 contaminants with larger retardation factors (Figure 3-
 6) (Palmer and Johnson, 1989a).  A monitoring W3ll
 network hasagreaterchance of detecting contaminants
 with lower retardation factors because they are found in
 a greater volume of the aquifer. Estimates of the to
 mass of a contaminant with a retardation factor of 1.0
 an aquifer may be more accurate than estimates
                                              al
                                              in
                                              or
contaminants with greater amounts  of retardaticn.
Therefore, estimates of time required  to  remove
nonreactive contaminants may be more accurate than
time estimates for retarded contaminants. The slow
movement of retarded contaminants may control tjie
time and costs required to remediate a contaminated
aquifer.
is   Transport through Fractured Media

    Because fractured rock has both primary and secondary
    porosity, models used to describe solute transport in
    porous media, such as aquifers in recent alluvial deposits
    or glacial sediments, may not be appropriate for use at
    sites on fractured rock (Palmer and Johnson, I989a).
    Primary porosity is the pore space formed at the time of
    deposition and formation of  the rock  mass,  and
    secondary porosity  is the pore space formed as the
    result of fracture of the rock.

    Transport mechanisms infractured media are advection
    and dispersion, the same as in porous media (Figure 3-
    7) (Palmer and Johnson, 1989a).  In fractured media,
    however, contaminants are transported by advection
    only along fractures. Dispersion in fractured media is
    due to: (1) mixing atfracture intersections, (2) variations
    in opening widths across the width of the fracture,  (3)
    variations in opening widths along stream lines,  (4)
    molecular diffusion into microfractures penetrating the
    interfracture blocks  and (5)  molecular diffusion  into
    interfracture porous  matrix blocks  (more important in
    fractured porous rock than in fractured crystalline rock).

    Transport of contaminants through fractured media is
    described by one of four general models: continuum,
                            RETARDATION AND MONITORING
                     WASTE     DETECTED DETECTED
                                                              1 ONLY
                                                             DETECTED
Figure 3-6. Transport of Contaminants with Varying Retardation Factors at a Waste Site (Palmer and
Johnson,1989a)


                                                45

-------
            FRACTURED POROUS ROCK
                            Diffusion
                            into Rock
                            Matrix.
  Diffusion    '  '
  Into* Rock  ,   :
  Matrix
 Figure 3-7. Transport in Fractured Porous Rock
 (Palmer and Johnson, I989a)

 discrete fracture, hybrid, and channel  (Palmer and
 Johnson, 1989a).

 In continuum models, individual fractures are ignored
 and the entire medium is considered to  act as an
 equivalent porous medium. Single porosity  continuum
 models are applicable where the only porosity of the
 rock mass is the fracture porosity, such as in fractured
 granite or basalt. Double porosity models are applicable
 to media in which there is both primary and  secondary
 porosity such as sandstones and shales.

 Discretefracturemodelstryto describe flow and transport
 in individual fractures.Becqause it can be  difficult to
 obtain information about each fracture in the rock mass,
 stochastic models usually are required. These models
 use statistical information about  distribution of fracture
 properties such as orientation and aperture widths to
 describe flow and transport.

 Hybrid models are combinations of discrete fracture
 and continuum models, while channel models describe
 solute transport as small fingers orchannels ratherthan
 as a uniform front along the width of a fracture.

 Particle Transport through Porous Media

 In addition to solute transport through porous media,
the transport of particles (including bacteria, viruses,
 inorganic precipitates, natural organic matter, asbestos
fibers, orclays) also may be important in investigations
of contaminant transport.  Particles can  be removed
from solution by   surface filtration,  straining,  and
physical-chemical processes (Figure 3-8) (Palmer and
Johnson, I989a).

The effectiveness of each process is dependent on the
size of the specific particles present (Palmer  and
Johnson, 1989a). If particles are larger than the largest
                                                   SURFACE

                                                   FILTRATION
                      ogogogog
                       gogogogo
    STRAINING
    PHYSICAL-

    CHEMICAL
                       ogogqgqg
                       °'ogo§ogo
                       qgogpgog
                        gogogogo
 Figure 3-8. Mechanisms of Filtration (Palmer and
 Johnson,I989a)

pore diameters, they cannot penetrate into the porous
medium and are filtered at the surface of the medium.
If particles are smaller than the largest pores but larger
than the smallest, the particles are transported through
the larger pore  channels, but eventually encounter a
pore channel with a smaller diameter and are removed
by straining. If particles are smaller than the smallest
pore openings,  the particles can be transported long
distances through the porous medium.

The rate at which particles move through  the porous
medium  depends on several physical-chemical
processes (Palmer and Johnson, 1989a). Particles
may undergo random collisions with sand grains, and in
a percentage of those collisions particles will adhere to
the solid matrix by interception. Chemical conditions
may affect particle transport; e.g., such processes as
aggregation formation due to pH changes may change
particle surface properties. These  larger aggregates
                                            46

-------
 can then be strained or filtered from the water.

 Microorganism movement through geologic materials
 is limited by many processes (Palmer and Johnson,
 1989a). Some bacteria are large enough to be strain|ed
 from the water. Although viruses, which are smaller
 than bacteria, can pass through the pores, they may
 adsorb to geologic materials because their surfaces are
 charged. Microorganisms, like chemical  constituents,
 can be transported by diffusion, or if they are motile, can
 move in response  to changes  in  environmental
 conditions and  chemical concentrations. Since
 microorganism live and die, the rates of these processes
 should be included in the description of their transp art
 in the subsurface.

 Physical Processes Controlling the Transport  of
 Non-Aqueous Phase Liquids  (NAPLs) in the
 Subsurface
 Transport and Dissolution of NAPLs
 Non-aqueous phase liquids (NAPLs) are those liquids
 that do not readily dissolve in water and can exist as a
 separate fluid phase.  (Palmer and Johnson, 1989|b).
 NAPLs  are divided into two classes: those that are
 lighter than water (LNAPLs) and those with a density
 greater  than  water (DNAPLs).  LNAPLs inclu'de
 hydrocarbon  fuels, such  as  gasoline, heating oil,
 kerosene, jet fuel, and aviation gas. DNAPLs include
 the  chlorinated hydrocarbons, such as  1,1 h-
 trichloroethane, carbon tetrachloride,  chlorophenols,
 chlorobenzenes,   tetrachloroethylene,    a'nd
 polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs).

 As NAPLs move through geologic media, they dispU ce
 water and air (Palmer and Johnson, 1989b). Wate is
 the wetting phase relative to both air and NAPLs and
 tends to line edges of pores and cover sand grains.
 NAPLs are the non-wetting phase and tend to move
 through the center of pore spaces. Neither the water nor
 the NAPL phase occupies the  entire pore, so the
 permeability of the medium with respect to these fluids
 is different than when the pore space is entirely occuped
 by a single phase. This reduction in permeability depends
 upon the specific medium and can be described in
 terms of relative permeability, i.e., permeability  alt a
 certain fraction of pore space occupied by the NAJPL
 compared to the permeability of the medium at saturatjon
with the NAPL. Relative permeability ranges from 1.0 at
 100 percent saturation to 0.0 at 0 percent saturatioh.

 Figure 3-9 shows permeability of a NAPL in a hypothetical
 medium during multiphase flow. (Palmerand Johnson,
 1989b). At 100  percent water saturation, the relative
permeabilities of the water and NAPL are 1.0 and o'.O,
respectively. As the fraction of the pore space occup ed
by NAPL increases, a corresponding decrease occurs
       100%     NAPL SATURATION
     1.0
 ui
 5
 cc
 UJI
 a,
     0.0
            Irreducible
         -  Water
            Saturation
                       Srw
               WATER SATURATION
100%
 Figure 3-9. Relative Permeability as a Function of
 Saturation (Palmer and Johnson, I989b)
 in the fraction of water within the pore space. As the
 water fraction decreases, the relative permeability with
 respect to the water phase decreases to zero. Zero
 relative permeability is not obtained when the fraction of
 water within the pore space equals zero, but at the
 irreducible water saturation (S^), i.e., the level of water
 saturation at which  the water  phase is effectively
 immobile and there is no significant flow of water. The
 relative permeability of NAPL is similar. At 100 percent
 NAPL saturation, the relative permeability for the NAPL
 is equal to 1.0, but as the NAPL saturation decreases,
 the relative permeability of the NAPL decreases. At the
 residual NAPL saturation (Srn), the relative permeability
 for the  NAPL is effectively zero, and the  NAPL is
 considered immobile. These immobile fractions of NAPL
 cannot  be easily removed from pores except by
 dissolution by flowing water.

 Transport of Light NAPLs
 If small volumes of aspilled LNAPL enterthe unsaturated
 zone (i.e., vadose zone), the LNAPL will flow through
 the central portion of the unsaturated pores until residual
 saturation is  reached (Figure 3-1 Oa) (Palmer  and
 Johnson, 1989b). A three-phase  system consisting of
water, LNAPL, and air is formed within the vadose zone.
 Infiltrating water dissolves the components within the
 LNAPL  (e.g., benzene, xylene, and toluene)  and
transports them to the water table. These  dissolved
contaminants form  a contaminated plume  radiating
fromthe area of the residual product. Many components
found in LNAPLs are volatile and  can partition into soil
air and be transported by molecular diffusion to other
parts of the aquifer. As these vapors diffuse into adjoining
soil areas, they may partition back into the water phase
and transfer contamination over wider areas. If the soil
                                               47

-------
surface is relatively impermeable, vapors will not diffuse
across the surface boundary and concentrations of
contaminants in the soil atmosphere may build up to
equilibrium conditions. However, if the surface is not
covered with an impermeable material, vapors may
diffuse into the atmosphere.

If large volumes of LNAPL are spilled (Figure 3-1 Ob),
the LNAPL flows through the pore space to the top of
the capillary fringe of the  water table. Dissolved
components of the LNAPL precede the less soluble
components and may change the wetting properties of
the water, causing a reduction in the  residual water
content and a decrease in the height of the capillary
fringe.

Since LNAPLs are lighter than water, they will float on
top of the capillary fringe. As the head formed by the
infiltrating  LNAPLs  increases, the water table is
depressed  and the LNAPLs accumulate in  the
depression.  If the source of the  spilled  LNAPLs is
removed or contained,- LNAPLs within the vadose zone
continue to flow underthe force of gravity until reaching
residual saturation. As the LNAPLs continue to enter
the water table depression, they spread laterally on top
of the capillary fringe (Figure 3-1 Oc). The draining of the
upper portions of the vadose zone reduces the total
head  at the interface between the LNAPLs and the
ground  water, causing  the water table to rebound
slightly. The rebounding water displaces only a portion
of the LNAPLs because the LNAPLs remain at residual
saturation. Ground water passing through the area of
residual saturation dissolves constituents of the residual
LNAPLs, forming acontaminant plume. Water infiltrating
from the surf ace also can dissolve the residual LNAPLs
and add to the contaminant load of the aquifer.

Decrease in the watertable levelfrom seasonal variations
or ground-water pumping also causes dropping of the
pool of LNAPLs. If the watertable rises again, part of the
LNAPLs may be pushed up, but a portion remains at
residual saturation belowthe newwatertable. Variations
in the watertable height, therefore, can spread LNAPLs
over a greater thickness of the aquifer, causing larger
volumes of aquifer materials to be  contaminated.
Selection of a remedial technology for LNAPLs in the
ground water should not include techniques that move
LNAPLs into uncontaminated areas where more LNAPLs
can be held at residual saturation.

Transport of Dense NAPLs
DNAPLs are very mobile  in the subsurface because of
their relatively low solubility, high density, and low
viscosity (Palmer and Johnson, 1989b).  The  low
solubility means that DNAPLs do not readily mix with
water and remain as separate phases. Their high density
                    PRODUCT sconce
                    t M i *
 B
                   PRODUCT SOURCE
                    i i i  t T
Figure 3-10. Movement of LNAPLs into the
Subsurface: (A) Distribution of LNAPLs after
Small Volume has Been Spilled; (B) Depression
of the Capillary Fringe and Water Table; (C)
Rebounding of the Water Table as LNAPLs Drain
From Overlying Pore Space (Palmer and
Johnson, I989b)

provides a driving force that can carry them deep into
aquifers. The combination of high density and low
viscosity results in the displacement of the lowerdensity,
higher viscosity fluid, i.e., water, by  DNAPLs, causing
"unstable" flow  and viscous fingering (Saffman and
Taylor, 1958; Chouke and others, 1959; Homsy, 1987;
Kueper and Frind, 1988).

If a small amount of DNAPL is spilled (Figure 3-11 a),
the DNAPL  will flow  through the unsaturated  zone
under the influence of gravity  toward the water table,
flowing  until reaching  residual saturation in the
unsaturated  zone (Palmer and Johnson, 1989b).  If
water is present in the vadose zone, viscous fingering
                                               48

-------
of the DNAPLs will be observed during infiltration. No
viscous4fingering will be exhibited if the unsaturated
zone is dry. The DNAPLs can partition into the vapor
phase, with the dense  vapors sinking to the capillary
fringe. Residual DNAPLs or vapors can be dissolved b'y
infiltrating water and be transported to the water table,
resulting in a contaminant plume within the aquifer.

If a greater amount of DNAPL is spilled (Figure 3-11bL
the DNAPLs flow until they reach the capillary fringe and
begin to penetrate the aquifer. To move through the
capillary fringe, the DNAPLs must overcome the capillaijy
forces between the water and the medium. A critical
height of DNAPLs is required to overcome these forces.
Larger critical heights are required for DNAPLs to mov'e
through unfractured, saturated  clays and silts;  thu's
these types of materials may be effective barriers to thje
movement of DNAPLs if the critical heights are not
exceeded.
After penetrating the aquifer, DNAPLs continue to mov 3
through the saturated zone  until they reach residual
saturation. DNAPLs are then dissolved by ground wateV
passing through the contaminated area, resulting in a
contaminant plu me that can extend over a large thickne
of the aquifer. If finer-grained strata are contained withi
the aquifer, infiltrating DNAPLs accumulate on top o!f
the strata, creating a pool. At the interface between th
ground water and the DNAPL pool, the solvent dissolve
into the water  and spreads vertically by moleculajr
diffusion. As  water flows by the  DNAPL  pool,  the
concentration of the contaminants in the ground wateV
increases until saturation is achieved orthe downgradier t
edge of the pool is reached.  DNAPLs, therefore, often
exist in fingers or pools in the subsurface, rather than in
continuous distributions. The density of pools and finger;
of DNAPLs within an aquifer are important forcontrolling
the concentrations of dissolved contaminants originating
from DNAPLs.

If even larger amounts of DNAPLs are spilled (Figure 3
11 c),  DNAPLs  can penetrate to the bottom of  the
aquifer, forming pools in depressions. If the impermeable
lower bou ndary is sloping, DNAPLs flow down the dip ojf
the boundary. This direction can be upgradient from the
original spill area if the impermeable boundary slopes iiji
that direction. DNAPLs also can flow along bedrock
troughs, which  may be oriented differently from  the
direction of ground-waterflow. Flow along impermeable
boundaries can  spread contamination in directions tha
would not be predicted based on hydraulics.

Chemical Processes Controlling the Transport o
Contaminants  in the Subsurface

Introduction
Subsurface transport of contaminants often is controlled
                    DNAK.IOURCE
                      DNAPL *OURC«
                      Witt
Figure 3-11. Movement of DNAPLs into the
Subsurface (A) Distribution of DNAPLs after
Small Volume has Been Spilled; (B) Distribution
of DNAPLs after Moderate Volume has Been
Spilled; (C) Distribution of DNAPLs after Large
Volume has Been Spilled (after Feenstra and
Cherry, 1988, by Palmer and Johnson, 1989b)
by complex interactions between physical, chemical,
and biological processes. The advection-dispersion
equation used to quantitatively describe and predict
contaminant movement in the subsurface  also must
contain reaction terms added to the basic equation to
account forchemical and biological processes important
in controlling contaminant transport and fate (Johnson
and others, 1989).
                                                49

-------
Chemical Reactions of Organic Compounds
Chemical reactions may transform one compound into
another, change the state of the compound, or cause a
compound to combine with other organic or inorganic
chemicals (Johnson and others,  1989). For use in the
advection-dispersion equation, these  reactions
represent changes in the distribution of mass within the
specified volume through which the movement of the
chemicals is modeled.

Chemical  reactions  in the  subsurface often   are
characterized kinetically as equilibrium, zero, or first
order, depending on  how the rate is affected by the
concentrations of the reactants. A zero-order reaction is
one  that proceeds at a  rate  independent of the
concentration of the reactant(s). In afirst-orderprocess,
the rate of the reactions is directly dependent on the
concentration of one of the reactants. The use of zero
or first-order rate expressions may oversimplify the
description of a process, but higher order expressions,
which maybe more realistic, are often difficult to measure
and/or model in complex environmental systems. Also
first-order reactions are easy to incorporate into transport
models (Johnson and others, 1989).

Sorptlon. Sorption is probably the most  important
chemical process affecting the  transport  of organic
contaminants in the subsurface environment. Sorption
of non-polar organics is usually  considered  an
equilibrium-partitioning process between the aqueous
phase and the porous medium  (Chiou and others,
1979). When solute concentrations are low (i.e., either
£ 10"5 Molar, or less than half the solubility, whichever
is lower), partitioning often is  described using a linear
Freundlich isotherm, where the sorbed concentration is
afunctionof the aqueous concentration and the partition
coefficient (Kp) (Karickhoff and others, 1979; Karickhoff,
1984). Kp usually is measured  in laboratory batch
equilibrium tests, and the data are  plotted as the
concentration in the aqueous phase versus the amount
sorbed onto  the solid phase (Figure 3-12) (Chiou and
others, 1979).

Under conditions of linear equilibrium partitioning, the
sorptfon process is  represented in the advection-
dispersion equation as a "retardation factor," R (Johnson
and others, 1989). The retardation factor is dependent
on the partition coefficient K  , bulk density of aquifer
materials, and porosity.

The  primary mechanism  of  organic sorption  is the
formation  of  hydrophobia  bonding between  a
contaminant and the natural organic matter associated
with  aquifers (Tanford, 1973; Karickhoff and others,
1979; Karickhoff, 1984; Chiou and others, 1985; MacKay
and Powers, 1987). Therefore, the extent of sorption of
     1200
      800
      400
1.U-TR1CHLOROETHANE

 'l,1,2,2-TETRACHLOROETHANE

  i:    1,2-DlCHLOROETHANE
   m     0  400  800  1200 1600 2000 2400
   8        AQUEOUS CONCENTRATION (ug/L)


Figure 3-12. Batch Equilibrium Data for 1,1,1-TCA,
1,1,2,2,-TeCA and 1,2-DCA (adapted from Chiou
and others, 1979, by Johnson and others, 1989)
a specific chemical can be estimated from the organic
carbon content of the aquifer materials  (foc) and a
proportionality constant characteristic of the chemical
(Koc), if the organic content is sufficiently high (i.e.,
fraction organic carbon content (f^,) > 0.001) (Karickhoff
and others, 1979; Karickhoff, 1984). Koc values for many
compounds are not  known, so correlation equations
relating K^to more easily available chemical properties,
such as solubility or octanol-water partition coefficients
(Kenaga  and  Goring,  1980;  Karickhoff,  1981;
Schwarzenbach and Westall, 1981; Chiou and others,
1982,1983), have been developed. Within a compound
class, KQC values derived from correlation expressions
often  can  provide reasonable estimates  of sorption.
However,  if correlations were developed covering a
broad range of compounds, errors associated with the
use of Koc estimates can be large (Johnson and others,
1989).

This method of estimation of sorption, using K^and foc
values, is less expensive than the use of batch equilibrium
tests. However, in soils with lower carbon content,
sorption of neutral organic compounds onto the mineral
phase can cause significant errors in the estimate of the
partition coefficient (Chiou and others, 1985).

Hydrolysis.   Hydrolysis,  an  important abiotic
degradation process in ground waterforcertain classes
of compounds, is the direct reaction of dissolved
compounds with water molecules (Mabey  and Mill,
1978). Hydrolysis of chlorinated compounds, which are
often resistant to biodegradation (Siegristand McCarty,
1987), forms an alcohol or alkene (Figure 3-13).

Most information concerning rates  hydrolysis is obtained
from laboratory studies, since competing reactions and
                                                50

-------
        RX + HOH—*~ ROH + HX
        HX

         C-C   H*°r   fr-OC
                OH~
Figure 3-13. Schematic of Hydrolysis Reactions
for Halogenated Organic Compounds (Johnson
and others, 1989)
slow degradation rates make hydrolysis difficult to
measure in the field. (Johnson and others, 1989). Often
data for hydrolysis are fitted as a first-order reactio i,
and a hydrolysis rate constant, K, is obtained. The ra e
constant  multiplied  by the concentration of tre
contaminant is added to the advection-dispersic n
equation to account for hydrolysis of the contaminant.

Cosolvation and lonization. Cosolvation and ionizatic n
are processes that may decrease sorption and thereby
increase transport velocity (Johnson and others, 1989p.
The presence of cosolvents decreases entropic forces
thatfavorsorptionofhydrophobicorganic contaminants
by increasing interactions between the solute and the
solvent (Nkedi-Kizza and others, 1985; Zachara an'd
others, 1988). If biologically derived or anthropogenic
solvent compounds are present at levels of 20 percent
or more by volume, the solubility of hydrophobic organic
contaminants can be increased by an orderof magnitude
or more (Nkedi-Kizza and others, 1985). In Figure 3-14,
decrease in sorption of anthracene in three soils, ajs
described  by the sorption coefficient Kp, is illustrated,
with  methanol  as the cosolvent. Since cosolvert
concentration must be large for solute velocity to b 5
increased substantially, Cosolvation is important primarily
near sources of ground-water contamination.

In the process of ionization, acidic compounds, such a s
phenols or organic acids, can lose a proton in solution
to form anions that, because of their charge, tend to be
water-soluble (Zachara and others, 1986). For example^
the Koc of 2,4,5-trichlorophenol can decrease from 2,330
for the phenol, to almost zero for the phenolate (Figures
3-15 and  3-16) (Johnson and others, 1989).  Acidic
compounds tend to ionize more as the pH increased.
However,  for  many compounds,  such as  the
chlorophenols, substantial ionization can occur at neutrgj
pH values.

Volatilization  and  Dissolution. Two importan
pathways   for the movement of volatile organic
compounds in the subsurface are volatilization into the
unsaturated zone and dissolution into the ground wate
                                                              1000
                                                               100 *
                    .1   .2  .3  .4  .5-
                  FRACTION CO-SOLVENT
                     (METHANOL)

Figure 3-14. Effect of Methanol as a Cosolvent on
Anthracene Sorption for Three Soils (Adapted
from Nkedi-Kizza and others, 1985, by Johnson
and others, 1989)
     V2330
Figure 3-15. Koc values for 2,4,5-trichlorophenol
and 2,4,5-trichlorophenolate (Johnson and
others, 1989)
       2500


       2000


       150°

       1000


        500

          0
    2,4,5-
TRICHLOROPHENOL
               6.0  6.5  7.0  7.5  8.0  8.5
Figure 3-16. Koc versus pH for 2,4,5-
trichlorophenol (Johnson and others, 1989)
                                               51

-------
(Johnson  and others,  1989).  Contaminants  in the
aqueous and vapor phases are also more amenable to
degradation.

The degree  of  volatilization  of  a contaminant is
determined by: (1) the area of contact between the
contaminated area and the unsaturated zone, which is
affected by the nature of the medium (e.g., grain size,
depth to water, water content) and the contaminant
(e.g., surface tension and liquid density); (2) the vapor
pressures of the contaminants; and (3) the rate at which
the compound diffuses in the subsurface (Johnson and
others, 1989).

The residual saturation remaining when  immiscible
liquids move downward through unsaturated porous
media provides a large surface area for volatilization
(Johnson and others, 1989). Vapor concentrations in
the vicinity of the residual  are often  at saturation
concentrations. Movement of  vapor away from the
residual saturation is usually controlled by molecular
diffusion, which is affected by the tortuosity of the path
through which the vapors move. Tortuosity also is
affected by the air-filled porosity of the medium, so
diffusion is reduced in porous media with a high water
content.

Diffusion also is  reduced  by the  partitioning  of the
vapors out of the gas phase  and into the solid or
aqueous phases (Johnson and others, 1989).  The
retardation factor developed for partitioning between
the aqueous and solid phases can be modified with a
term to describe partitioning between the vapor and
aqueous phases.

When immiscible fluids reach the capillary fringe, their
further movement is determined by the density of the
fluids relative to water (Scheigg, 1984;Schwille, 1988).
The LNAPLs pool on top of the water table while the
DNAPLs penetrate into the ground water. Floating
pools of LN APL can provide substantial su rf ace area for
volatilization, with diffusioncontrollingthe mass transfer
of organic contaminants into the vapor phase.

The transport and fate of DNAPLs that penetrate into
the  ground  water  is  controlled by dissolution.
Experiments have shown that saturation concentration
values can be maintained even with high ground-water
velocities (e.g., 1 m/day) through a zone of contamination
(Anderson and others, 1987). During remedial activities,
such as pump-and-treat, ground-water velocities  may
be  high, but the  dissolution process should still be
effective.

Chemical Reactions of Inorganic Compounds
In studies of organic contamination, the most important
chracteristic is the total concentration of a contaminant
in a certain phase (e.g., in water versus aquifer solid
materials). However, studiesof inorganic contamination
are often more difficult because inorganic materials can
occur in many chemical forms, and knowledge of these
forms (i.e, species) is required to predict their behavior
in ground water (Morel, 1983; Sposito, 1986).

In ground water, an inorganic contaminant may occur
as: (1)  "free  ions" (i.e.,  surrounded  only by water
molecules); (2) insoluble species; (3)  metal/ligand
complexes; (4) adsorbed species; (5) species held on a
surface by ion exchange; or (6) species differing  by
oxidation  state (e.g., manganese (II)  and  (IV)  or
chromium (111) and (VI)) (Johnson and others, 1989).

The total concentration of an inorganic compound may
not provide sufficient  information to describe the fate
and behaviorof that compound inground water. Mobility,
reactivity, biological availability, and toxicity of metals
and other inorganic compounds depend upon their
speciation (Johnson and others, 1989).  The primary
reactions affecting  the  speciation of inorganic
compounds are solubility and dissolution, complexation
reactions, adsorption and  surface  chemistry, ion
exchange, and redox  chemistry.

Solubility, Dissolution, and Precipitation. Dissolution
and weathering of minerals determine  the  natural
composition of  ground water (Johnson  and others,
1989).  Dissolution is the dissolving of  all components
within a mineral, while weathering is a partial dissolution
process in which certain elements leach out of a mineral,
leaving others behind.

Mineral dissolution is the source of most inorganic ions
in ground water. In principle a mineral can dissolve up
to the limits of its solubility, but in many cases, reactions
occur at such a  slow rate that true equilibrium is never
attained (Morgan, 1967).

The contribution of ions from one mineral may affect the
solubility of other minerals containing the same ion (i.e.,
the "common ion effect"). Computer programs such as
MINTED (Felmy and others, 1984), MINEQL (Westall
and others,  1976), and  WATEQ2  (Ball  and others,
1980) may be used to predict the equilibrium distribution
of chemical species in ground water and indicate if the
water is undersaturated, supersaturated, orat equilibrium
with various mineral phases. Some of these programs
also may be used to  predict the ionic composition of
ground water in equilibrium with assumed  mineral
phases (Jennings and others, 1982).

The weathering  of silicate minerals contributes cations,
such as calcium, magnesium, sodium,  potassium, and
                                                52

-------
silica, to waterandforms secondary weathering products
such as kaolinite and montmorillonite clays (Johnson
and  others, 1989). This weathering increases the
alkalinity of ground water to a level greater than ts
rainwater origins.

Weathering and dissolution also can be a source of
contaminants. Leachates from mine tailings can yie Id
arsenate, toxic metals, and strong mineral acids (Hem,
1970), while leachates from fly-ash piles can contribute
selenium, arsenate, lithium, and toxic metals (Stumm
and  Morgan, 1981;  Honeyman  and others,  1982;
Murarka and Macintosh, 1987).

The opposite of dissolution reactions is precipitation of
minerals or contaminants from an aqueous solution
(Johnson and others, 1989). During precipitation, tljie
least-soluble mineral  at a given pH level is removed
from solution. An element is removed by precipitation
when its solution concentration saturates the solubility
of one of its solid compounds. If the solution concentration
later drops below the solubility limit, the solid will begin
to dissolve  until the solubility level is attained agaih.
Contaminants may initially precipitate, then slowly
dissolve later after a  remedial effort has reduced the
solution concentration; thus complete remediation of
the aquifer may require years.

A contaminant initially may be soluble but later precipitaie
after mixing with other waters or after contact with other
minerals (Drever, 1982; Williams, 1985; Palmer, 1989!).
For example, pumping water from an aquifer may
mobilize lead until it converges and mixes with waters
high in carbonates from a different  formation arjd
precipitates as a lead carbonate solid.
Complexation Reactions. In complexation reactions,
a metal ion reacts with an anion that functions as la
ligand (Johnson and others, 1989). The metal and the
ligand bind together to form a new soluble species
called a complex. Transition metals form the strongest
complexes (Stumm and Morgan, 1981); alkaline eart'h
metals form only weak complexes, while alkali metals
do not form complexes (Dempsey and O'Melia, 1983).
The  approximate order of complexing  strength of
metals is:
       Hg> Cu> Pb> Ni> Zn> Cd> Fe(ll)> Mn> Ca> Mg
Common inorganic ligands that bind with metals include
OH", CI-, S04=, C03=, S-,  F,
NH3, PO4 CN-, ant
polyphosphates.  Their binding strength  depend
primarily on the metal ion with which they are complexing
(Johnson and others, 1989). Inorganic ligands arb
usually in excess compared to the "trace" metals wit i
which they bind, and, therefore, they affect the fate of
the metals in the environmental system, ratherthan vice
versa (Morel, 1983).

Organic ligands generally form stronger complexes
with metalsthan inorganic ligands (Johnson and others,
1989). Organic ligands include: (1) synthetic compounds
from wastes, such as amines, pyridines, phenols, and
other organic bases and weak  acids;  and  (2) natural
organic materials, primarily humic materials (Schnitzer,
1969; Hayes and Swift, 1978; Stevenson, 1982,1985;
Johnson and others, 1989). Humic materials are complex
structures, and their complexation behavioris difficult to
predict (Perdue and Lytle, 1983; Sposito, 1984; Perdue,
1985; Dzombak and others, 1986; Fish and others,
1986). Generally, humic materials are found in significant
concentrationsonly in shallow aquifers. Inthese aquifers,
however, they may be the primary influence on the
behavior of metals (Thurman, 1985).

Equilibrium among reactants and complexes for a given
reaction is predicted by an equilibrium (or "stability")
constant,  K, which defines a mass-law relationship
among the species (Johnson and others,  1989). For
given total ion concentrations (measured analytically),
stability  constants can be  used to predict  the
concentration of all possible species (Martell and Smith,
1974, 1977; Smith and Martell, 1975).

Because complexes decrease the amount of free ions
in  solution, less metal  may  sorb  onto aquifer solid
materials  or participate  in  precipitation reactions
(Johnson and others, 1989). The metal is more soluble
because it is primarily bound up in the soluble complex.
Research  has demonstrated that a metal undergoing
complexation  may  be less toxic  to  aquifer
microorganisms (Reuterand others, 1979).

Sorption and Surface Chemistry.  Surface sorption,
in many cases, is the most important process affecting
toxic metal transport in the subsurface (Johnson and
others, 1989). Changes in metal concentration, as well
as pH, can have a significant effect on the extent of
sorption (Figure 3-17).

Approaches to predicting behavior of metal ions based
on  sorption  processes  include  using  isotherms
(indicating that  data  were collected at  a fixed
temperature) to  graphically  and mathematically
represent  sorption data (Johnson and others, 1989).
Two types of isotherms are commonly  used: the
Freundlich isotherm and the Langmuir isotherm (Figure
3-18). The Freundlich isotherm is empirical, and sorbed
(S) and aqueous (C) concentration data are  fitted by
adjusting two parameters (K and  a). The Langmuir
                                                53

-------
     100


      80


  I  «»
  CO
  <  40
  a*

      20


       0
Pb
             Cd
                          4
                         PH
 Figure 3-17. Adsorption of Metal Ions on
 Amorphous Silica as a Function of pH (adapted
 from Schindler and others, 1976, by Johnson and
 others, 1989)
  logs
                                    a=1
                          logC

Figure 3-18. Schematic Representation of
Freundlich and Langmuir Isotherm Shapes for
Batch Equilibrium Tests (Johnson and others,
1989)


isotherm is based on the theory of surface complexation,
using a parameter corresponding to the maximum
amount that can be sorbed and the partition coefficient,
K (Morel, 1983).

Another method to describe sorption is to use surface
complexation models that represent sorption as ions
binding to specific chemical  functional groups on a
reactive surface (Johnson and others, 1989). All surface
 sites may be identical or may be grouped into different
 classes of sites (Benjamin and Leckie, 1981). Each type
 of site has a set of specific sorbing constants, one for
 each sorbing  compound.  Electrostatic forces at the
 surface also contribute to the overall sorption constant
 (Davis and others, 1978). Binding of ions to the surface
 is calculated from constants using mass-law equations
 similar to those  used to calculate complex formation
 (Schindler and others, 1976; Stumm and others, 1976;
 Dzombak and Morel, 1986). However, the parameters
 used in surface  complexation models are data-fitting
 parameters, whichf it a specified set of data to a particular
 model, but have no thermodynamic meaning and no
 generality beyond the calibrating data set (Westall and
 others, 1980).

 Ion-Exchange Reactions.  Ion-exchange reactions
 are similarto sorption. However, sorption is coordination
 bonding of metals (or anions) to specific surface sites
 and is considered to be two-dimensional, while an ion-
 exchanger  is a three-dimensional,  porous  matrix
 containing fixed  charges (Helfferich, 1962; Johnson
 and others, 1989). Ions are held by electrostatic forces
 rather than by coordination bonding.  Ion-exchange
 "selectivity coefficients" are empirical and vary with the
 amount of  ion  present (Reichenburg, 1966).  Ion
 exchange is used to describe the binding of alkali
 metals, alkaline earths, and some anions to clays and
 humic materials (Helfferich, 1962; Sposito,   1984).
 Knowledge of ion exchange is used to understand the
 behavior of  major natural ions in aquifers and also is
 useful for understanding  behavior of contaminant ions
 at low levels. In addition, ion exchange models are used
 to represent competition among  metals for surface
 binding (Sposito, 1984).

 Redox  Chemistry. Reduction-oxidation (redox)
 reactions involve a change in the oxidation state of
 elements (Johnson and others,  1989). The amount of
 change  is  determined by  the  number  of  electrons
 transferred during the reaction  (Stumm and Morgan,
 1981). The  oxidation status of an element can be
 important in determining  the potential for transport of
 that element. For example,  in slightly acidic to alkaline
 environments,  Fe(lll)  precipitates as a highly sorptive
 phase (ferric hydroxide), while Fe(ll)  is soluble and
 does not retain other metals. The reduction of Fe(lll) to
 Fe(ll) releases not only Fe+2 to the water, but also other
 contaminants sorbed  to the ferric  hydroxide surfaces
 (Evans and others, 1983; Sholkovitz, 1985).

 Chromium (Cr) (VI) is a toxic, relatively mobile anion,
while Cr (111) is immobile, relatively insoluble, and strongly
 sorbs to surfaces. Selenate (Se) (VI) is mobile but less
toxic, while selenite Se(IV) is more toxic but less mobile
 (Johnson and others,  1989).
                                                54

-------
The redox state of an aquifer is usually closely related
to microbial activity and the type of substrates available
to the microorganisms (Johnson and others, 1989). As
organic contaminants are oxidized in an aquifer, oxygen
is depleted and  chemically  reducing (anaerobic)
conditions form. The redox reactions that occur depend
on the dominant electron potential, which is defined by
the primary redox-active species. The combination of
Fe(ll)/Fe(lll)  defines  a narrow range of electron
potentials, while (S)(sulfur)(+IV)/S(-ll)definesabroad'er
range.  Pairs  of chemical species are called redox
couples.

After oxygen is depleted from ground water, the most
easily reduced materials begin to react and, along with
the reduced product, determine the dominant potential.
After that material is reduced, the next most easily
reduced  material  begins  to react. These series pf
reactions  continue,   usually  catalyzed  by
microorganisms. An aquifer may be described as "mildly
reducing" or "strongly reducing ."depending on where' it
is in the chemical series (Stumm and Morgan, 1981J.

The electron  potential of water may be measured in
volts, as  Eh,  or expressed by the "pe," which is the
negative  logarithm of the electron activity in the wafer
(Johnson and others, 1989). A set of redox reactions is
often summarized on  a pH-pe  (or pH-Eh) diagram,
which shows the  predominant redox species at  any
specified pH and pe (or Eh). Inthistheoreticalapproacjh,
only one redox couple should define the redox potential
of the system at equilibrium. However, in an aquifer,
many redox couples not in equilibrium can be observed
simultaneously (Lindberg and  Runnels,  1984J).
Therefore, redox behavior of chemicals in aquifers is
difficult to predict. However, the redox status of an
aquifer is important because of its effects on the mobility
of elements and the potential effects on biodegradation
of organic contaminants. Anaerobic (reducing)
conditions  are  not  favorable for hydrocarbojn
degradation,  but  reducing  conditions  favor
dehalogenation of chlorinated and other halogenate'd
compounds (Johnson and others, 1989).
Biological Processes Controlling the Transport of
Contaminants in the Subsurface

Introduction
Historically, ground water was thought to be a sa
water source because it was protected by a metabolical
diverse "living filter" of microorganisms in the soil root
zone that converted organic contaminants to innocuous
end-products (Suf lita, 1989a). Aqu if ers were considered
to be abiotic environments, based on studies that showed
that microbial numbers decreased  with  soil depih
(Waksman, 1916) and that  indicated that most
microorganisms were attached to soil particles (Baikwill
and others, 1977). In addition, by estimating the time
required for surface water to vertically penetrate
subsurface formations,  researchers felt  that
microorganisms  travelling with water would utilize
available nutrients and rapidly die off. Therefore, since
aquifers were considered to be sterile, they could not be
biologically remediated  if  contaminated with organic
contaminants. However, microscopic,  cultivation,
metabolic, and  biochemical investigations, using
aseptically obtained aquifer materials, have shown that
there are high  numbers of metabolically diverse
procaryotic and eucaryotic organisms present in the
terrestrial subsurface environment (Suflita, 1989a).

Evidence of Subsurface Microorganisms
Microbiological investigations have  detected  high
numbers of microorganisms  (up to 50 x 106 total cells/
ml_) in both contaminated and uncontaminated aquifers
at various depths and geological composition (Suflita,
1989a).  Even  deep geological formations may be
suitable habitats  for microorganisms (Kuznetsov and
others, 1963; Updegraff, 1982). The microorganisms
that have been detected in the subsurface are small,
capable of response to  addition of nutrients, and are
primarily attached to  solid surfaces.  Eucaryotic
organisms are present in the subsurface but are few in
numbers and are probably of minorsignificance, existing
as inert resting structures (Suflita, 1989a).

Suitable sampling  technology was  developed to
demonstrate   the  existence  of   subsurface
microorganisms (Suflita, 1989a). Samples must not be
contaminated  with  nonindigenous microorganisms
originating from drilling machinery, surface soil layers,
drilling muds, and water used to make up drilling muds.
Since most subsurface microorganisms are associated
with aquifer solid materials, current sampling efforts use
core recovery and dissection to remove microbiologically
contaminated  portions  of the cores  (McNabb and
Mallard, 1984). This dissection is performed in the field,
to prevent nonindigenous organisms from penetrating
to the inner portions of the core, or in the laboratory if it
is nearby. The outer few centimeters and the top and
bottom  portions  of  the aquifer cores are removed
because of possible contamination by nonindigenous
bacteria, and the  center portions of the cores are used
formicrobiological analysis. An alcohol-sterilized paring
device is used in the dissection process. The paring
device has an inner diameter that is smaller than the
diameter of the core itself. As the aquifer material is
extruded out of the sampling core barrel and over the
paring device, the potentially contaminated material is
stripped away. For anaerobic aquifers, this field paring
dissection is performed  inside plastic anaerobic glove
bags while the latter is purged with  nitrogen to minimize
                                                55

-------
exposure of the microorganisms to oxygen (Beeman
and Suf lita, 1987). Samples obtained by this technique
are considered to be aseptically  acquired and are
suitable for microbiological analyses.

Evidenceof Activity of Subsurface Microorganisms
Although direct and conclusive evidence had been
obtained about the existence of microorganisms in the
subsurface, questions remained about their significance
in ground water. Such questions included: (1) whether
ornotthe indigenous microorganisms were metabolically
active, (2) what was the diversity of the metabolic
activities, (3) whatf actors served to limit and/orstimulate
the growth and metabolism of these organisms, and (4)
could the inherent metabolic versatility of  aquifer
microorganisms be utilized to remediate contaminated
aquifers (Suflita, 1989a).

Microbial subsurface activity  was studied, and the
following metabolic processes were identified in the
subsurface environment: (1) biodegradation of organic
pollutants, including petroleum  hydrocarbons,
alkylpyridines, creosote  chemicals, coal gasification
products, sewage effluent,  halogenated  organic
compounds, nitriloacetate (NTA), and pesticides; (2)
nitrification; (3) denitrification;  (4) sulfur oxidation and
reduction; (5) iron oxidation  and reduction; (6)
manganese oxidation; and (7) methanogenesis (Suf lita,
1989a). These metabolic processes include  aerobic
and anaerobic carbon transformations, many of which
are important in aquifer contaminant biodegradation.
The other processes are those required for the cycling
of nitrogen, sulfur, iron, and manganese in microbial
communities.

Biodegradation may referto complete mineralization of
organic contaminants (i.e., the parent compounds), to
carbon dioxide, water,  inorganic compounds, and cell
protein (Sims and others, 1990). The ultimate products
of aerobic metabolism are carbon dioxide and water,
while under anaerobic conditions, metabolic activities
also result in the formation of incompletely oxidized
simple organic substances such as organic acids and
other products such as methane or hydrogen gas.

Since contaminant biodegradation in the  natural
environment is frequently a stepwise process involving
many enzymes and many  species of organisms,  a
contaminant may not be completely degraded. Instead,
it may  be transformed to intermediate product(s) that
may be less,  equally, or more hazardous than the
parent compound, and  more or less mobile in the
environment (Sims and others, 1990). The loss of a
chemical, therefore, may or may not be a desirable
consequence of  the  biodegradation process  if
biodegradation results in the production of undesirable
metabolites with their own environmental impact and
persistence characteristics (Suflita,  1989b). For
example, the reductive removal of tetrachloroethylene
(TeCE) under anaerobic conditions results in a series of
dehalogenated  intermediates. TeCE's  halogens are
removed and replaced by protons in a series of sequential
steps. However, the rate of reductive dehalogenation
decreases as fewer and  fewer halogens  remain.
Consequently, highly toxic vinyl chloride accumulates
and, from a  regulatory  standpoint,  causes greater
concern than the parent contaminant.  Bioremedial
technologies should be  selected with  knowledge  of
metabolic processes of the specific contaminants at the
site.

Biodegradation of most organic compounds in aquifer
systems may  be evaluated by monitoring their
disappearance from the  aquifer through  time.
Disappearance, or rate of degradation, is  often
expressed as a function of the concentration of one or
more of the contaminants being degraded (Sims and
others, 1990). Biodegradation in natural systems often
can  be modeled  as a first-order chemical  reaction
(Johnson and others, 1989). Both laboratory and field
data suggest that this is true when none of the reactants
are in limited supply. A useful term to describe reaction
kinetics is the half-life, 11/2, which is the time required to
transform 50 percent of the initial constituent.

As decomposable organic matter enters an oxygenated
aquifer (Figure 3-19), microbial metabolism will likely
begin to degrade the contaminating substrate; i.e., the
indigenous microorganisms utilize the contaminant as
an electrondonorforheterotrophicmicrobial respiration
(Suf lita, 1989a). The aquifer microorganisms use oxygen
as a co-substrate and as an electron acceptorto support
their respiration. This oxygen demand may deplete
oxygen and establish anaerobic conditions. When
oxygen becomes limiting, aerobic respiration slows,
and other microorganisms become active and continue
to degrade the organic contaminants. Underconditions
of anoxia, anaerobic bacteria use organic chemicals or
certain inorganic anions as alternate electron acceptors.

Nitrate present in ground water is not rapidly depleted
until oxygen is utilized. Organic matter is still metabolized,
but,  instead of oxygen, nitrate becomes the terminal
electron acceptor during denitrification. Sulfate becomes
a terminal electron acceptor when nitrate is limiting.
When this occurs, hydrogen sulfide, an odorous gas,
can often be detected in the ground water as a metabolic
end-product. When very highly reducing conditions are
present in an aquifer, carbon dioxide becomes an
electron acceptor and methane is formed. Sometimes
a spatial separation of dominant metabolic processes
can occur in an aquifer, depending on the availability of
                                                56

-------
                      6KOUMOWAHM FLOW
           UJ
           ID
           O
           UJ
         + 10
         •  0
         iu
         -10
                                              CHEMICAL SPECIES
                                   NO;
                  ACETATE—-COt
                                            ELECTRON ACCEPTORS
       sol
                      co,
                             BIOLOGICAL CONDITIONS
              AEROBIC
              HETEROTROPHIC
              RESPIRATION
  SULFATE
  RESPIRATION
WETVWJOQQsESS
Figure 3-19. Microbially Mediated Changes in Chemical Species, Redox Conditions, and Spatial
Regions Favoring Different Types of Metabolic Processes Along the Flow Path of a Contaminant
Plume (adapted from Bouwer and McCarty, 1984
by Suflita, 1989a)
electron  acceptors,  the  presence  of  suitable
microorganisms, and the energy benefit of the metabolic
process to the specific microbial communities. As organic
matter is transported in a contaminant plume, a series
of redox zones can be established that range from
highly oxidized to  highly reduced conditions. The
biodegradation potential and the expected  rates of
   metabolism will be different in each zone (Suflita, 1989a).
   For many contaminants, aerobic decomposition is
   relatively fast, especially compared to methanogenic
   conditions. However, some  contaminants,  such as
   certain halogenated aliphatic compounds and 2,4,5-T,
   degrade fasterwhen anaerobic conditions exist (Bouwer
   and others, 1981; Bouwer and McCarty, 1984; Gibson
   and Suflita, 1986).
                                            57

-------
Environmental Factors Affecting Biodegradation
Microorganisms need a suitable physical and chemical
environment to grow and actively metabolize organic
contaminants, (Suflita, 1989a). Extremes of temperature,
pH, salinity, osmotic or hydrostatic pressures, radiation,
free water limitations, contaminant concentration, and/
or the presence of toxic metals orothertoxicant materials
can limit the rate of microbial growth and/or substrate
utilization. Often, two or more environmental factors
interact to limit microbial decomposition processes.
Selected critical environmental factors are presented in
Table 3-1.

Limitations in the ability to alter environmental factors in
the subsurface environment are important in selecting
and  implementing aquifer bioremedial technologies
 (Suflita, 1989a). For example, thetemperature of aquifers
 probably cannot be significantly altered to stimulate in
 situ microbial growth and metabolism, but temperatures
 could be changed in a surface biological treatment
 reactor.

 Physiological Factors Affecting Biodegradation
 In addition to environmental  conditions, microbial
 physiologicalfactors also influence organiccontaminant
 biodegradation (Suflita, 1989a). The supply of carbon
 and energy contained in organic contaminants must be
 sufficient for heterotrophic microbial growth. Too high
 a substrate concentration can limit microbial metabolism
 due to the toxicity of the substrate to microorganisms. If
 concentrations are too low, microbial response may be
 inhibited, or the substrates may not be suitable  for
    Environmental  Factor
Optimum  Levels
   Available  soil  water
25-85% of  water  holding  capacity;
      -0.01  MPa
   Oxygen
Aerobic metabolism: Greater than
      0.2  mg/l dissolved oxygen,
      minimum  air-filled  pore
      space of 10% by volume;
Anaerobic  metabolism: Oa
      concentrations  less than  1%
      by volume
    Redox potential
Aerobes   &  facultative anaerobes:
      greater than  50  millivolts;
Anaerobes: less  than  50  millivolts
   PH

   Nutrients
pH values of 5.5 - 8.5

Sufficient nitrogen,  phosphorus,
      and other nutrients  so as  to
      not limit microbial  growth
      (Suggested  C:N:P ratio of
      120:10:1)
   Temperature
15  - 45° C  (Mesophiles)
Table 3-1. Critical Environmental Factors for Microbial Activity (Sims and others, 1984; Huddleston
and others, 1986; Paul and Clark, 1989)
                                             58

-------
growth. Growth and energy sources do not have to be
supplied by the same carbon substrate. Growth and
metabolism of microorganisms can be stimulated by
providing a non-toxic primary carbon substrate so that
the rate and extent of contaminant degradation can be
increased (McCarty and others, 1981; McCarty, 1985;
McCarty and others, 1984).

A contaminant also will be poorly metabolized if it! is
unable to enter  microbial cells and gain access to
intracellular metabolic enzymes, which may occur with
larger molecular weight compounds (Suflita, 1989a) A
substrate  also will persist if it fails to de-repress the
enzymes  required for its  degradation. Appropriate
enzymes sometimes can be induced by an alternate
chemical compound.  Sometimes  initial biochemical
reactions  result  in  metabolites that  tend to  inhibit
degradation of the parent molecule.

The absence of other necessary microorganisms can
limit  contaminant degradation, since often seve-al
microbial groups are required for complete degradation
(Suflita, 1989a). Microbial consortia are especially
important in anaerobic mineralization of contaminants
(Mclnerney and Bryant, 1981); if any individual membe rs
of a consortium are absent, biodegradation of tie
parent material effectively ceases.

Chemical Factors Affecting Biodegradation
One of the most important factors affecting contaminant
biodegradation in aquifers is the structure of the
contaminant, which determines its physical state (i.e.,
soluble, sorbed) and itstendency to biodegrade (Sufliia,
1989a). Aquifer contaminants may contain chemical
linkages that tend  to favor or hinder microb
degradation. The number, type, and  position
al
of
substituents on a  contaminant  molecule should be
considered when evaluating its  metabolic fate in an
aquifer.

Usually the closer acontaminant structurally resembles
anaturally occurring compound, the betterthe possibility
that the contaminant will be able to enter a microbial
cell, de-repress the synthesis of metabolic enzymes,
and be converted  by those  enzymes to metabo ic
intermediates (Suflita, 1989a). Biodegradation is  less
likely (though not precluded) forthose molecules having
unusual structural features infrequently encountered in
the natural environment.  Therefore,  xenobiotic
compounds tend to persist in the natural environment
because microorganisms have not evolved necessajry
metabolic pathways to degrade those compouncs.
However,  microorganisms are nutritionally versatile,
have the potential to grow rapidly, and possess only a
single copy of DNA. Therefore, any genetic mutation or
recombination is immediately expressed. If the alteration
is of  adaptive  significance,  new species  of
microorganisms can be formed and grow. Contaminated
environments supply selection pressure forthe evolution
of organisms with new metabolic potential that can grow
utilizing the contaminating substance.

Aquifer Bioremediation
If an aquifer contaminant is determined to be susceptible
to biodegradation, the goal of bioremediation is to
utilize the metabolic capabilities of the  indigenous
microorganisms to eliminate that contaminant (Suflita,
1989a). This practice generally does not include the
inoculation of the aquifer with foreign bacteria.

Bioremedial technologies attempt to impose particular
conditions in an aquifer to encourage microbial growth
and  the presence  of  desirable microorganisms.
Bioremediation is based on knowledge of the chemical
and  physical  needs of  the microorganisms  and the
predominant metabolicpathways (Suflita, 1989a). Most
often, microbial activity is stimulated by supplying
nutrients necessary for microbial growth. Bioremediation
can take place either above ground or in situ. In situ
systems  are especially  appropriate for contaminants
that sorb to aquifer materials, since many decades of
pumping may be required to reduce the contaminants to
sufficiently low levels.

Successful implementation of aquifer bioremediation
depends on determining site-specific hydrogeological
variables, such as type and composition of an aquifer,
permeability, thickness, interconnection to other
aquifers, location  of  discharge areas, magnitude of
water table fluctuations,  and ground-water flow rates
(Suflita, 1989b). Generally, bioremediation is utilized in
more permeable aquifer systems where movement of
ground water can be more successfully controlled.

Removal of free product also is important forthe success
of bioremediation. Many substances that serve as
suitable nutrients for microbial growth when present at
low concentrations are inhibitory at high concentrations
(Suflita, 1989b).

Modeling Transport and Fate of Contaminants in an
Aquifer

Introduction
Models are simplified representations of real-world
processes  and events,  and  their creation and  use
require many judgments based on observation of
simulations of specific natural processes. Models may
be used to simulate the response of specific problems
to a variety of possible solutions (Keely, 1989b).
                                                59

-------
Physical  models, including sand-filled tanks used to
simulate aquifers and laboratory columns used to study
contaminant flow through aquifer materials, often are
used to obtain information on contaminant movement
(Keely, 1989b). Analog models  also are physically
based, but are  only similar to actual processes. An
example is the electric analog model, where capacitors
and resistors are used to replicate the effects of the rate
of water  release from storage in aquifers. The main
disadvantage of physical models is the time and effort
required to generate a meaningful amount of data.

Mathematical models are non-physical and rely on
quantification of  relationships between  specific
parameters and variables to simulate the effects of
natural processes (Keely, 1989b,  Weaver and others,
1989). Because  mathematical models are abstract,
they often do not provide an intuitive knowledge of real-
world  situations. However, mathematical  models can
provide insights into the functional dependencies
between causes and effects in an actual aquifer. Large
amounts  of data  can be generated quickly, and
experimental modifications made  easily, making
possible for many situations to be studied in detail for a
given  problem.

Use and Categories of Mathematical Models
The application of mathematical models is subject to
error  in real-world situations when appropriate field
determinations  of  natural process  parameters are
lacking. This source of error is not addressed adequately
by sensitivity analyses or by the application of stochastic
techniques for estimating uncertainty. The high degree
of hydrogeological, chemical, and microbiological
complexity typically present in field situations requires
theuseof site-specific characterization of the influences
of various natural processes by detailed field and
laboratory investigations (Keely, 1989b).

Mathematical models have been  categorized by their
technical    bases    and    capabilities    as:
(1)  parameter identification models; (2) prediction
models; (3) resource  management models; and (4)
data manipulation codes.  (Bachmat and others, 1978;
van der Heidje and others, 1985).

Parameter identification models are used to estimate
aquifer coefficients that determine fluid  flow and
contaminant transport characteristics (e.g., annual
recharge, coefficients of permeability and storage, and
dispersivity (Shelton, 1982; Guven and others, 1984;
Puri, 1984; Khan, 1986a, b; Streckerand Chu, 1986)).
Prediction models are the most numerous type because
they are the primary tools used for testing hypotheses
(Mercer and Faust, 1981; Anderson and others, 1984;
Krabbenhoft and Anderson, 1986).
Resource management models are combinations of
predictive models,  constraining functions (e.g., total
pumpage allowed),  and optimization  routines for
objective functions (e.g., scheduling wellfield operations
for minimum cost or minimum drawdown/pumping lift).
Few of these types  of models are developed well
enough or supported to the degree that they are useful
(van der Heidje, 1984a and b; van derHeidje and others,
1985).

Data manipulations codes are  used to simplify data
entry to other kinds of  models and facilitate the
productions of graphic displays  of model outputs (van
der Heidje and Srinivasan, 1983; Srinivasan, 1984;
Moses and Herman, 1986).

Quality Control Measures
Quality control measures are required to assess the
soundness and utility of a mathematical model and to
evaluate its application to a specific problem. Huyakorn
et al. (1984) and Keely (1989b) have suggested the
following quality control measures:

1.  Validation of the  model's mathematical basis by
    comparing its output with known analytical solutions
    to specific problems.

2.  Verification of the model's  application to various
    problem categories by successful simulation  of
    observed field data.

3.  Benchmarking the problem-solving efficiency of a
    model by comparison with the performance of other
    models.

4.  Critical review of the problem conceptualization to
    ensure that the modeling considers all physical,
    chemical, and biological processes that may affect
    the problem.

5.  Evaluation of the specifics of the model's application,
    e.g., appropriateness  of the boundary conditions,
    grid design, time steps.

6.  Appraisal of the match between the mathematical
    sophistication of the model  and the temporal and
    spatial resolution of the data.

Summary

Transport and fate assessments require interdisciplinary
analyses and interpretations because  processes are
interdependent (Keely 1989a). Each transport process
should be studied from interdisciplinary viewpoints, and
interactions among processes identified and understood.
In addition to a sound conceptual understanding of
                                                60

-------
transport processes, the integration of information on
geologic, hydrologic, chemical, and biological process es
into  an effective  contaminant transport evaluation
requires data that are accurate, precise, and appropriate
at the  intended problem scale and that attempt to
account for spatial and temporal variations.

References

Anderson, M. A., J. F. Pankow, and R. L. Johnson,1987,
The dissolution of residual dense non-aqueous ph£ se
liquid (DNAPL) from a saturated porous medium: in
Proceedings,  Petroleum Hydrocarbons and Organic
Chemicals in Ground Water. Nat. Water Well Assn and
the American Petrol. Institute, Houston, TX, November,
pp. 409-428.

Anderson, P. F., C. R. Faust, and J. W. Mercer, 1984,
Analysis of conceptual designs for remedial measures
at Lipari Landfill, New Jersey: Ground Water, v. 22, pp.
176-190.

Bachmat, Y., B. Andrews, D. Holtz, and S. Sebastian,
1978, Utilization of numerical groundwater models for
Water Resource Management:  EPA-600/8-78-012

Balkwill, D. L., T. E. Rucinski, and L. E. Casida, Jr.,1977,
Release of microorganism from soil with respect  to
transmission electron microscopy viewing and plate
counts:  Antonie Van Leeuwenhoek ed., Journal
Microbiology and Serology, v. 43, pp. 73-87.
of
Ball, J. W., D. K. Nordstrom, and E. A. Jenne, 1980,
Additional  and revised thermochemical  data  ahd
computer code for WATEQ2: A Computerized Model
for Trace and Major Element Speciation and Mineral
Equilibria  of Natural  Waters. Water Resources
Investigations U. S. Geological Survey, no. 78-116.
Bear, J.,  1969,  Hydrodynamic  dispersion: in Flow
Through Porous Media,  R.J.M.  DeWiest, Editor:
Academic Press, New York, pp. 109-199.

Bear, J., 1979, Hydraulics of groundwater: McGraJw-
Hill, New York.

Beeman, R. E. and  J. M. Sufiita,  1987,  Microbial
ecology of a shallow unconfined ground-water aqui er
polluted by municipal landfill leachate: Microbial Ecology,
v. 14, pp. 39-54.

Benjamin, M. M.  and J. O. Leckie, 1981, Multiple ste
adsorption of Cd, Cu, Zn, and Pb on amorphous iron
oxyhyroxides: Journal of Colloid and Interface Scienpe,
v. 79, no. 2, pp. 209-221.
Bouwer, E. J. and P. L. McCarty, 1984, Modeling of
trace  organics biotransformation in the subsurface:
Ground Water, v. 22, pp. 433-440.

Bouwer, E. J., B. E. Rittmann, and P. L. McCarty, 1981,
Anaerobic degradation of halogenated 1- and 2-carbon
organic compounds:  Environmental Science  and
Technology, v.15, pp. 596-599.

Chiou, C. T., D. W. Schmedding, and M. Manes, 1982,
Partitioning of  organic compounds on octanol-water
systems:  Environmental Science and Technology, v.
16, pp. 4-10.

Chiou, C.  T., L. J. Peters, and V. H. Freed, 1979, A
physical concept of soil-water equilibria for nonionic
compounds: Science, v. 206, pp. 831 -832.

Chiou, C. T., P. E. Porter, and D. W. Schmedding, 1983,
Partition  equilibria of nonionic organic compounds
between soils organic matter and water: Environmental
Science and Technology, v. 17, pp. 227-231.

Chiou, C. T., T.  D. Shoup,  and P. E. Porter, 1985,
Mechanistic roles of soil humus and minerals in the
sorption of nonionic organic compounds from aqueous
and organic solutions: Organic Geochemistry, v. 8, pp.
9-14.

Chouke, R. L., P. van Meurs, and C. vander Poel, 1959,
The instability of slow, immiscible, viscous liquid-liquid
displacements  in permeable media transactions:
American Institute of Mining Engineers, v. 216, pp. 188-
194.

Davis, J. A., R. O. James, and J. O. Leckie, 1978,
Surface ionization and complexation at the oxide/water
interface:  I. computation  of electrical  double layer
properties in simple electrolytes: Journal of Colloid and
Interface Science, v. 63. no. 3, pp. 480-499.

Dempsey, B. A. and C. R. O'Melia, 1983, Proton and
calcium complexation of four fulvic acid  Factions: in.
Aquatic and Terrestrial Humic Materials, R. F. Christman
and E. T.  Gjessing, Editors. Ann Arbor Science, Ann
Arbor, Ml.

Drever, J. I., 1982, The geochemistry of natural waters:
Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ.

Dzombak, D. A. and F. M.  M. Morel, 1986, Sorption of
cadmium on hydrous ferricoxide at high sorbate/sorbent
ratios: equilibrium, kinetics, and modelling:  Journal of
Colloid and Interface Science, v. 112, no. 2, pp. 588-
598.
                                                61

-------
Dzombak, D. A., W. Fish, and F. M. M. Morel, 1986,
Metal-humate  interactions. 1. discrete ligand  and
continuous distribution models: Environmental Science
and Technology, v. 20, pp. 669-675.

Evans, D. W., J. J.  Alberts, and  R. A. Clark, 1983,
Reversible ion-exchange of cesium-137 leading  to
mobilization from reservoir sediments: Geochemica et
Cosmochimica Ada, v. 47, no. 11, pp. 1041 -1049.

Felmy, A. R., D. C. Girvin, and E. A. Jenne. 1984.
MINTEQ: A computer program for calculating aqueous
geochemical equilibria:  EPA/600/3-84-032, U.  S.
Environmental  Protection Agency,  Environmental
Research Laboratory, Athens, GA.

Feenstra, S. and J.  A. Cherry, 1987, Dense organic
solvents in ground water: an  introduction: Jn Dense
Chlorinated Solvents in Ground Water, Progress Report
No. 083985, Institute for Ground Water Research,
University of Waterloo, Ontario.

Fish, W., D. A. Dzombak, and F. M. M. Morel, 1986,
Metal-humate interactions.  2.  application  and
comparison of models: Environmental Science  and
Technology, v. 20, pp. 676-683.

Frind, E. O. and G. E. Hokkanen, 1987, Simulation of
the borden plume using the alternating direction galerkin
technique: Water Resources Research, v. 23, no. 5, pp.
918-930.

Gibson, S. A. and J.  M. Suflita, 1986, Extrapolation of
bfodegradative resultsto groundwateraquifers: reductive
dehalogenation of aromatic compounds: Applied and
Environmental Microbiology, v. 52:681-688.

Gillham, R. W., and  J. A.  Cherry, 1982, Contaminant
migrationinsaturatedunconsolidatedgeologicdeposits:
Jn Recent Trends in Hydrogeology, T. N. Narasimhan,
Editor. Geological Society of America, Paper 189, pp.
31-62, Boulder, CO.

Guven, O., F. J. Molz, and J. G.  Melville, 1984, An
analysis of dispersion in a stratified aquifer: Water
Resources Research, v. 20, pp. 1337-1354.

Hayes, M. H. B. and R. S. Swift, 1978, The chemistry of
soil organic colloids: In The Chemistry of  Soil
Constituents, D. J.  Greenland and M. H.  B. Hays,
Editors. Wiley Interscience, New York, NY.

Helfferich, F., 1962,  Ion exchange: McGraw-Hill, New
York,  NY.
characteristics of natural water: Water Supply Paper
1473, U. S. Geological Survey, Reston, VA.

Homsy.G. M., 1987, Viscous fingering in porous media:
Annual Review of Fluid Mechanics, v. 19, pp. 271-311.

Honeyman, B. D., K. F. Hayes, and J. O. Leckie, 1982,
Aqueous chemistry of As, B, Cr, Se, and V with particular
reference  to fly-Ash transport water: Project Report
EPRI-910-1, Electric Power Research Institute, Palo
Alto, CA.

Huddleston, R. L, C. A. Bleckmann, and J. R. Wolfe,
1986, Land treatment biological degradation processes:
In Land Treatment: A Waste Management Alternative,
R. C. Loehr  and J.  F.  Malina, Jr.,  Editors. Water
Resources Symposium, Center for Research in Water
Resources, The University of Texas at Austin, Austin,
TX,  No. 13, pp. 41 -61.

Huyakorn, P. S., and others, 1984, Testing and validation
of models for simulating  solute  transport  in ground
water: development and testing of  benchmark
techniques.  IGWMC:  Report  No.  GWMI 84-13.
International Ground Water Modeling Center, Holcolm
Research  Institute, Butler University, Indianapolis, IN.

Johnson,  R.  L., C. D. Palmer, and W.  Fish. 1989.
Subsurface chemical processes: In Transport and Fate
of Contaminants in the Subsurface. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Centerfor Environmental Research
Information,  Cincinnati,  OH, and  Robert S. ^err
Environmental Research Laboratory, Ada,  OK,  EPA/
625/4-89/019.

Karickhoff, S. W., 1981, Semi-empirical estimation of
sorption of hydrophobic pollutants on natural sediments
and soils: Chemosphere, v. 10, pp. 833-846.

Karickhoff, S. W., 1984, Organic pollutant sorption on
aquatic systems: Journal of Hydraulic Engineering, v.
10, pp. 833-846.

Karickhoff, S. W., D. S. Brown, and T. A.  Scott, 1979,
sorption of hydrophobic pollutants on natural sediments:
Water Research, v. 13, pp. 241-248.

Kenaga, E. E. and C. A. I. Goring, 1980,  Relationship
between water solubility, soil sorption, octanol-water
partitioning, and concentrations of chemicals in Biota:in
Aquatic Toxicology, Third Conference, J.  G. Eaton, P.
R. Parrish, and A. C. Hendricks, Editors. ASTM Special
Publication 707. American SocietyforTesting Materials,
Philadelphia, PA., pp. 78-115.
Hem,J.D.,1970,Studyandinteipretationofthechemica!   Keely, J. F., 1989a, Introduction: in Transport and Fate
                                               62

-------
of Contaminants inthe Subsurface. U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Centerfor Environmental Research
Information, Cincinnati, OH, and  Robert  S. Kjerr
Environmental Research Laboratory, Ada, OK, EPA/
625/4-89/019.

Keely, J. F., 1989b, Modeling subsurface contaminant
transport and fate: in Transport and Fate of Contaminants
in the  Subsurface.  U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency, Centerfor Environmental Research Information,
Cincinnati, OH, and Robert  S. Kerr Environmental
Research Laboratory, Ada, OK,  EPA/625/4-89/019.
Khan, I. A., 1986a, Inverse problem in ground water:
model development: Ground Water, v. 24, pp. 32-ds.
Khan, I. A., 1986b, Inverse problem in ground water:
model application: Ground Water,  v. 24, pp. 39-48J.

Kimmel, G. E. and O. C. Braids, 1980, Leachate plumes
in groundwater from Babylon and Islip landfills, Long
Island, New York: Professional  Paper 1085, U. S.
Geological Survey, Reston, VA.

Krabbenhoft, D. P. and M. P. Anderson, 1986, Use of a
numerical ground-water flow  model  for hypothesis
testing: Ground Water, v. 24, pp. 49-55.
Kueper, B. H. and E. O. Frind, 1988, An overview
immiscible  fingering in  porous media: Journal
Contaminant Hydrology, v. 2, pp. 95-110.
of
of
Kuznetsov, S.  I., N. V. Ivanov, and N. N. Lyalikova,
1963, The distribution of bacteria in groundwaters and
sedimentary rocks:  in Introduction to Geological
Microbiology,  C. Oppenheimer, Editor. McGraw-Hill
Book Co., New York, NY.

Lindberg, R. D. and D. D. Runnels, 1984, Groundwater
redox reactions: An analysis of equilibrium state applied
to Eh  measurements and  geochemical modeling:
Science v. 225, pp. 925-927.

Mabey, W. R. and  T. Mill,  1978, Critical  review of
hydrolysis  of  organic compounds in water  under
environmental  conditions: Journal of Physical  and
Chemical Reference Data, v. 7, pp. 383-415.

MacFarlane D. S., J. A. Cherry, R. W. GiHham, and E.
A. Sudicky, 1983, Migration of contaminants in
groundwater at a landfill: A case study; 1. groundwater
flow and plume delineation: Journal of Hydrology, v. 63,
pp. 1-29.
MacKay,  D. and  B.  Powers,  1987, Sorption
of
mechanism of  the particle concentration effect:
Chemosphere, v. 16, pp. 745-757.

Martell, A. E. and Smith, R. M., 1974, Critical stability
constants :Amino Acids, v. 1, Plenum Press, New York,
NY.

Martell, A. E. and Smith, R. M., 1977., Critical stability
constants: Other Organic Ligands, v. 3, Plenum Press,
New York, NY.

McCarty,  P. L.,  1985,  Application of  biological
transformations in ground waterin Proceedings, Second
International Conference  on Ground-Water Quality
Research, N. N. Durham and A.  E. Redelfs, Editors.
National Center for Groundwater Research, Stillwater,
OK.

McCarty, P. L., B. E. Rittmann, and E. J. Bouwer, 1984,
Microbiological  processes affecting  chemical
transformations in ground  water: in Groundwater
Pollution Microbiology, G. Bitton and C.  P. Gerba,
Editors. John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY.

McCarty, P. L., M. Reinhard, and B. E. Rittmann, 1981,
Trace organics in ground water: Environmental Science
and Technology, v. 15, pp. 47-51.

McDowell-Boyer, L. M., J. R. Hunt, and N. Sitar, 1986,
Particle transport through porous  media: Water
Resources Research, v. 22, no. 13, pp. 1901-1921.

Mclnerney, M. J. andM. P. Bryant, 1981, Basic principles
of byconversion  in anaerobic  digestion and
methanogenesis: in Biomass Conversion Processes
for Energy and Fuels, S. S. Sofer and O. R. Zaborsky,
Editors.  Plenum Publishing  Corporation, New York,
NY, pp. 277-296.

McNabb, J. F. and G. E. Mallard, 1984, Microbiological
sampling in the assessment of groundwater pollution: in
Groundwater Pollution Microbiology, G. Bitton and C. P.
Gerba, Editors, John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, pp.
235-260.

Mercado, A., 1967, The spreading pattern of injected
water in a permeability stratified aquifer: in Proceedings
of the  Symposium on  Artificial  Recharge and
Management of Aquifers, Haifa, Israel, May 19-26.
Publication No. 72, International Association of Scientific
Hydrology, Gentbruuge, Belgium, pp. 23-36.

Mercer,  J. W. and C. R. Faust, 1981, Ground-water
modeling: National Water Well Association, Worthington,
OH.
hydrophobicchemicalsfromwater:Ahypothesisforthe
                                               63

-------
Morel, F. M. M., 1983, Principles of aquatic chemistry:
Wiley Interscience, New York, NY.

Morgan, J. J., 1967, Application and  limitations of
chemical  thermodynamics in water  systems: in
Equilibrium Concepts in Natural Water  Systems,
Advances in  Chemistry Series No. 67,  American
Chemical Society, Washington, DC.

Moses, C. O. and J. S. Herman, 1986, Computer notes-
WATIN-A computer program for generating input files
forWATEQF: Ground Water, v. 24, pp. 83-89.

Murarka, I. P. and D. A. Mclntosh, 1987, Solid-waste
environmental studies (SWES): description, status, and
available results: EPRI  EA-5322-SR, Electric Power
Research Institute, Palo Alto, CA.

Neuzil, C. E., 1986, Groundwaterf low in low-permeability
environments: Water Resources Research, v. 22, pp.
1163-1195.

Nkedi-Kizza, P., P. S. C. Rao, and A. G. Hornsby, 1985,
Influence of organic cosolvents  on sorption of
hydrophobia organic chemicals by soils: Environmental
Science and Technology, v. 19 , pp. 975-979.

Palmer, C.  D.,  1990,  Hydrogeochemistry of the
subsurface: in Chemistry of Ground Water, C. Palmer,
Editor, Lewis Publishers, Boca Raton, FL (In Review).

Palmer, C. D., and  R. L. Johnson,  1989a, Physical
processes controlling the transport of contaminants in
the aqueous phase: in Transport and Fate of
Contaminants in the Subsurface, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Centerfor Environmental Research
Information,  Cincinnati, OH,  and  Robert S.  Kerr
Environmental Research Laboratory, Ada, OK,  EPA/
625/4-89/019.

Palmer, C. D., and  R. L. Johnson,  1989b, Physical
processes controlling the transport  of  non-aqueous
phase liquids in the subsurface: in Transport and Fate
of Contaminants in the Subsurface, U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency, Centerfor Environmental Research
Information,  Cincinnati, OH,  and  Robert S.  Kerr
Environmental Research Laboratory, Ada, OK,  EPA/
625/4-89/019.

Paul, E. A. and F. E. Clark, 1989, Soil  microbiology and
biochemistry: Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, CA.

Perdue, E. M., 1985, Acidic functional groups of humic
substances: in Humic Substances in Soil,  Sediment,
and Water, G. R. Aiken, D. M. McKnight, R. L. Wershaw,
and P. MacCarthy, Editors, Wiley Interscience, New
York, NY.
Perdue, E.  M. and C. R.  Lytle, 1983, A distribution
model for binding of protons and metal ions by humic
substances: Environmental Science and Technology,
v. 17, pp. 654-660.

Puri, S., 1984, Aquifer studies using flow simulation:
Ground Water, v. 22, pp. 538-543.

Reichenburg, D., 1966, Ion exchange selectivity: in Ion
Exchange, Vol. 1, J. A. Marinsky, Editor, Marcel Dekker,
New York, NY.

Reuter, J. G., J. J. McCarthy, and E. J. Carpenter, 1979,
Thetoxic effect of copperonoccillatoria(Trichodesmium)
theibautii: Limnology and Oceanography, v. 24, no. 3,
pp. 558-561.

Saffman, P. G. and G. Taylor, 1958, The penetration of
a fluid into a porous medium or hele-shaw cell containing
a more viscous liquid: Proceeding of the Royal Society
of London Series A, v. 245, pp. 312-329.

Scheigg, H.  O., 1984, Considerations on water, oil, and
air in porous media: Water Science Technology, v. 17,
pp. 467-476.

Schindler, P. W., B. Furst, R. Dick, and P. U. Wolf, 1976,
Ligand properties of surface silanol groups.  I. Surface
complex formation with Fe3+, Cu2+, Cd2+, and Pb2+:
Journal of Colloid and Interface Science, v.  55, no. 2,
pp. 469-475.

Schnitzer, M., 1969,  Reactions between fulvic acid, a
soil humic compound, and inorganic soil constituents:
Soil Science of America Proceedings, v. 33, pp. 75-81.

Schwarzenbach, R. and J. Westall, 1981, Transport of
nonpolar organic compounds from surface water to
ground water: laboratory sorption studies: Environmental
Science and Technology, v. 15, pp. 1360-1367.

Schwille, F., 1988, Dense chlorinated solvents in porous
and fractured media: model experiments: J. F. Pankow,
Translator. Lewis Publishers, Chelsea, Ml.

Shelton, M. L., 1982, Ground-water management in
basalts: Ground Water, v. 20, pp. 86-93.

Sholkovitz, E.  R., 1985, Redox-related geochemistry in
lakes: alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, and cesium-
137: in Chemical Processes in Lakes, W. Stumm, Editor,
Wiley-lnterscience, New York, NY.

Siegrist, H.  and P.  L.  McCarty, 1987, Column
methodologies for  determining  sorption  and
biotransformation potential for chlorinated aliphatic
                                               64

-------
compounds in  aquifers: Journal of  Contaminant
Hydrology, v. 2, pp. 31-50.

Sims, J. L, R. C. Sims, and J. E. Matthews, 1990,
Approach  to  bioremediation of  contaminated soil:
Hazardous Waste & Hazardous Materials, v. 7, pp. 1 •
149.
Sims, R. C., D. L Sorensen, J. L. Sims, J. E. McLean,
R. Mahmood, and R. R. Dupont, 1984, Review of In-
Place Treatment Techniques for Contaminated Surf a ce
Soils, Volume 2: Background Information for In Situ
Treatment,  U. S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Hazardous Waste Engineering Research Laboratory,
Cincinnati, OH, EPA/540/2-84-003a.
   7-
Smith, R. M. and A. E. Martell, 1975, Critical stabi
constants, vol. 2: Amines, Plenum Press, New
NY.
York
Sposito, G., 1984, The surface chemistry of so
Oxford University Press, New York, NY.
   ity
   Is:
Sposito, G., 1986, Sorption of trace metals by huriic
materials in  soils and natural waters: CRC Critical
Reviews in Environmental Control, v. 16, pp. 193-229.
Stevenson, F. J.,  1982, Humus chemistry: genesis,
compositions, reactions: Wiley Interscience, New York,
NY.

Strecker,  E. W.  and W.  Chu,  1986,  Parameter
identification of a ground-water contaminant transport
model: Ground Water, v. 24, pp. 56-62.

Stumm, W. and J. J. Morgan, 1981, Aquatic chemistry,
second edition: Wiley Interscience, New York, NY.

Stumm, W., H. Hohl, and F. Dalang, 1976, Interactior of
metal ions with  hydrous oxide  surfaces: Croatica
Chemica Acta, v. 48, no. 4, pp.  491 -504.

Suflita, J. M., 1989a, Microbial ecology and pollutant
biodegradation in subsurface ecosystems: in Transport
and  Fate  of Contaminants in  the Subsurface, UiS.
Environmental  Protection  Agency, Center f|or
Environmental Research Information, Cincinnati, OH,
and Roberts. Kerr Environmental Research Laboratory,
Ada, OK,  EPA/625/4-89/019.

Suflita, J. M.,  1989b, Microbiological  principles
influencing the biorestoration of aquifers: in Transport
and  Fate  of Contaminants in  the Subsurface, US.
Environmental  Protection  Agency, Center for
Environmental Research Information, Cincinnati, CH,
and Robert S. Kerr Environmental Research Laboratory,
Ada, OK, EPA/625/4-89/019.

Tanford, C., 1973, The hydrophobic effect: formation of
micelles and biological membranes: Wiley and Sons,
New York, NY.

Thurman, E. M., 1985, Humic substances in the ground
water: in Humic Substances in Soil, Sediment, and
Water: Geochemistry, Isolation, and Characterization,
G. R. Aiken, D. M. McKnight, R. L. Wershaw, and P.
MacCarthy, Editors, Wiley Interscience, New York, NY.

Updegraff, D. M., 1982, Plugging and penetration of
petroleum  reservoir rock by microorganisms:
Proceedings of 1982  International Conference on
Microbial Enhancement of Oil Recovery, May 16-21,
Shangri-La, Afton, OK.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1985, Protection
of  public  water  supplies  from ground-water
contamination: U. S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Center for Environmental Research  Information,
Cincinnati, OH.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1989, Transport
and fate of contaminants in the subsurface: EPA/625/4-
89/01 9, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Center
for  Environmental  Research Information, Cincinnati,
OH, and Robert S. Kerr Environmental  Research
Laboratory,  Ada, OK.

van  der Heidje, P. K. M., 1984a,  Availability and
applicability of numerical  models for ground water
resources management: IGWMC Report No. GWMI
84-19,  International Ground Water Modeling Center,
Holcolm Research  Institute, Butler University,
Indianapolis, IN.

van der Heidje, P. K. M., 1984b, Utilization of models as
analytic tools for groundwater management: IGWMC
Report No. GWMI 84-18,  International Ground Water
Modeling Center, Holcolm Research Institute, Butler
University, Indianapolis, IN.

vanderHeidje, P. K. M. and others, 1985, Groundwater
management: the use  of numerical models, second
edition: AGU Water Resources  Monograph  No. 5,
American Geophysical Union, Washington, DC.

van der Heidje, P. K.  M. and P. Srinivasan, 1983,
Aspects of the use of graphic techniques  in ground-
water modeling. IGWMC  Report No. GWMI  83-11,
International Ground Water Modeling Center, Holcolm
Research Institute, Butler University, Indianapolis, IN.
                                               65

-------
Waksman, S. A., 1916, Bacterial numbers in soil, at
different depths, and in different seasons of the year:
Soil Science, v. 1, pp. 363-380.

Weaver, J., C. G. Enfield, S. Yates, D. Kreamer, and D.
White, 1989,  Predicting  subsurface contaminant
transport and transformation: considerations for model
selection and  field validation: U.  S.  Environmental
Protection Agency, Robert S. Kerr  Environmental
Research Laboratory, Ada, OK, EPA/600/2-89/045.

Westall, J. C., J. L. Zachary, and F. M. M. Morel, 1976,
MINEQL: a computer program for the calculation of
chemical equilibrium composition of aqueous systems:
Technical  Note No.  18, Massachusetts  Institute of
Technology, Boston, MA.

Williams, P. A., 1985, Secondary minerals: natural ion
buffers: in Environmental  Inorganic Chemistry, K. J.
Irgolic  and A. E.  Martell,  Editors, VCH  Publishers,
Deerfield Beach, FL.

Zachara, J. M., and others, 1988, Influence of cosolvents
on quinoline sorption by subsurface materials and clays:
Journal of Contaminant Hydrology, v. 2, pp. 343-364.
                                                66

-------
                                            Chapter 4
                                    GROUND-WATER TRACERS
Inhydrogeology, "tracer" is a distinguishable matter or
energy in ground waterthat carries information on the
ground-water system. A tracer can be entirely natural,
such  as the heat  carried by hot-spring waterjs;
accidentally introduced, such as fuel oil from a ruptured
storage tank; or intentionally introduced, such as dyes
placed in water flowing within limestone caves.

Types and Uses of Tracer Tests

The variety of tracer tests is almost infinite, considering
the various combinations of tracertypes, local hydrolog ic
conditions, injection methods, sampling methods, and
geological settings. Tracer tests mainly are used  (1)
to measure one or more hydrogeologic parameters of
an aquifer; and (2) to identify sources, velocity, and
direction of movement of contaminants. Tracer tests
also can be broadly classified acco rding to whether they
rely on natural gradient flow or an  induced flow fro|m
pumping or some other means. Quinlan and others
(1988) discuss how to  recognize falsely negative or
positive tracer results.

Measurement of Hydrogeologic Parameters
Tracers can  be used to measure or estimate  a wide
variety of hydrogeologic parameters, most commorjly
direction and velocity of flow and dispersion. Depending
on the type of test and the hydrogeologic conditions,
other parameters  such as hydraulic conductivity,
porosity, chemical distribution coefficients, source of
recharge, and age of ground water can be measured.

Figure 4-1 shows six examples of tracer measurement
of hydrogeologic characteristics by natural gradient
flow. Figure 4-1 a shows flow velocity in a cave system
and Figure 4-1 b shows subsurface flow patterns in a
karst area with sinking and rising streams.  Figure 4-1 c
shows the velocity of movement of dissolved material
between two wells.  Both velocity and direction of flew
can be measured in a single well as shown in Figure 4-
1d and by using multiple downgradient sampling wells
as shown  in  Figure 4-1 e.  Finally, hydrodynamic
dispersion can be measured by multiwell, multilevel
sampling down gradient (Figure 4-1f).

Figure 4-2 shows four examples of tracer measurement
of hydrogeologic parameters using  induced flow.  A
tracer in surface water combined with pumping from a
nearby well can verify a connection, as shown in Figure
4-2a.  Interconnections between fractures  can be
mapped using tracers and inflatable packers in two
uncased wells, as shown in Figure 4-2b. Figure 4-2c
shows the measurement of a number of aquifer
parameters using a pair of wells with  forced circulation
between wells.  Figure 4-2d shows  the evaluation of
geochemical interactions between multiple tracers and
aquifer material by alternating injection and pumping.

Tracers also can be used to determine ground-water
recharge using environmental isotopes (Ferronsky and
Polyakov, 1982; Moser and Rauert,  1985; Vogel and
others, 1974),  and to date ground water (Davis and
Bentley, 1982).

Delineation of Contaminant Plumes
Any contaminant that moves in ground water acts as a
tracer; thus the contaminant itself may be mapped, or
other tracers may be added to  map the velocity and
direction  of the flow.  Contaminant plumes  are  not
tracers in the sense used in this chapter and are not
discussed further here.  However, Figure 4-3 shows
three examples of noncontaminant tracers used to
identify contaminant sources and flow patterns. Figure
4-3a shows the use of a tracer in a sinkhole to determine
if trash at a particular location is contributing to
contamination of a spring. Similarly, Figure 4-3b shows
that  by flushing a dye tracer down a toilet one can
determine whether septic seepage is causing
contamination of a well or surface water. Figure 4-3c
shows the use of multiple tracers at multiple sources of
potential contamination to pinpoint the actual source.
                                                67

-------
                                         Sampling Point
                                                 Cave
                                                 Stream
 a.  To measure vetocity of wsw m cav« stream.
                                                                            Watar Tabla
                                                                                              Sampling Point
Ililir
iiiiu
ll'llll
mil
HIM
mu
mi
                                  Sampling Point

                                       t
 b.  To cluck Kurc* of watar at rise in stream bid.
                          Sampling Point
            I               I

TTTfl 1 1
•»




1 i 1 I 1 i 1 I i 1
• »"t *
• "; "; ' "
fc-J



/ i i i 1 1 ii r

   C. To t*« valodty of movemant of dlttoivtd material und«f
      natural ground-wattr gradient!.
                                                                 d.  To dttarmina velocity and direction of ground-water flow und«r
                                                                     natural conditions. Injection followad by sampling from same wed
                                                                                Sampling Point*
                                                               e . To daurrnin* the direction and vetocrry of natural ground-water
                                                                  flow by drilling «n array of sampling wells around a tracor infection
                                                                  wtll.
                                                                                        Multi-Lave! Sampling

                                                                                      t         t        t
                                                                     f.  To test hydrodynamic di»p«rsion in aquifer under natural
                                                                        ground-water gradients.
Figure 4-1. Common Configurations for Use of Tracer to Measure Hydrogeologic Parameters Using
Natural Gradient Flow (from Davis and others, 1985)
                                                             68

-------
             L_l

    r7^.   1
Sampling Point
at Pumping WeH
                                                                   Sample Point
                                                                Pumped
                                                                 WeH
Injection
 Wall
    a •  To verify connection between surface water and waH.
                                       Sampling
                                       Point
  b. To determine the interconnect fracture* between two uncased
     holee. Packers are inflated with air and can be positioned as
     deeired in the holes.
                     °' T2^T * numbef of *5uif»f pwameters using
                        wfth forced circulation between waka. ™">
                 d. To teat precipitation of selected constituents on the aquifer material
                    by injecting multiple tracers into aquifer then pumping back the
                    injected water.
 Figure 4-2. Common Configurations for Use of Tracers to Measure Hydrogeologic Parameters Using
 Induced Flow (from Davis and others, 1985)
Tracer Selection

Overview of Types of Tracers
Ground-watertracerscan be broadly classified as natujral
(environmental) tracers and injected tracers. Table 4-
1 lists 14 natural tracers and 30 injected tracers. Table
4-2 lists review papers, reports, and bibliographies that
are good sources for general information on ground-
water tracing.

The potential chemical and  physical behavior of the
tracer in ground water is the most important selection
criterion. Conservative tracers, used for most purposes,
travel with the same velocity and direction as the water
and do not interact with solid material. Nonconservatiye
               tracers, which tend to be slowed by interactions with the
               solid matrix, are used to measure distribution coefficients
               and  preferential flow zones in the vadose zone.  For
               most uses, a tracer should be nontoxic, inexpensive,
               and easily detected to a low concentration with widely
               available and simple technology.  If the tracer occurs
               naturally  in ground water,  it  should be present in
               concentrations well above background concentrations.
               Finally, the tracer itself should not modify the hydraulic
               conductivity or other properties of  the medium being
               studied.

               No one ideal tracer has been found.  Because natural
               systems are so complex and the requirements for the
               tracers themselves are so numerous, the selection and
                                                    69

-------
                                                                            Fractured Rock
                                                                      '.v.V.v  Tracer
                               3..  To determine if trash in sinkhole contributes to
                                   contamination of spring.
                                              ?    t  t          "~^
                                                *"• "-^^^CZab/,,    ^>>>
Well
                             b .  To determine if tile drain from septic tank contributes to
                                 contamination of well.
                                      Three Different Tracers

                                 H Waste Water X         I
                                 |  Lagoon      1131 Toilet    | Landfill
                                 .^, v,,/>'" • • •'j'"- VV '"•!P>O^- Q ica^x
                                                                         ^Sampling Point

                                                                        ^
                            . To determine source of pollution from three possibilities.
Figure 4-3. Common Configurations for Use of Tracers to Identify Contaminant Sources Using Natural
Gradient Flow (from Davis and others, 1985)

-------
NATURAL TRACERS
Sllbl* l*otop*»

Deuterium ^
Oxygen--18 18O
Carbon-13 13C
Nitrogen-15 tstt
S»onlium-S8 ^Sr
Radloeetlv*

Tritium r^
SooTum-24 *•»*»
Chromium-51 S10r
Cobaft-58 ^®0o
Cobatt-«0 abo
INJECTED TRACERS
AetlvtUbl*
Inactive
k>nll*d SubsUnc**
Bromino 36B/
Indknn 49ln
Mangarma 2sMi
Lanthoium ^U
Dytpnoium e6Dy
Sain:
Ha* Ci
IJ+CT
NsT
K*BT
Drift Ualerlal
Lycopodium Spores
Bacteria
Virueee
Fungi
Sawdust
Radloactlv* Isotope*
TriBum-3       ^    CSotd-198
Carbon-14      14C    lodhe-131
            32S
            36a
            37^
                    Silicon-32
                    Chlorine-36
                    Argon-37
                    Argon-39
                    Krypton-81
                    Orypton-85
                                       Pho&phoruc-32
            39A

            «1|sion by Quinlan (1986) and reply by Davis (1986)

                              Focuses on fluorescent dyes and lycopodium spores, but also
                              contains annotated bibliography on other tracers.
                             Compilation of papers on modern trends in tracer hydrology.

                             Report evaluating ground-water tracers for nuclear fuel waste
                             management studies.
                             Early
   review paper on use of radioactive and chemical tracers in
                             porous media.

                             Review paper on use of microorganisms as ground-water tracers.

                             Review paper on use of tracers for ground-water investigations.

                             Review paper on use of dyes as soil water tracers.
view
                             Focuses on aquifer tracer tests in porous media and use in
                             contaminant transport modeling.

                             Classic paper on the use of fluorescent dyes for water tracers.

                             Bibliography on borehole geophysics as applied to ground-water
                             hydrojogy containing 42 references on tracers.
                             A series of annotated bibliographies concerning solute
                             movement in aquifers and use of dyes as tracers.
                             Smart et al. (1988) review 57 papers that compare dyes with other
                             tracers. See also Edwards and Smart (1988a, b).

                             The section in this bibliography on tracers and ground-water
                             dating contains 69 references.
Table 4-2. Sources of Information on General
                                   Ground-Water Tracing
                                                            71

-------
use of tracers is almost as much an art as a science.
The following sections discuss factors that should be
considered when selecting a tracer.

Hydrogeologic Considerations
The initial step in determining the physical feasibility of
a tracer test is to collect as  much hydrogeologic
information about the field area as possible. The logs
of the wells at the site to be tested, or logs of the wells
closest to the proposed site, will give some idea of the
homogeneity of the  aquifer, layers  present, fracture
patterns, porosity, and boundaries of the flow system.
Local or regional piezometric maps, or any published
reports on the hydrology of the area (including results of
aquif ertests), are valuable, as they may give an indication
of the hydraulic gradient and hydraulic conductivity.

 Major hydrogeologic factors that should be considered
when selecting  a tracer include:

    Lithology. Fine-grained materials, particularly clays,
    have highersorptive capacities than coarse-grained
    material. The sorptive capacity must be considered
    when evaluating the potential mobility of a tracer.

    Flow Regime.  Whether  flow is predominantly
    through porous  media (alluvium, sandstone, soil),
    solution features (karst limestone), or fractures will
    influence the choice of  tracer.  For example,
    fluorescent  dyes work well in karst settings, but
    because of  sorption effects are less effective than
    ground-water tracers  in porous media.

    Direction of Flow. For tracer studies using two or
    more wells, the general direction of ground-water
    movement must be known.

    Travel Time. The  equation for estimating travel
    time was discussed previously. In two-well tracer
    tests, travel time must be known  to estimate
    spacing for  wells.

    Dispersion.  Tracertests often are used to measure
    dispersion.   In  two-well tests, some preliminary
    estimates may be required to estimate the quantity
    of tracerto inject so that concentrations will be high
    enough to detect.

Tracer Characteristics
Tracers have a  wide range of physical, chemical, and
biological characteristics. These properties, as they
relate to hydrogeologic and otherfactors will determine
the most suitable tracer for the purposes desired.

    Detectability. Injected tracers should have  no, or
    very low,  natural  background  levels.  Lower
    detection limit is for instruments (ppm, ppb, ppt),
    are better. The degree of dilution is a function of
    type of injection, distance, dispersion, porosity, and
    hydraulic conductivity.  Too much dilution may
    result in failure to observe the tracerwhen it reaches
    a sampling point because concentrations are below
    the detection limit.  Possible  interferences from
    othertracers and natural waterchemistry may have
    the same effect.

    Mobility. Conservative tracers used  to measure
    aquifer parameters such as flow direction  and
    velocity should be (1) stable (i.e., not  subject to
    transformation by biodegradation or nonbiological
    processes during the length of the test and analysis);
    (2) soluble in water; (3) of a similar  density and
    viscosity; and  (4) not subject to adsorption  or
    precipitation.  Nonconservative, nontoxic tracers
    used to simulate transport of contaminants should
    have adsorptive  and  other chemical  properties
    similar to the contaminant of concern.

    Toxicity. Nontoxic tracers should be  used if at all
    possible.  If a tracer may be toxic  at certain
    concentrations,  maximum  permissible levels  as
    determined  by  federal, state, or county agencies
    must be considered in relation to expected dilution
    and proximity to drinking water sources.  Most
    agencies have set no limits, partly because the
    commonly   used  tracers  are nontoxic  in
    concentrations usually  employed, and partly
    because they never considered tracers to be a
    problem demanding regulation.

Other Considerations
A tracer may be suitable forthe test's purpose and the
hydrogeologic setting, yet still not be suitable for reasons
of economics, technological availability or sophistication,
or public  health.

    Economics.  The tracer or the instrumentation to
    analyze samples may be expensive. In this situation,
    another less-expensive tracer with somewhat less
    favorable characteristics may suffice.

    Technology.    Some  tracers may be  difficult to
    obtain, or may require more complicated sampling
    methods. Gases, for example, will escape easily
    from  poorly sealed  containers.   Similarly,
    instrumentation for gas or isotope analyses may not
    be available; e.g.,  only one or two laboratories in
    the world can perform analyses of 36CI.

    Public Health.  Tracer injections  must involve a
    careful consideration of possible health implications.
    Some local or state health agencies insist on review
                                                  72

-------
   authority priorto use of artificially introduced tracers,
   but most do not. Local citizens must be informed of
   the tracer injections, and usually the results sho]uld
   be  made available to the public. Under solme
   circumstances, analytical work for  tracer stuojies
   must be  performed  in  appropriately certifed
   laboratories. These are job-specific decisions.
Tracing in Karst vs. Porous Media
Ground-water flow in karstterranes is characterizec
                                              by
                                              er
                                              ge
                                              ed
                                              In
                                              is
conduit flow and diffuse flow through often comp ex
subsurface  channel systems.   Ground-wa
contaminants tend to move rapidly in karst and resu
at the surface in locations that cannot be readily predic
from the morphology of surface drainage patterns.
contrast,  ground-water  flow  in porous  media
characterized by slow travel times and more generally
predictable flow directions. These differences require
substantially different approaches to conducting tracer
tests, as discussed in karst and porous media sections
in this document.

Types of Tracers

Considering the full range  of  organic ground-water
contaminants, hundreds,  and possibly thousands, of
substances have been used as tracers in ground wal er.
The most commonly used tracers can be grouped i ito
six categories: (1) water temperature, (2) particulars
(called drift material in Table 4-1), (3) ions, (4) dyes, (5)
gases, and (6) isotopes.  These categories are not
mutually exclusive (i.e., isotopes may take the form of
ions or gases). Selected tracers in each category in
relation to applicability in different hydrologic settings,
field methods, and type of detection used, are discussjed
in the following sections .

Water Temperature
The temperature of water changes slowly as it migrates
through the subsurface,  because water has a high
specific heat capacity compared  to most natural
materials.   For example,  temperature anomalies
associated with the spreading of warm wastewatei in
the Hanford Reservation in south central Washington
have been detected more than 8 km (5 mi) from t,he
source.

Water-temperature tracing is potentially useful, althoujgh
it has not been used frequently. The method may be
applicable  in granular media, fractured rock, or karst
regions. Keys and Brown (1978) traced thermal pulses
from the artificial recharge of playa lake water into the
Ogallala formation in Texas. They described the use of
temperature logs (temperature measurements at
intervals incased holes) to detect hydraulic conductivity
differences in an aquifer. Temperature logs also have
been used to determine vertical movement of water in
a borehole (Keys and MacCary, 1971; Sorey, 1971).

Changes in  water temperature are accompanied by
changes in water density and viscosity, which in turn
alter the velocity and direction of flow. For example,
injected ground water with a temperature of 40°C will
travel more than twice as fast in the same aquifer under
the same hydraulic gradient as water at 5°C. Because
the warm water has a slightly lower density than cold
water, buoyant forces give rise to flow that "floats" on top
of the cold water. To minimize temperature-induced-
convection  problems,  accurately  measured small
temperature differences should be used if hot or cold
water is in the introduced tracer.

Davis and others (1985) used temperature as a tracer
for small-scale field tests, in shallow drive-point wells 2
feet apart in  an alluvial aquifer. The transit time of the
peaktemperature was about 107 min, while the resistivity
data indicated a travel time of about 120 min (Figure 4-
4). The injected water had a temperature of 38°C, while
the ground-water temperature  was 20°C; the  peak
temperature obtained in the observation well was 27°C.
 In these tests, temperature indicated breakthrough of
                                                                  Initial Tamperaiur* of Infected Fluid » 47.1°C
                                                            0  10
                                                                   30    50    TO   90   110   130

                                                                      Time After Injection (Mlnut**)
                                                   Figure 4-4. Results of Field Test Using a Hot
                                                   Water Tracer (from Davis and others, 1985)
                                                 73

-------
the chemical tracers, aiding in the timing of sampling. It
also was useful as a simple, inexpensive tracer for
determining the correct placement of sampling wells.

Water-temperature tracing also can be used to detect
river recharge in an aquifer.  Most rivers have  large
seasonal water temperature fluctuations.  If the river is
recharging an aquifer, the seasonal fluctuations can be
detected in the ground water  relative to the  river
(Rorabaugh, 1956).

Participates
Solid material in suspension, such as spores, can be a
useful tracer in areas where waterf lows in large conduits
such as in some basalt, limestone, ordolomite aquifers.
Seismic methods at the surface have been used to
detect the location of time-delayed explosives floating
through a cave system  (Arandjelovic, 1969).  Small
paniculate tracers, such as bacteria, can travel through
any porous media such as soils and fractured bedrock
where the  pore size is  larger than the size of the
microorganism. Microorganisms are probably the most
commonly used particulate tracers. Table 4-3 compares
characteristics of microbial tracers.

Yeast. Wood and Ehrlich (1978) reported the use of
               baker's yeast (Saccharomyces cerevisiae) as aground-
               water tracer in a sand and gravel aquifer. Yeast is a
               single-celled fungusthat is ovoid in shape. The diameter
               of a yeast cell is 2 to 3 u.m, which closely approximates
               the size of pathogenic bacterial cells.  This tracer
               probably provides most information about the potential
               movement of bacteria.

               Wood and Ehrlich (1978) found that the yeast penetrated
               more than 7 m into a sand and gravel aquifer in less than
               48 hours after injection. This tracer is very inexpensive,
               as is analysis.   Another advantage  is the lack of
               environmental concerns.

               Bacteria.  Bacteria  are  the  most  commonly used
               microbial tracers, because they grow well and are easily
               detected. Keswick and others (1982) reviewed over 20
               case studies of bacteria tracers. Some bacteria that
               have been used successfully are Escherichia coliform
               (E.  coin.  Streptococcus   faecalis,   Bacillus
               stearothermophilus, Serratia marcescens, and Serratia
               indica. These bacteria range in size from 1 to 10 um
               and have been used in a variety of applications.

               A fecal coliform, E. coli. has been used to indicate fecal
               pollution at pit latrines, septicfields, and sewage disposal
     Tracer
Size
(urn)
Time
Required for
Assay (days)
Essential
Equipment
Required
      Bacteria

      Spores


      Yeast

      Viruses:
         Animal (enteric)



      Bacterial
  1-10

  25-33


  2-3


  0.2-0.8



  0.2-1.0
     1-2

     1/2


     1-2


     3-5



     1/2-1
 Incubator*

 Microscope
 Plankton nets

 Incubator*
 Incubator
 Tissue Culture
 Laboratory

 Incubator*
     *Many may be assayed at room temperature

     Source: Keswick and others (1982)



Table 4-3. Comparison of Microbial Tracers
                                                 74

-------
sites. A "marker" such as antibiotic resistance or
production is  used to distinguish the tracer
background organisms.
rom
The greatest health concern in using these tracers is
that the bacteria must be nonpathogenic to humans.
Even E.coli has strains that can be pathogenic. DJavis
and others (1970) and Wilkowske and others (1970)
have reported that Serratia  marcescens may be I life-
threatening to patients who are hospitalized with qther
illnesses.  Antibiotic-resistant strains are  anojther
concern, as the antibiotic resistance can be transferred
to potential human pathogens. This problem can be
avoided  by using bacteria  that cannot transfer this
genetic information. As is true with most other injected
tracers, permission to use bacterial tracers should be
obtainedfromtheproperfederal, state, and local he|alth
authorities.

Viruses. Animal, plant, and bacterial viruses also \ ave
been  used as  ground-water tracers.  Viruses are
generally much smaller than bacteria, ranging frorr 0.2
to 1.0 urn (see Table 4-1).  In general, human en eric
viruses cannot be used because of disease potential.
Certain vaccine strains, however, such as a type of polio
virus, have been used but are  considered risky. l\j/lost
animal enteric viruses are considered safer as they are
not known to infect humans (Keswick and others, 1982).
Neither human nor most animal viruses, however, are
generally considered suitable tracers  for field work
because of their potential to infect humans.

Spores. Lycopodium spores have been widely use d as
tracers in karst hydrogeologic systems in Europe s nee
the early 1950s, and less frequently used in the Ur ited
States since the 1970s. Much of the literature on
use of spores, however, is in obscure European
 the
and
American  speleological  journals.   More  readily
accessible  references on the use of spores include
Atkinson and others (1973), Gardner and Gray (1976),
and Smart and Smith (1976).

Lycopodium is  a clubmoss  that has  spores  nearly
spherical in shape, with a mean diameter of 33 urn. It
is composed of cellulose and is slightly denser than
water, so that some turbulence is required to keep the
material  in suspension.  Some advantages of using
lycopodium spores as a tracer are:

      * The spores are relatively small.
      *  They are not affected by water chemistry
        adsorbed by clay or silt.
or
      *  They travel at approximately the same velocity
        as the surrounding water.
     * The injection concentration can be very high
       (e.g., 8 x 106 spores per cm3).

     * They pose no health threat.

     * The spores are easily detectable under the
       microscope.

     * At least five dye colors may be used, allowing
       five tracings to be conducted simultaneously in
       a karst system.

Some disadvantages  associated  with   lycopodium
spores include the large amount of time  required for
their preparation  and  analysis, and the filtration of
spores by  sand  or  gravel if flow is not sufficiently
turbulent.

The basic procedure involves adding a few kilograms of
clyedsporesto acaveorsinking stream. The movement
of the tracer is monitored by sampling downstream  in
the cave or with plankton nets installed in the stream
bed at a spring.   The sediment caught in the net  is
concentrated and treated to remove organic matter.
The spores are then examined under the microscope.

Tracing by  lycopodium spores is most useful in open
joints or solution channels (karst terrane) where there is
minimal suspended sediment. It is not useful in wells or
boreholes unless the water is pumped continuously to
the surface and filtered. The spores survive well  in
polluted water, but do not perform well in slow flow or in
water with a high sediment concentration.  A velocity of
a few miles per hour has been found sufficient to keep
the spores in suspension. According  to Smart and
Smith (1976), lycopodium is preferable to dyes for use
in large-scale water resource reconnaissance studies
in karst areas. Skilled personnel should be available to
sample and analyze the spores and a relatively small
number of sampling sites should be used.

Ions
Inorganic ionic compounds such as common salts have
been used  extensively as ground-water tracers. This
category of tracers  includes those compounds  that
unde rgo ionization in water, resulting in theirseparation
into charged  species  possessing  a positive charge
(cations) or a negative charge (anions). The charge on
an  ion affects  its movement through  aquifers by
numerous mechanisms.

Ionic tracers have been used as tools to determine flow
paths and  residence times and   measure  aquifer
properties.  Slichter(1902,1905) was probably the first
to use ionic tracers to study ground water in the United
States.  Specific characteristics of individual ions or
                                                75

-------
ionic groups may approach those of an ideal tracer,
particularly dilute concentrations of certain anions.

In most situations, anions (negatively charged ions) are
not affected by the aquifer medium. Mattson (1929),
however, showed that the capacity of clay minerals for
holding anions increases with decreasing pH.  Under
conditions of low pH, anions in the presence of clay,
other minerals, or organic detritus may undergo anion
exchange. Otherpossible effects include anion exclusion
and precipitation/dissolution reactions.   Cations
(positively charged ions) react much more frequently
with clay minerals through the process of cation
exchange, which displaces othercations such as sodium
and calcium into solution. Because of their interaction
with the aquifer media, little work has been done with
cations. Natural variations in Ca and Mg concentrations,
however, have been used to separate baseflow and
stormflowcomponents in a karst aquifer (Dreiss,1989).

One advantage of simple ionictracers isthattheydo not
decompose and, therefore, are notlostfromthe system.
However, a large number of ions (including Cl- and
NOs")  have high natural background concentrations;
thus requiring  the injection of a highly concentrated
tracer.  More importantly, several hundred pounds of
chloride or nitrate may have an adverse effect on water
quality and biota, thus becoming a pollutant. This also
may result in density separation and gravity segregation
during  the tracer test (Grisak and Pickens, 1980b).
Density differences will alterf low patterns, the degree of
ion exchange, and secondary chemical precipitation, all
of which may change the aquifer  permeability.
Comparisons of tracer mobilities under laboratory and
field conditions by Everts and  others (1989) found
bromide  (BR-) to be only slightly  less mobile than
nitrate. The generally low background concentrations
of bromide often make  it the ion of choice when a
conservative tracer is desired.

Variousapplicationsof ionictracers have been described
in the literature. Murray and others (1981) used lithium
bromide (LiBr) in carbonate terrane to establish hydraulic
connection between a landfill and a freshwater spring,
where  use of Rhodamine  WT dye tracer proved
inappropriate.  Mather and others (1969) used sodium
chloride (NaCI) to investigate the influence of mining
subsidence on the  pattern  of ground-water flow.
Tennyson and Settergren (1980) used bromide (Br-) to
evaluate pathways and transit time of recharge through
soil at a proposed  sewage effluent irrigation  site.
Schmotzer and  others  (1973)  used post-sampling
neutron activation to detect a Br- tracer. Chloride (Cl-
) and calcium (Ca+) were used by Grisak and Pickens
(1980b)  to study  solute transport mechanisms in
fractures.  Potassium (K+)  was used to determine
leachate migration and the extent of dilution by receiving
waters located by a waste disposal site (Ellis, 1980).

Non-ionic organic compounds that are not dyes (see
below) have received little attention as injected tracers.
The ubiquitousness of trace  levels of organic
contaminants such as methylene chloride creates some
problems in evaluating the  integrity of clay liners at
waste disposal sites, llgenf ritz and others (1988) have
suggested using fluorobenzene as a field monitoring
tracer because it would not be likely to occur in normal
industrial and commercial activities.

Dyes
Dyes are relatively inexpensive,  simple to  use, and
effective.  Either fluorescent or nonfluorescent dyes
may be useful in studies of water movement in soil if the
soil material that has absorbed the dye is excavated and
visually inspected. Fluorescent dyes are preferable to
nonfluorescent varieties in ground-water tracer studies
because they are easier to detect.  Dole (1906) was the
first recommended use of dyes to study ground water in
the United States by reporting the results of f luorescein
and other dyes used  in France beginning around 1882.
Stiles and others (1927) conducted early experiments
using uranine (fluorescein) to demonstrate pollution of
wells in a sandy aquifer, and Meinzer (1932)  described
use of fluorescein as a ground-water tracer.  However,
extensive use  of fluorescent dyes  for ground-water
tracing did not  begin until after 1960.  Quinlan (1986)
provides a concise,  but comprehensive, guide to the
literature on dye tracing.

The advantages of using fluorescent dyes include very
high detectability, rapid field analysis, and relatively low
cost and lowtoxicity. Smart and Laidlaw(1977) classified
commonly used fluorescent dyes  by  color:  orange
(Rhodamine B, Rhodamine  WT, and Sulforhodamine
B); green (fluorescein, Lissamine FF, and pyranine);
and blue—also called optical brighteners.  Aley and
others (in press) classify dyes according to the detector
(also called bug) used to recoverthem: dyes  recovered
on cotton include optical  brighteners (such as Tinopal
5BM GX, and Phorwhite BBH) and  Direct Yellow 96;
and dyes recovered on activated charcoal (fluorescein
and Rhodamine WT).

The literature on fluorescent dye  use is plagued by a
lack of consistency indye nomenclature (Quinlan, 1986).
The standard reference to dyes is the Colour Index (Cl)
(SDC& AATCC, 1971-1982). Most dyes are classified
according to the Cl generic name (related to  method of
dyeing) and chemical structure (the  Cl constitution
number). Abrahart (1968, pp. 15-43) provides a concise
guide to dye nomenclature.  Dyes also are  classified
according to their use in foods, drugs and cosmetics
                                                 76

-------
(Marmion, 1984).  There are numerous commercial
names for most dyes. Consequently reported results of
dye tracing experiments should always specify (1) t^he
Cl generic name or Cl constitution number, and (2) the
manufacturerandthe manufacturer's commercial name.
The full name of the dye should be mentioned at least
once to distinguish it from other dyes with the samel or
similar names. For example, in 1985, four structurally
different kinds of Rhodamine were sold in the Unit'ed
States under 11 different names by five manufacture'
and there are more than 180 kinds of Direct Yellow dye
(Quinlan, 1986).

The first part of the commerical name of a dye should
not be confused with the dye itself.  For exampie,
Tinopal and Phorwhite are trade names used for whole
series of chemically unrelated dyes made by a single
company and should be capitalized. Seven chemically
different Tinopals and 20 different  Phorwhites ere
currently sold in the United States as optical brightene, rs
(Aley and others, in press).

A particularly confusing point of dye nomenclature is
that there are two fluorescein dyes with the same Cl
name and  number, although they do have different
(Drug and Cosmetic) D&C designations: fluorescqin
(C20H12O5)—D&C Yellow 7—and fluorescein sodii
(C20H12O5Na2)—D&C Yellow 8. Only D&C Yellov
is soluble in water and, therefore, suitable for grour
watertracing. In the American and British literature this
is referred to as fluorescein, whereas in the European
literature it is called uranine (Quinlan, 1986).

Although fluorescent dyes exhibit many of the properties
of an ideal tracer, a number of factors interfere wijth
concentration measurement. Fluorescence is  used to
measure  dye concentration,  but the amount of
fluorescence may vary with suspended sediment load,
temperature, pH, CaCOs content, salinity, etc. Other
variables that affect tracer test results are "quenching"
(some emitted fluorescent light is reabsorbed by other
molecules),  adsorption, and  photochemical  ard
biological decay. A disadvantage of fluorescent dyes n
tropical  climates  is  poor performance  because of
chemical reactions with dissolved carbon dioxide (Sm
and Smith, 1976).
Fluorescence intensity is  inversely  proportional
temperature. Smart and Laidlaw (1977) described trie
numerical relationship and provided temperature
correction curves. LowpHtendsto reduce fluorescence.
Figure 4-5 shows that the fluorescence of Rhodamin'e
WT decreases rapidly at increasingly acidic pHs beloj/v
about 6.0.  An increase in the suspended sediment
concentration also generally causes a decrease  in
fluorescence.
    100
#    so
     60
     40
     20
     — — HCI &N«OH

     	 HNO, ft NaOH
      1.0
            3.0
5.0
                            7.0
                                    9.0
11.0
                         PH
Figure 4-5. The Effect of pH on Rhodamine WT
(adapted from Smart and Laidlaw, 1977)
Dyes travel slower than water due to adsorption, and
are generally not as conservative as radioactive tracers
or some of the ionic tracers.  Adsorption can occur on
organic matter,  clays  (bentonite,  kaolinite, etc.),
sandstone, limestone, plants, plankton, and even glass
sample bottles.  However, the detected fluorescence
may decrease or actually increase due to adsorption.
Adsorption  on kaolinite caused a decrease in the
measured fluorescence of several dyes, as measured
by Smart and Laidlaw (1977). If dye is adsorbed onto
suspended solids, and the fluorescence measurements
are taken without separating the water samples from
the sediment, the dye concentration is a measure of
sediment content rather than water flow.

These possible adsorption effects are a strong incentive
to choose a dye that is nonsorptive for the  type of
medium tested. Different dyes vary greatly in amount of
sorption on specific materials. For example, Repogle
and others (1966) measured sorption of three orange
dyes on  bentonite clay with the following  results:
Rhodamine WT, 28%;  Rhodamine B,  65%;  and
Sulforhodamine B, 96%.

In a review of the toxicity of 12 fluorescent dyes Smart
(1984) identified  only three tracers  (Tinopal  CBS-X,
Fluorescein, and Rhodamine WT) with no demonstrated
carcinogenic or mutagenic hazard. Use of Rhodamine
B was not recommended because it is a known
                                                77

-------
carcinogen.  Use of the other dyes was considered
acceptable provided normal precautions are observed
during dye handling.   Aulenbach and others (1978)
concluded that Rhodamine B should not be used as a
ground-water tracer simply on the basis of  sorption
losses.

Currently, the U.S. Geological Survey has a policy of
limiting the maximum concentration of fluorescent dyes
at water-user withdrawal points to 0.01 ppm (Hubbard
and others, 1982). This is a conservative, non-obligatory
limit,  and Field and others (1990)  recommend that
tracer concentrations not exceed 1 ppm for a period in
excess of 24 hours in ground water.  Dyes should
probably not be used where  water supplies  are
chlorinated because dye molecules may react with
chlorine to form chlorophenols (Smart and  Laidlaw,
1977).  Field and others  (1990) recommend careful
evaluation of a tracer before use in a sensitive or unique
ecosystem.

General references on fluorescent dye use are three
U.S.  Geological Survey publications (Hubbard and
others, 1982; Kilpatrick and Cobb, 1985; Wilson and
others, 1986), reviews by Smart and Laidlaw (1977)
and Jones (1984), and two reports prepared for EPA
(Mull, 1988; Quinlan, 1989). Aley and Fletcher (1976)
remains a classic but outdated text on practical aspects
of dye tracing; it will be replaced by The Joy of Dyeing
(Aley and others, in press) when that compendium  is
published.

Fluorescein, also known as uranine, sodiumf luorescein,
and othernames.hasbeenoneofthemostwidelyused
green dyes. Like all green dyes, its use  is commonly
complicated by high natural background fluorescence,
which lowers sensitivity  of analyses  and makes
interpretation of results more difficult. Feuerstein and
Selleck(1963) recommend that f luorescein be restricted
to short-term studies of only the highest quality water.

Lewis and others (1966) used f luorescein in a fractured
rock study. Mather and others (1969) recorded its use
in a mining subsidence investigation in South Wales.
Tester and others (1982) used fluorescein to determine
fracture volumes and diagnose flow behavior in  a
fractured granitic geothermal reservoir. They found no
measurable adsorption or decomposition of the  dye
during the 24-hr exposures to rocks at 392°F. At the
other extreme, Rahe and others (1978) did not recover
any injected dye in their hillslope studies, even at a
distance of 2.5 m downslope from the injection point.
The  same experiment  used bacterial  tracers
successfully.

Anothergreenf luorescent dye, pyranine, has a stronger
fluorescent signal than does fluorescein, but is much
more  expensive.  It has  been used in several soil
studies. Reynolds (1966) found pyranine to be the most
stable dye for use in an acidic, sandy soil.  Drew and
Smith (1969) stated that pyranine  is not as easily
detectable as fluorescein, but  is more resistant to
decoloration and adsorption. Pyranine has a very high
photochemical decay rate, and is strongly affected by
pH in the range found in most natural waters (McLaughlin,
1982).

Rhodamine WT has been considered one of the most
usefultracersforquantitative studies, based on minimum
detectability, photochemical and biological decay rates,
and adsorption  (Knuttson, 1968; Smart and Laidlaw,
1977; Wilson and others, 1986).  Rhodamine WT is the
most  conservative dye available for stream tracing
(Hubbard and others,1982). Fluorescein is the most
common dye used for tracing ground water in karst.

Aulenbach and others (1978) compared Rhodamine B,
Rhodamine WT, and tritium as tracers in effluent from
a sewage treatment plant that was applied to natural
delta sand beds.  The Rhodamine B was highly adsorbed,
while  the Rhodamine WT and tritium yielded similar
breakthrough curves. Aulenbach and Clesceri (1980)
found Rhodamine WT very successful in a sandy
medium. Gann and Harvey (1975) used Rhodamine
WT for karst tracing in a limestone and dolomite system
in Missouri.

Rhodamine B and Sulforhodamine B are poor tracers
for use  in ground water and most surface waters; it
could be said the "B" stands for "bad."  Amidorhodamine
G is a significantly better tracer; similarly, it can be said
that the "G" stands for "good" (personal commu nication,
James Quinlan, ATEC Environmental Consultants,
Nashville, TN, July, 1990).

Blue fluorescent dyes, or optical brighteners, have been
used  in increasing amounts in the past decade in
textiles, paper,  and other materials to enhance their
white appearance. Water that has been contaminated
by domestic waste entering septic tank soil absorption
fields can be used as  a "natural" tracer if it contains
detectable amounts of the brighteners. Glover (1972)
was the first to describe the use of optical brighteners as
tracers in karst  environments.  Since then, they have
been  extensively used in the United States (Quinlan,
1986). The tracer Amino G acid is a dye intermediate
used  in the  manufacture  of dyes that is sometimes
mistakenly classified as an optical brightener (Quinlan,
1986). Amino G acid is now recognized as a carcinogenic
and should not be used in water that might be used for
drinking (personal communication, James Quinlan,
ATEC Environmental Consultants, Nashville, TN, July,
                                                 78

-------
1990).  Smart and Laidlaw (1977)  provide detailed
information on the characteristics of the optical brightener
Photine CU and Amino G acid.

Gases
Numerous natural and artificially produced gases have
been found in ground water. Some of the naturally
produced gases can be used as tracers, and gas  also
can be injected into ground water where it dissolves and
can be used as a tracer. Only a few examples of gases
being used as ground-water tracers are found in tie
literature, however.  Table 4-4 lists possible gases to
use in hydrogeologic studies. Gases are useful tracers
in the saturated zone. They are less reliable in tie
unsaturated zone because bleeding into the atmosphere
can give falsely negative results.

Inert Natural Gases. Because of their nonreactive and
nontoxic nature, noble gases are potentially use
ul
tracers. Helium is used widely as a tracer in industr al
processes.  Carter and others (1959)  studied tie
feasibility of using helium as a tracer in ground water
and found that ittraveled at a slightly lower velocity than
chloride. Advantages of using helium as atracer are its
(1) safety, (2) low cost, (3) relative ease of analysis, (4)
low concentrations required, and (5) chemical inertness.
Disadvantages identified by Carter and others (195J9)
include (1) relatively large errors in analysis, (2) difficulties
in maintaining a constant recharge rate, (3) time required
to develop equilibrium in unconfined aquifers, and (4)
possible loss to the atmosphere in unconfined aquifers.
Neon, krypton, and xenon are otherpossible candidates
forinjected tracers because their natural concentrations
are very low (Table 4-4). Although the gases do not
undergo chemical reactions and do not participate in ion
exchange, the heavier noble gases (krypton and xenon)
do sorb to some extent on clay and organic material.
The solubility of the noble gases decreases  with
increases in  temperature.  Therefore,  the natural
concentrations of these gases in ground water are an
indication of surface temperatures at the time of water
infiltration. This property has been used to reconstruct
palaeoclimatic trends i n a sandstone aquifer in England
using argon and krypton for age  estimates (Andrews
and Lee, 1979). Sugisaki (1969) and Mazor(1972) also
have used natural inert gases in this way.

Anthropogenic Gases. Numerous artificial gases have
been manufactured during the past decade, and several
of them have been  released in sufficient volumes to
produce measurable concentrations in the atmosphere
on  a worldwide scale. One of the most interesting
groups of these gases is the fluorocarbons. These
gases generally pose a very low biological hazard, are
generally stable for periods measured in years, do not
react chemically with other materials, can be detected
in very low concentrations, and sorb only slightly on
most minerals.  They do sorb strongly, however, on
organic matter.

Fluorocarbons have two primary  applications.  First,
because large  amounts of fluorocarbons  were  not
                                      Approximate Natural
                                      Background Assuming
                                      Equilibrium with
                                      Atmosphere at 20°C
                                      (mggas/L water)
           Source: Davis and others (1985)
Table 4-4. Gases of Potential Use as Tracers
                                                 79
                  Maximum Amount in
                  Solution Assuming
                  100% Gas at Pressure
                  of 1 atm at 20°C
                  (mg gas/L water)
Argon
Neon
Helium
Krypton
Xenon
Carbon monoxide
Nitrous oxide
0.57
1.7x11

,-4
8.2 x10'6
2.7 x10'4
5.7 X10'5
6.0 xK
3.3 X 1(
,-e
,-4
60.6
9.5
1.5
234
658
28
1,100

-------
released into the atmosphere until the later 1940s and
early 1950s, the presence of fluorocarbons in ground
water indicates that the water was in contact with the
atmosphere within the past 30 to 40 years (Thompson
and  Hayes, 1979).   The second application of
fluorocarbon compounds  is  as injected tracers
(Thompson and others,  1974).  Because detection
limits are so low, large volumes of water can be labeled
with the tracers at a rather modest cost.  Despite the
problem of sorption on natural material and especially
on organics, initial tests have been quite encouraging.

Isotopes
An isotope is any of two or more forms of the same
element having the same atomic number and nearly the
same chemical properties but  with  different atomic
             weights and different numbers of neutrons in the nuclei.
             Isotopes may be stable (they do not emit radiation) or
             radioactive (they emit alpha, beta, and/or gamma rays).
             There are over 280 isotopic forms of stable elements
             and 40 or so radioactive isotopes (Glasstone, 1967). A
             wide variety of stable and radioactive isotopes have
             been used in ground-water tracer studies. There is an
             extensive  literature on the use of isotopes in ground-
             water investigations; Table 4-5 lists 15 general sources
             of information.   Isotopes have beenused mainly in
             porous media to study regional  ground-water flow
             regimes and measure aquifer parameters.  Back and
             Zoetl (1975) and LaMoreaux and others (1984) review
             use of isotopes in karst hydrologic systems.  Lack of
             familiarity  with techniques to analyze environmental
             isotopes has  limited their use by practicing field
       Reference
Description
       Back and Cherry (1976)


       Csallany(1966)


       Davis and Bentley (1982)

       Ferronsky and Polyakov (1982)

       Fr'rtz and Fontes (1980,1986)

       Caspar and Oncescu (1972)

       IAEA (1963)

       IAEA (1966)


       IAEA (1967)


       IAEA (1970)


       IAEA (1974)

       IAEA (1978)


       Moserand Rauert (1985)


       Wiebenga and others (1967)
Contains a brief review of use of environmental isotopes in ground-
water studies.

Early review paper on use of radioisotopes in water resources
research.

Review paper on ground-water dating techniques.

Text on use of environmental isotopes in the study of water.

Handbook on environmental isotope geochemistry (two volumes).

Text on use of radioactive tracers in hydrology (14 chapters).

Symposium on radioisotopes in hydrology.

Symposium on isotopes in hydrology with 21 papers on subsurface
hydrology.

Symposium on radioisotope tracers in industry and geophysics
contains a number of papers related to ground-water applications.

Symposium on isotopes in hydrology with 25 papers on subsurface
hydrology.

Symposium on isotopes in ground-water hydrology with 51 papers.

Symposium on isotopes in hydrology with 41 papers on subsurface
hydrology.

Review paper on use of environmental isotopes for determining
ground-water movement.

Review paper on use of radioisotopes in ground-water tracing.
Table 4-5. Sources of Information on Uses of Isotopes in Ground-Water Tracing
                                                  80

-------
hydrogeologists ground-water contamination studies.
Hendry (1988) recommends the use of hydrogen and
oxygen isotopes as a  relatively inexpensive wayj to
estimate the ageof near-surface ground-watersamples.
Stable Isotopes. Stable isotopes are rarely used
                                              for
artificially injected tracer studies in the field because (1)
it is difficult to detect small artificial variations of most
isotopes against the  natural background,  (2) tteir
analysis is costly, and(3) preparing isotopically enricted
tracers is expensive.   The average stable  isotope
composition of deuterium (2H) and 180 in precipitatjon
changes with elevation, latitude,  distance from the
coast, and temperature.  Consequently, measurement
of these isotopes in ground water can be used to trace
the large-scale movement of ground water and to locate
areas of recharge (Gat, 1971; Ferronsky and Polyakov,
1982).

The two abundant isotopes of nitrogen (14N and 15N)
can  vary significantly in nature.   Ammonia (NH4)
escaping as vapor from decomposing animal wast js,
for example,  will tend to  remove the  lighter (14N)
nitrogen  and will leave behind a residue rich in heavy
nitrogen. In contrast, many fertilizers with an ammo nia
base will be isotopically light. Natural soil nitrate will be
somewhat between  these two  extremes.  As a
                                              to
                                              of
                                              an
consequence, nitrogen isotopes have been used
determine the origin of unusually high  amounts
nitrate in ground water. Also, the presence of more th
about 5 mg/L of nitrate is commonly an indirect indication
of contamination from chemical fertilizers and sewage.

The stable sulfur isotopes (32S, 34S, and 36S) have
been  used to distinguish between sulfate originating
from natural dissolution of gypsum (CaSO4.2H2O) and
sulfate originating from an industrial spill of sulfuric acid
(H2S04).

Two stable isotopes of carbon (12C and 13C) and one
radidisotope (14C) are used in hydrogeologic studies.
Although not as commonly studied as 14C, the ratio of
the stable isotopes, 13C/12C, is potentially useful in
sorting out the origins of certain contaminants found in
water. For example, methane (CH4) originating from
some deep geologic deposits is isotopically heavier
then methane originating from near-surface sources.
This contrast forms the basis for identifying aquifers
contaminated with methane from pipelines and from
subsurface storage tanks.

Isotopes of other elements such as chlorine, strontium,
and boron are used to determine regional directions of
ground-water flow rather than to identify  sources of
contamination.

Radionuclides.   Radioactive  isotopes  of various
elements are collectively referred to as radionuclides.
In the early 1950s there was great enthusiasm for using
radionuclides both as natural "environmental" tracers
and as injected artificial tracers.  The use of artificially
injected radionuclides has  all  but ceased in many
countries, includingthe United States, however, because
of concerns about possible adverse health effects (Davis
and others, 1985).  Artificially introduced  radioactive
tracing  mostly  is confined  to  carefully controlled
laboratory experiments orto deep petroleum production
zones that are devoid of potable water.  Table 4-6 lists
eight radionuclides commonly used as injected tracers,
their half-lives, and the chemical form in which they  are
typically used.
Radionucllide
2H
32p
51 Cr
60Co
82Br
85Kr
1311
98Au
Half-Life
y = year
d-day
h = hour
12.3y
14.3d
27.8d
.25y
33.4h
10.7y
8.1d
2.7d
Chemical Compound
HgO
H32HPO4
EDTA-CrandCrC13
EDTA-Co and KaCo (CNe)
NHUBr, NaBr.LiBr
Kr(gas)
landKI
AuCIa
                        Source: Davis and others (1985)

Table 4-6. Commonly Used Radioactive Tracers for Ground-Water Studies
                                                81

-------
The use of natural environmental tracers has expanded
so  that they are now a major component of many
hydrochemical studies. A number of radionuclides are
present in the atmosphere from natural and artificial
sources, and many of  these are carried into  the
subsurface by  rain water.   The  most common
hydrogeologicuse of these radionuclides is to estimate
the average length of time ground water has been
isolated from the atmosphere. This measurement is
complicated by dispersion in the aquifer and mixing in
wells  that sample several hydrologic  zones.
Nevertheless, the age of waterin an aquiferusually can
be established as being older than some given limiting
value.   For example,  detection of atmospheric
radionuclides might indicate that ground water was
recharged more than 1,000 years ago orthat, in another
region, all the ground water in a given shallow aquifer is
younger than 30  years.

Since the 1950s, atmospheric tritium, the radioactive
isotope of hydrogen (3H) with a half life of 12.3 years,
has been dominated by tritium from the detonation of
thermonuclear devices.  Thermonuclear explosions
increased the concentration of tritium in local rainfall to
more than 1,000 tritium units (TU)  in the northern
hemisphere by the early 1960s (Figure 4-6). As a result,
ground water in  the northern  hemisphere with more
than about 5 TU is generally less than 30 years old.
Very small amounts of tritium,  0.05 to 0.5 TU, can be
produced by natural subsurface processes,  so  the
presence of these low levels does not necessarily
indicate a recent age.

The radioactive isotope of carbon, 14C (with a half-life
of 5,730 years), is also widely studied in ground water.
In practice, the use of 14C is rarely simple. Sources of
old carbon, primarily from limestone and dolomite, will
dilute the sample, and a number of processes, such as
theformation of CH4 gas orthe precipitation of carbonate
minerals, will fractionate the isotopes and alter  the
apparent age.  Interpreting 14C "ages" of water is so
complex  that it should  be  attempted  only  by
hydrochemists specializing in isotope hydrology. Despite
the complicated nature of 14C studies, they are highly
useful in determining the approximate residence time of
old water (500 to 30,000 years) in aquifers. In certain
circumstances, this information cannot be obtained in
any other way.

Inert  Radioactive Gases.  Chemically inert but
radioactive 133Xe and 85Kr appear to be suitable for
many injected tracer applications (Robertson, 1969;
Wagner,  1977),  provided legal restrictions  can be
overcome.  222Rn,  one of the daughter products from
the spontaneous fission of 238U, is the most abundant
of the natural inert radioactive gases. Radon is present
       »58W62We8«7072747878WB2
 Figure 4-6. Average Annual Tritium
 Concentration of Rainfall and Snow for Arizona,
 Colorado, New Mexico, and Utah (from Davis and
 others, 1985, after Vuataz and others, 1984)
in the subsurface, but owing to the short half-life (3.8 d)
of 222Rn, and the absence of parent uranium nuclides
in the atmosphere, radon is virtually absent in surface
waterthat has reached equilibriumwith the atmosphere.
Surveys of radon in surface streams and lakes have,
therefore, been useful in detecting locations where
ground water enters surface waters (Rogers, 1958).
Hoehn and von Gunten (1989) measured  dilution of
radon in ground waterto assess infiltration from surface
waters to an aquifer.

Tracer Tests in Karst

Probably no  hydrogeologic system has been more
extensively studied by a more diverse group of people
with  such a plethora of tracing techniques as  karst
limestone terranes.  Geese (Aley and Fletcher, 1976),
tagged eels (Bogli, 1980), computerpunch-card confetti
(Davis  and  others, 1985), and  time  bombs
(Arandjelovich, 1969) are among the more exotictracers
that have been used in karst.

There is an extensive international literature on karst
tracing.   Table 4-7 describes  18   major sources of
general information on this topic. There is a substantial
English- language literature in American caving journals,
such as Cave Notes/Caves and Karst (which ceased
publication in 1973), Missouri  Speleology, and  the
National  Speleological Society Bulletin, and similar
British periodicals, such as Transactions of the Cave
Research Group (now  Cave Science), and the
Proceedings of the University of Bristol Speleological
Society.  The  international symposia on underground
                                                82

-------
watertracing (SUWT— see Table 4-7) provide the best
systematic compilations of international research on
this topic.  Probably  the easiest way to  monitor the
international  literature on dye-tracing in karst terrares
and otherkarst and speleological literature is the annual
Speleological Abstracts published  by the  Union
Internationale de Spel6ologie in Switzerland.

Table 4-8 summarizes information  on the  most
commonly used water tracers in North American kaVst
studies.  Dyes are almost ideal tracers because the
adsorption is usually not a problem in karst nydrogeologic
systems.  Smart (1985)  lists four applications  of
                     fluorescent dye tracers in evaluating exist! ng or potential
                     contamination in carbonate rocks: (1) confirmation of
                     leachate contamination, (2)  determination of on site
                     hydrology, (3) determination  of hydraulic properties of
                     landfill materials, and (4)  prediction of leachate
                     contamination and dilution.

                     Fluorescein,  Rhodamine WT,  optical brighteners
                     (Tlnopal 5BM GX), and Direct Yellow 96 are the most
                     commonly used dyes.  The amount of dye injected
                     depends on whether qualitative or quantitative analysis
                     is planned.  Qualitative tests involve simple visual
                     detection  of  dye  in flowing  water or captured by a
   Reference
Description
   Aley and Fletcher
   (1976)

   Aley and others (in press)

   Back and Zoetl (1975)


   Bogli (1980)

   Brown (1972)

   Gospodaric and Habic
   (1976)

   Gunn  (1982)

   Jones (1984)

   LaMoreaux and others
   Milanovia(1981)

   Mull and others (1988)

   Quintan (1989)


   Sweeting (1973)

   SUWT (1966. 1970.
   1976.1981. and 1986)


   Thrailkill and others
   (1983)
Classic guide to us a of tracers in karst. Should be
replaced by Aley et al. (in press) when it is published.

Compendium of techniques for ground-water tracing focusing on karst terranes.

Review of the use of geochemical, isotopic, dye, spore, and artificial
radioisotopes as tracers in karst systems.

Pages 138-143 rev ew use of tracers in karst hydrology.

Chapter 111 reviews tracer methods in karst hydrologic systems.

Pages 217-230 certain reviews of the applicability of dyes, salts, radionuclides,
drifting materials, a id  other tracers in karst.

Review paper on te rst water tracing in Ireland.

Review paper on us e of dye tracers in karst.

Pages 196-210 of the 1984 annotated bibliography focus (1984,1989) on
isotope techniques for water tracing in carbonate rocks. The 1989 annotated
bibliography contains a section reviewing pollution assessment in
carbonate terranesl

             I focus
Pages 263-309 •
EPA report on dye-
EPA report with recpmmended dye-tracing protocols for ground-water tracing in
karst terranes.

Pages 218-251 focus on karst water and karst watertracing.
Publications related
Report focusing on
is on karst water tracing.

racing techniques in karst terranes.
                 to the various international
symposia on underground water tracing (SUWT) contain numerous papers on
ground-water tracing techniques, mostly focusing on karst.
                 karst dye-tracing techniques.
Table 4-7. Sources of Information on Ground-Water Tracing in Karst Systems
                                                  83

-------
Tracer &
Color
Fluoroscoin
Sodium
C.H.Na.0.
Yoflow-Groon
Xanlhone



Rhodamlne
WT
C.HBN.O,CI
Rod-Purplo
Xanlhone




Lycopodium
SpOfot
Lycopodium
CaMtum



Optical
Briohtonens
Colorless
normal light

Direct Yollow
(DY96)Low
Visibility
SUbono
derivative
Salt
NaCI
Colorless





Passive
Detector
Activated
coconut
charcoal
6-14 mash




Activated
coconut
charcoal
6-14 moth





Plankton
Dotting
nytoln-
25 micron



Unbleached
cotton



Unbleached
cotton



• Recording
specific
conductance
motor or
regular
sampling


Maximum
Test ExcHatin &
(elutriant) Emission nm
Ethyl aclohol 485
and 5% KOH. 515
Visual lest or
fluorometer &
2A-47B;
2A-12,
65A filters

Ethyl alcohol 550
& 5% KOH or 580
1-Propanol +
NH.OH. Solution
tested using
fluorometer
and 546-590
filters.

Spores & serf- N/A
ment are washed
from Ihenets.
Microscopic ex-
amination Is used
to identify spores.

Visual exami- 360
nation of do- 435
(actors under UV
Ightor7-37;2A +
47B Filters.
Visual examina- N/A
tion of detectors
under UV light or
7-37; 2A + 47B
Filters
Either a direct N/A
test for an in-
crease In chlor-
ide, or a sub-
stantial increase
in specific
conductance

Detectable
Cone.
0.1ug/1
Dependent on
background
levels. 'Controls'
must be
used to deter-
mine back-
ground
.01 ug/1.
Dependent on
background
levels and fluc-
tuation.




Dependent on
background
levels. Several
kilograms of
spores are
usually used.

Dependent on
background
levels, but
generally at least
.1 ug/1.
1 .0 ug/1 on
cotton, and with
fluorometric
analysis.

Dependent on
background
levels. Several
hundred kilo-
grams may be
needed for larger
tests.

Advantages
1} Does not require
constant monitoring
or any special
equipment. 2) In-
expensive.



1) Dye is photo-
chemicaUy stable.
2) Dye may be used
in low pH waters.





1) Several simultan-
eous tests may be
conducted using
different colored
spores 2) No coloring
of water occurs.

1 ) Inexpensive. 2)
No coloring of water
occurs


1) Little natural
background. 2) Good
stability and low
sorption. 3) No
coloring of water.
1) Generally con-
sidered safe for use
on public water sy-
stems. 2) Useful
where fluorescent
background condi-
tions exclude other
methods
Disadvantages
1) Dyois phoio-
chemically unstable.
2) Moderate
sorption on day.
3) pH sensitive.



1 ) Requires the use
of a flurometer. 2)
Moderate day
sorption.





1 ) Spores may be
prematurely filtered
out. 2} Field
collection system
elaborate. 3) Sys-
tem is generally
more expansive.
1 ) Background
readings may be
excessively high.
2)Adsorbed onto
organics.
1) Moderate cost. 2)
Sensitive to pH.



1) Large quantities
usually needed. 2)
Background specific
conductance is
often high.



Remarks
This is the most
popular method
used in the USA.
Carbon detectors
first suggested by
Dunn, 1957.


Rhodamine has
been used ex-
tensively in Can-
ada & USA. This
is not a.suitable
method for ama-
teurs without ac-
cess to a
flou remoter.
1 ) Spores have not
been used in North
America.




May be used
simultaneously
with a green & red
dye using fluoro-
metric separation.
Has been used
extensively in
Kentucky.


Salt is occa-
sionally used by
th» US Geological
Survey for tests
dealing with public
water supplies.


1 O.K. Turner Fitters for Turner 111 Filter Fluorometer.
'Dye is usual!/ most visible in dear water, deep pools, and in bright sunlight. These figures are not exact.
< Very dilute dye solutions may be concentrated upon the detector over a period of time.
Source: Jones, 1984.
Table 4-8. Evaluation of Principal Water Tracers Used in North American Karst Studies
detector (see discussion below).   Semi-quantitative
results  can be obtained by using a fluorometer or
spectrofluorometer to detect amounts of dye captured
by detectors such as activated charcoal that may not be
discernible to the eye.  Interpretation of values from
such measurements is limited due to lack of precise
information on the variation in ground water flow and
dye concentration between collection  of detectors.
Quantitative tests involve precise measurement of dye
concentrations in grab samples of water.  If the exact
amount of injected dye is known, and flow measurements
are taken along with  each sample, a mass-balance
analysis allows estimation of how much dye has been
distributed through different parts of the subsurface flow
system.

In qualitative tests,  enough dye must be injected for
visual detection; quantitative tests using a fluorometer
or spectrofluorometer generally require one-tenth to
one  hundredth as much dye.  Determination of the
                                                   84

-------
correct quantity to inject is as much an art as a science,
and this should be determined by, or with the assista ice
of, someone with experience in karst tracer tests.

Dye is recovered with detectors called bugs (cotton or
activated charcoal, depending on the tracer), that are
typically suspended  in streams  and  springs on
hydrodynamically  stable stands called gumdrcps.
Detectors are placed at springs or in streams where flow
from the point of injection is suspected of reaching the
surface. Atchosentime intervals relatedtothe dista ice
from the source of injection, detectors are collected and
replaced with fresh detectors.  Detectors are usually
collected frequently during the first few day s after injec Jon
to pinpoint the most rapid dye arrival time, and then
typicallyonadailybasisforseveralweeks. Background
tests always must  be run before injection, especially
with optical brighteners because sewage effluent from
individual septic tank absorption fields may increase
background levels substantially.

Qualitative tracer tests in which two dyes are injected
into two different locations are readily done by combining
a fluorescent dye and an optical brightener, which use
different detectors. Quantitative techniques are available
(developed originally in Europe) for separating mixtu res
of fluorescent dyes (Quinlan, 1986). A 5-dye tracer est
has recently been conducted using these techniques
(personal communication, James Quinlan, January
1990). Perhaps the most comprehensive karst trading
experiments in a single location were carried out in
Slovenia, Yugoslavia,  in the early 1970s where five
dyes, lycopodium spores, lithium chloride, potassium
chloride, chromium-51,  and detergents all were used
(Gospodaric and Habic, 1976).

Reports prepared for EPA by Mull and others (1988)
and Quinlan (1989) are the  most comprehensive
references currently available on procedures for  aye-
tracing in karst terranes. Aley and others (in press)
should be obtained when it becomes available. Smoot
and others  (1987),  and Smart  (1988a) describe
quantitative dye- tracing techniques in karst, and Smart
(1988b)  describes an  approach to the  structural
interpretation of ground-water tracers in karst terrace.

Tracer Tests in Porous Media

Tracer tests in porous  media are  used primarily  to
characterize aquiferparameters such as regional velo city
(Leap, 1985), hydraulic conductivity distributions (Molz
and others, 1988), anisotropy (Kenoyer, 1968),
dispersivity (Bumb and others, 1985), and distribulion
coefficient or retardation (Pickens and others, 1981;
Rainwater and others, 1987). Smart and others (1988)
have prepared an annotated bibliography on ground-
water tracing that focuses on use of tracers in porous
media.                                      "

The purpose and practical constraints of a tracer test
must be clearly understood prior to actual planning.
Following are a few of the questions that need to be
addressed:

   * Is only the direction of waterf lowto be determined?

   * Areotherparameterssuchastraveltime,porosity,
     and hydraulic conductivity of interest?

   * How much time is available for the test?

   * How much money is available for the test?

If results must be obtained within a few weeks, then
certain kinds of tracer tests would normally be out of the
question. Those using only the natural hydraulic gradient
between two wells that are more than about 20 m apart
typically require long time periods for the tracer to flow
between the wells. Another primary consideration is
budget. Costs for tests that involve drilling several deep
holes, setting packers to control sampling or injection,
and analyzing hundreds of samples in an EPA- certified
laboratory could easily exceed $1  million. In contrast,
some short-term tracer tests may cost less than $1,000.

Choice of atracerwill depend partially on which analytical
techniques are easily available and which background
constituents might interfere with these analyses. The
chemist or technician who will analyze the samples can
advise whether background constituents might interfere
with the analytical techniques to  be used.  Bacteria,
isotopes, and ions are the most frequently used types of
tracers in porous media.  Fluorescent dyes are less
commonly used as tracers because they tend to adsorb.
A more common use of dyes in porous media is to locate
zones of preferential flow in the vadose zone.  In this
application,  adsorption on soil particles  is desirable
because  it  allows visual inspection of flow patterns
when the soil is excavated.

Estimating the Amount of Tracer to Inject
The amount of tracer to inject is based on the natural
background concentrations, the detection limit for the
tracer,  the dilution expected,  and  experience.
Adsorption, ion exchange, and dispersion will decrease
the amount of tracer arriving at the observation well, but
recovery of the injected mass is usually not less than 20
percent for two-hole tests using a forced recirculation
system and conservative tracers.  The concentration
should not be increased so much  that density effects
become a problem. Lenda and Zuber( 1970) presented
graphs that can be used to estimate the approximate
                                                 85

-------
quantity of tracer needed. These values are based on
estimates of the porosity and dispersion coefficient of
the aquifer.

Single-Well Techniques
Two techniques,  injection/withdrawal  and borehole
dilution, produce parameter values from a single well
that are valid at a local scale. Advantages of single-well
techniques are:

   *  Less tracer is required than for two-well tests.

   *  The assumption of radial flow is generally valid,
      so natural aquifervelocity can be ignored, making
      solutions easier.

   *  Knowledge of the exact direction of flow is not
      necessary.

Molz and others (1985) describe design and performance
of single-well tracer tests conducted at the Mobile site.

Injection/Withdrawal.  The single-well  injection/
withdrawal (or pulse) technique can be used to obtain a
pore  velocity value and  a longitudinal  dispersion
coefficient. The method assumes that porosity is known
or can be estimated with reasonable accuracy. In this
procedure, a given quantity of tracer is instantaneously
added to the borehole, the tracer is mixed, and then two
to three borehole volumes of freshwater are pumped in
to force the tracerto penetrate the aquifer. Only a small
quantity is injected so as not to disturb natural flow.

After a certain time, the borehole is pumped out at a
constant rate large enough to overcome the natural
ground-water flow. Tracer concentration is measured
with time or pumped volume. If the concentration is
measured at various depths with point samplers, the
relative permeability of layers can be determined. The
dispersion  coefficient is obtained  by matching
experimental breakthrough  curves with  theoretical
curves based on the general dispersion equation. A
finite difference method is used to simulate the theoretical
curves (Fried, 1975).

Fried  concluded that this method is useful for local
information (2-to 4-m radius) and for detecting the most
permeable strata. A possible advantage of this test is
that nearly all of the tracer is removed from the aquifer
at the end of the test.

Borehole Dilution. This technique, also called point
dilution, can be used to measure the magnitude and
direction of horizontal tracer velocity and vertical flow
(Fried, 1975; Caspar and Oncescu, 1972; Klotz and
others, 1978).

The procedure introduces a known quantity of tracer
instantaneously into the borehole, mixes it well, and
then measures the concentration decrease with time.
The  tracer is generally introduced into  an  isolated
volume of the borehole using packers.  Radioactive
tracers have been most commonly used for borehole
dilution tests, but other tracers can be used.

Factors to consider when conducting a point dilution
test include the homogeneity of the aquifer, effects of
drilling (mudcake, etc.), homogeneity of the mixture of
tracer and well water, degree of tracer diffusion, and
density effects.

Ideally, the test should be conducted using a borehole
with  no screen or gravel pack. If a screen is used, it
should be next to the borehole because dead  space
alters the results. Samples should be very  small in
volume so that flow is not disturbed by their removal.

A  variant  of the point dilution method allows
measurement of the direction of ground-water flow. In
this procedure,  a section of the borehole is usually
isolated by packers, and a tracer (often radioactive) is
introduced slowly and without mixing. Then, after some
time,  a compartmental  sampler  (four to  eight
compartments) within the borehole is opened. The
direction of minimum concentration corresponds to the
flow  direction.  A  similar method is to  introduce  a
radioactive  tracer and subsequently measure  its
adsorption on the  borehole or well screen walls  by
means of a counting device in the hole. Caspar and
Oncescu (1972) describe the method in more detail.

Another common strategy is to inject and subsequently
remove the water containing a conservative tracer from
a single well. If injection is  rapid and immediately
followed by pumping to remove the tracer, then almost
all of the injected conservative tracer can be recovered.
If the pumping is delayed, the injected tracer will drift
downgradient with the general flow of the ground water
and the percentage of tracer recovery will decrease with
time. Successive tests with increasingly longer delay
times between injection and pumping can be used to
estimate ground-water velocities in permeable aquifers
with moderately large hydraulic gradients.

Two-Well Techniques
There are two basic approaches to using tracers with
multiple wells:  one  measures tracer movement in
uniform (natural) flow and the other measures movement
                                                 86

-------
                                             1
by radial (induced) flow. The parameters measjured
(dispersion coefficient and porosity) are assumed to be
the same for both types of flow.

 Uniform Flow.  This approach involves placing  a
tracer in one well without disturbing the flow field,! and
sampling periodically to detect the tracer in observatio n
wells. This test can be used at a local (2 to 5 m) or
intermediate (5 to 100 m) scale, but it requires much
more time than radial tests. If the direction and magnitude
of the velocity are not known, a large number of
observation wells are needed. Furthermore, localjflow
directions may diverge widely from directions predicted
on the basis of widely spaced water wells. Failure to
intercept a tracer in a well just a few meters away from
the injection well is not uncommon under natural-gradient
flow conditions.

The quantity of tracer needed to cover a large distance
can be expensive. On a regional scale, environmental
tracers, including seawater intrusion, radionuclides, or
stable  isotopes of hydrogen and oxygen, are used.
Manmade pollution also has been used.  For reg onal
problems, a  mathematical  model  is calibrated with
concentration versus time curves from field data, and is
used to predict future concentration distributions.

Local- or intermediate-scale uniform flow problems can
be solved analytically, semianalytically,  or by curve-
matching. Layers of different permeability can cause
distorted breakthrough curves, which can usually be
analyzed using one- ortwo-dimensional models (Caspar
and  Oncescu,  1972). Fried (1975) and  Lenda
Zuber (1970) present analytical solutions.
and
Radial Flow. Radial flow techniques work by altering
the flow field of an aquifer through pumping. Soluiions
are generally easier if radial flow velocity greatly exceeds
uniform flow. This method yields values for porosity and
the dispersion coefficient, but not natural ground-vjrater
velocity.  Types of radial flow tests include diverging,
converging, and recirculating tests.

A diverging test involves constant injection of wate • into
an aquifer. The tracer is introduced into the injected
water as a slug or continuous flow and the tracer is
detected at an observation well that is not pumping.
Point or integrated samples of small volume are carefully
taken at the observation well so that flow is not disturbed.
Packers can be used in the injection well to isolate an
interval.

In a converging test, the  tracer is introduced £t an
observation  well, while another well  is punmed
Concentrations are monitored at the pumped well]The
tracer often is  injected between two packers or below
one packer; then two to three well-bore volumes are
injected to push the tracer out into the aquifer. At the
pumping well, intervals of interest are isolated
(particularly in fractured rock), or an integrated sample
is obtained.

A recirculating test is similarto a converging test, but the
pumped water is injected back into the injection well.
This tests a  significantly greater part of the formation
because the wells inject to and pump from 360 degrees.
The flow lines are longer, however, partially canceling
out the advantage of a higher gradient.  Sauty (1980)
provides theoretical curves for recirculating tests.

Design and Construction of Test Wells
In many tracer tests, construction of the test wells is the
single greatest expense.  Procedures for the proper
design and construction of monitoring wells for sampling
ground-water quality (discussed  in Chapter 3) apply
equally  to wells used for tracer tests.

Special considerations for designing and constructing
test wells for tracer tests include:

    *   Drilling muds and mud additives tend to have a
        high capacity for the sorption of most types of
        tracers and, therefore, should be avoided.

    *   Drilling methods that alter  the  hydrologic
        characteristics of the aquifer being tested (such
        as clogging of pores) should be avoided.

    *   Use of packers  to isolate the  zones being
        sampled from the rest of  the water in the well
        (see Figure 4-2b)  allows the most precise
        measurements  of vertical variations  in
        hydrologic parameters. This approach tends to
        be more expensive, takes longer, and requires
        more technical training than whole-well tests.

    *   If packers are not used,  the diameter of the
        sampling well should be as small as possible so
        that the amount of "dead" water in the well
        during sampling is minimized.

    *   Well casing material should not be reactive with
        the tracer used.

    *   Well-screen slot size and gravel pack must be
        selected and installed with special care when
        using single-well tests with alternating cycles of
        injection and pumping large volumes of water
        into and out of loose fine-grained sand. On the
        other hand, if the aquifer being tested contains
        a very permeable coarse gravel and the casing
                                                 87

-------
       diameter is small, then numerous holes drilled
       in the solid casing may be adequate.

    *  As with any monitoring well, tracer test wells
       should be properly developed to remove silt,
       clay, drilling  mud, and other materials that
       would prevent free movement of water in and
       out of the well.

Injection and Sample Collection
Choice of injection equipment depends on the depth of
the borehole and the funds available. In very shallow
holes, the tracer can be lowered through a tube, placed
in an ampule that is lowered into the hole, and broken,
or just poured in. Mixing of the tracer with the aquifer
water is desirable and important for most types of tests
and is simple for very shallow holes.  For example, a
plunger can be surged up and down in the hole or the
tracer can  be released through  a pipe  with many
perforations. Flanges on the outer part of the pipe will
mix the tracer as the pipe is  raised and lowered. For
deeper holes, tracers must be injected under pressure
and equipment can be quite sophisticated.

Sample collection also can be simple or sophisticated.
For tracing thermal pulses, only a thermistor needs to
be lowered into the ground water. For chemical tracers,
a variety of sampling methods may be used. Some
special sampling considerations fortracertests include:

    *   Bailers should not be used if mixing of the tracer
       in the borehole is to be avoided.

    *   Where purging is required, removal of  more
       than the  minimum  required to obtain fresh
       aquifer water may create  a gradient towards
       the well and distort the natu ral movement of the
       tracer.

    *   Use of existing water wells that tap multiple
       aquifers should be generally avoided in tracer
       tests except to establish whether a hydrologic
       connection with the point of injection exists.

Interpretation of Results
This section provides a brief qualitative introduction to
the interpretation of tracertest results. More extensive
and quantitative treatments are found in the works of
Halevy and Nir (1962), Theis (1963),  Fried  (1975),
Sauty (1978), andGrisakand Pickens (1980a,b). Some
more recent papers on analysis of tracer tests include
GQven and others (1985,1986), Molz and others (1986,
1987), and Bullivant and O'Sullivan (1989).

The basic plot of the concentration of a tracer as a
function of time or water volume passed through the
system  is called  a breakthrough  curve.  The
concentration either is plotted as the actual concentration
(Figure 4-7) or, quite commonly, as the ratio of the
measured tracerconcentration at the sampling point, C,
to the input tracer concentration, Co (Figure 4-8).
             • lnj«cud 4/28
      tOO ff— lnj«ct«d 4/27
       10
      t.O
                             —— Amino G Acid
                             	Hhodamlra Wt
                             ILiuammt FF injccttd but
                                     not dcttctod)
                        lnj«ctton Wril
           I   VI
                       -J	1.
       10 i-
                        At 10 Fwt
    0.001
      4/285/1 6/10 5/20
                                   7/1 7/10 7/20
 Figure 4-7. Results of Tracer Tests at the Sand
 Ridge State Forest, Illinois (from Naymik and
 Sievers, 1983)


The measured quantity that is fundamental for most
tracer tests is the first arrival time of the tracer as it goes
from an injection point to a sampling point. The first
arrival time conveys at least two bits of information.
First, it indicates that a connection forground-waterflow
actually exists between the two points. For many tracer
tests, particularly in karst regions, this is all the information
that is desired. Second, if the tracer is conservative, the
maximum velocity of ground-water flow between the
two points may be estimated.
                                                  88

-------
     Ditch Filled with
     Tracer Having a     F^
     Concentration of CQ ^ LI
 Sampling Well will
  Water Having a
Tracer Concentratio
     ofC
                                     * Tracer Front

     A. Tracer movement from injection ditch to sampling well.
          1.0
         0.0
             Time of First
               Arrival
                              „ Time of Maximum
                                Rate of Change of C
                A     8

    B. Breakthrough Curve.
Figure 4-8. Tracer Concentration at Sampling Well,
C, Measured Against Tracer Concentration at Input,
C0 (from Davis and others, 1985)

Interpretations more elaborate than the two mentioned
above depend very much on the type of aquifer being
tested,  the  velocity of ground-water flow,  the
configuration of the tracer injection and sampling
systems, and the type of tracer or mixture of  tracers
used in the test.

The value of greatest interest after the first arrival time
is the arrival time of the peak concentration for a slug
injection; or, for a continuous feed of tracers, the time
since injection  when the concentration of the tracer
changes most rapidly as a function of time (Figure 4^8).
In general, if conservative tracers are.used, this time is
close to the theoretical travel time of an average molecule
of ground water traveling between the two points.

If a tracer is being introduced continuously into a dilch
penetrating an aquifer, as shown in Figure 4-8, then the
ratio C/CQ will  approach 1.0 after the tracer starts to
pass the sampling point.  The  ratio  of  1.0 is rarely
approached in  most tracer tests in the field, however,
because waters are mixed by dispersion and diffusion
in the aquifer and because wells  used for sampling will
commonly intercept far more ground water than tjas
been tagged by tracers (Figure  4-9).  Ratios of C/C0
ranging between 10~5 and 2 x 10~1 often are reported
from field tests.

If a tracer is introduced passively into an aquifer but i: is
recovered by pumping a separate sampling well, then
various mixtures of the tracer and the native  ground
water will be recovered depending on the amount of
water pumped, the transmissivity  of the aquifer, the
slope of the water table, and the shape of the tracer
plume.   Keely (1984)  has presented this  problem
graphically with regard to the removal of contaminated
water from an aquifer.

With the introduction of a mixture of tracers, possible
interactions between the tracers and the solid part of the
aquifer may be studied. If interactions take place, they
can be detected by comparing breakthrough curves of
aconservative tracerwiththecurves of the othertracers
being tested (Figure 4-10).  Quantitative analyses of
tracer breakthrough curves are generally conducted by
curve-matching  computer-generated type curves, or
by applying analytical methods.
                                         Ditch FHIad with
                                         Tracw Which
                                         Supplie* 1/4 of
                                         Downgradiont
                                         Ground-Water
                                         Fk)w-        ' e	lingWeJl
                                         7777-7-.
                     A. Tracer does not fully ««urate aquifer.
                            0.50
                            0.25
                           0:00
                     B. Breakthrough curve.
                                                  Time
                  Figure 4-9. Incomplete Saturation of Aquifer with
                  Tracer (from Davis and others, 1985)
                        0.10  -
                        0.05 -
                        0.00
                                            Time
                   Figure 4-10. Breakthrough Curves for Conservative
                   and  Nonconservative Tracers (from  Davis and
                   others, 1985)           „
                                                  89

-------
References

Abrahart, E.N., 1968,  Dyes and their intermediates:
Pergamon Press, Oxford.

Aley, T. and M.W. Fletcher, 1976, The water tracer's
cookbook: Missouri Speleology, v. 16, no. 3, pp. 1-32.

Aley, T, J.F. Quinlan, E.G. Alexander, and H. Behrens,
In press, The joy of dyeing, a compendium of practical
techniques for tracing groundwater, especially in karst
terranes: National Water Well Association, Dublin, OH.

Andrews, J.H. and  D.J. Lee, 1979,  Inert  gases in
groundwaterfromthe Bunter Sandstone of England as
Indicators of age and palaeoclimatic trends: J. Hydrology,
V. 41, pp. 233-252.

Arandjelovic, D., 1969, A possible way of tracing
groundwater flows in karst: Geophysical  Prospecting,
v. 17, no. 4, pp. 404-418.

Atkinson, T.C. and P.L. Smart, 1981, Artificial tracers in
hydrology: in A survey  of British hydrology: The Royal
Society, London, pp.173-190.

Atkinson, T.C., D.I. Smith, J.J. Lavis, and R.J. Whitaker,
1973, Experiments in  tracing underground waters in
limestones: J. Hydrology, v. 19, pp. 323-349.

Aulenbach, D.B., J.H. Bull, and B.C. Middlesworth,
1978, Use of tracers  to confirm ground-water flow:
Ground Water, v. 61, no. 3, ppr 149-157.

Aulenbach, D.B. and N  L. Clesceri, 1980, Monitoring for
land application of wastewater: Water, Air, and Soil
Pollution, v. 14, pp. 81-94.

Back, W. and J.Zoetl, 1975, Application of geochemical
principles, isotopic methodology, and artificial tracers to
karst hydrology: in Hydrogeology of karstic terrains; A.
BurgerandL Dubertret(eds.): Int. Ass. Hydrogeologists,
Paris, pp. 105-121.

Back, W. and J.A. Cherry, 1976,  Chemical aspects of
present and future hydrogeologic problems: Advances
in Groundwater Hydrology, September, pp. 153-172.

B6gli, A., 1980,Karst hydrology and physical speleology:
Springer-Verlag, New York.

Bullivant, D.P. and M.J.O'Sullivan, 1989, Matching field
tracer test with some simple models: Water Resources
Research, v. 25, no. 8, pp. 1879-1891.

Bumb,A.C.,J.I.Drever.andC.R.McKee, 1985, Insitu
determination of dispersion coefficients and adsorption
parameters forcontaminations using a pull-push test:jn
Proc. 2nd Int. Conf.  on Ground  Water  Quality
Research(Oklahoma), N.N. Durham and A.E. Redelfs
(eds.): Oklahoma State University Printing, pp. 186-
190.

Brown, M.C., 1972, Karst hydrology of the lowerMaligne
basin, Jasper,  Alberta:  Cave Studies No. 13: Cave
Research Associates, Castro Valley, CA.

Brown, M.C. and D.C. Ford, 1971, Quantitative tracer
methods for investigation of karst hydrology systems,
with reference to the Maligne basin area: Cave Research
Group (Great Britain), v. 13, no. 1, pp. 37-51.

Carter, R.C., W.J. Kaufman, G.T. Orlob, and O.K. Todd,
1959, Helium as a ground-water tracer: J. Geophysical
Research, v. 64, pp. 2433-2439.

Csallany, S.C., 1966, Application  of radioisotopes in
water resources research :jn Proc. 2nd Annual American
Water Resource Conference, American Water Resource
Association, Champaign, IL, pp. 365-373.

Davis, J.T., E. Flotz, and W.S. Blakemore, 1970,£ejralia
marcescens.  a  pathogen of increasing  clinical
importance: J. American Medical Association, v. 214,
no. 12, pp. 2190-2192.

Davis, S.N., 1986,  Reply to the discussion by James
F. Quinlan of ground water tracers: Ground Water, v.
24, no. 3, pp. 398-399.

Davis, S.N. and H.W. Bentley, 1982, Dating groundwater,
a  short review: in Nuclear and chemical dating
techniques, L.  Currie (ed.): ACS  Symposium Series
176, pp. 187-222.

Davis, S.N., D.J. Campbell, H.W. Bentley, and T.J.
Flynn, 1985, Introduction to ground-watertracers:(NTIS
PB86-100591). Also published under the title Ground
Water Tracers  in NWWA/EPA Series, National Water
Well Association, Dublin, OH, EPA 600/2-85/022.

Davis, S.N., G.M. Thompson, H.W. Bentley, and G.
Stiles, 1980, Ground water tracers—a short review:
Ground Water, v. 18, pp. 14-23.

Dole, R.B., 1906, Use of fluorescein in the study of
underground waters: U.S.  Geological Survey Water
Supply and Irrigation Paper 160, pp. 73-85.

Dreiss, S.J., 1989, Regional scale transport in a karst
aquifer 1. component separation  of  spring flow
hydrographs: Water Resources Research, v. 25, no. 1,
pp. 117-125.
                                                90

-------
Drew, DP. and D.I. Smith, 1969, Techniques for the
tracing  of  subterranean  drainage:    British
Geomorphological ResearchGroup Tech. Bulletin, v. 2,
pp. 1 -36.

Dunn, J.R., 1957, Stream tracing: National Speleological
Society Mid-Appalachian Region, v. 2, pp. 1-7.    |

Edwards, A.J. and P.L. Smart, 1988a, Solute interaction
processes: an annotated bibliography: Turner Desigps,
Sunnyvale, CA (61  references).

Edwards,  A.J. and P.L.  Smart,  1988b, Contaminant
transport modeling: an annotated bibliography: Turper
Designs, Sunnyvale, CA  (58 references).

Ellis, J.,  1980,  A convenient parameter for tracing
leachate from sanitary landfills: Water Research, v.
no. 9, pp. 1283-1287.
[14.
Everts, C.J., R.S. Kanwar, E.C.Alexander, Jr., and SJ.C.
Alexander, 1989, Comparison of tracer mobilities under
laboratory and field conditions: J. Environ. Quality
18, pp. 491-498.
 v.
Ferronsky, V.I. and V.A. Polyakov, 1982, Environmental
isotopes in the hydrosphere: Wiley-lnterscience, N(ew
York.

Feuerstein, D.L. and R.E. Selleck, 1963, Fluorescent
tracers for dispersion measurements: J. ASCE August,
pp.1-21.

Field, M.S., R.G. Wilhelm, and J.F. Quinlan, 1990, Use
and toxicity of dyes fortracing ground water (Abstract):
Ground Water, v. 28, no. 1, pp. 154-155 [The complete
paper is available from  Malcolm S. Field,  Exposure
Research Group, Office of Research and Development,
U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency  (RO-669),
Washington, DC 20460].

Fried, J.J.,  1975, Groundwater  pollution: theory,
methodology modeling, and practical rules: Elsevier,
New York.

Fritz, P. and J.C. Fontes (eds.), 1980, Handboolj of
environmental isotope geochemistry, vol. 1, the terres rial
environment: Elsevier, New York.

Fritz, P. and J.C. Fontes (eds.), 1986, Handbook of
environmental isotope geochemistry, vol. 2, the terres rial
environment, Part B:  Elsevier, New York.

Gann, E.E. and E.J. Harvey, 1975, Norman Creel.. _
source of recharge to Maramec Spring, Phelps County,
Missouri: J. Res. U.S. Geological Survey, v.3, no. 1,pp.
99-102.

Gardner, G.D. and R.E. Gray, 1976, Tracing subsurface
flow in karst regions using artificially colored spores:
Association of Engineering Geologists Bulletin, v. 13,
pp. 177-197.

Caspar, E.  (ed.),  1987, Modern trends in tracer
hydrology: CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL.

Caspar, E. and M. Oncescu, 1972, Radioactive tracers
in  hydrology: Elsevier Scientific Publishing Co., New
York.

Gat, J. R., 1971, Comments on the stable isotope method
in  regional  ground water  investigations: Water
Resources Research, v. 7, pp. 980-993.

Glasstone, S., 1967, Sourcebookon atomic energy: D.
Van Nostrand Company, Inc., Princeton, NJ.

Glover, R.R., 1972, Optical brighteners—a new water
tracing reagent: Trans. Cave Research Group (Great
Britain), v. 14, no. 2, pp. 84-88.

Gospodaric,  R. and P. Habic(eds.), 1976, Underground
water tracing: investigations in Slovenia 1972-1975:
Institute Karst Research, Ljubljana, Jugoslavia.

Grisak, G.E.  and J.F. Pickens, 1980a, Solute transport
through fractured media 1. the effect of matrix diffusion:
Water Resources Research, v. 16, no. 4, pp. 719-730.

Grisak, G.E.  and J.F. Pickens, 1980b, Solute transport
through fractured media 2. column study of fractured till:
Water Resources Research, v. 16, no. 4, pp. 731-739.

Grisak, G.E., J.F. Pickens, F.J. Pearson, and J.M.Bahr,
1983, Evaluation of ground water tracers for nuclear
fuel waste management  studies: Report Prepared by
Geologic Testing Consultants, Ltd. for Atomic Energy of
Canada,  Ltd., Whitesheil  Nuclear Research
Establishment, Pinawa, Manitoba.

GCiven, O., R.W. Falta, F.J. Molz, and J.G.  Melville,
1985, Analysis and interpretation of single-well tracer
tests in stratified aquifers: Water Resources Research,
V.  21, pp. 676-684.

Gtiven, O., R.W. Falta, F.J. Molz, and J.G.  Melville,
1986, A simplified analysis of two-well tracer tests in
stratified aquifers: Ground Water, v. 24, pp. 63-71.

Gunn, J., 1982,  Water tracing in Ireland: a review with
                                                91

-------
special references to the Cuillcagh karst: Irish
Geography, v. 15, pp. 94-106.

Halevy, E.  and A. Nir, 1962,  The determination of
aquifer parameters with the aid of radioactive tracers: J.
Geophysical Research, v. 61, pp. 2403-2409.
Hendry, M.J., 1988, Do isotopes have a place in ground-
water studies?: Ground Water, v. 26, no. 4, pp. 410-415.

Hoehn, E. and H.J.R. von Gunten, 1989, Radon in
groundwater: a tool to assess infiltration from surface
waters to aquifers: Water Resources Research, v. 25,
no. 8, pp. 1795-1803.

Hubbard, E.F., F.A. Kilpatrick, L.A. Martens, and J.F.
Wilson, Jr., 1982, Measurement of time of travel and
dispersion in streams by dye tracing: U.S. Geological
Survey TWI3-A9.

llgenfrrtz, E.M., F.A. Blanchard, R.L. Masselink, and
B.K. Panigrahi, 1988, Mobility and effects in liner clay of
fluorobenzene tracer and leachate: Ground Water, v.
26, no. 1, pp. 22-30.

International Atomic  Energy Agency  (IAEA), 1963,
Proceedings of the symposium on radioisotopes in
hydrology (Tokyo): International Atomic Energy Agency,
Vienna.

International Atomic  Energy Agency  (IAEA), 1967,
Radioisotopes  in industry  and geophysics—a
symppsium  (Prague): International Atomic Energy
Agency, Vienna.

International Atomic  Energy Agency  (IAEA), 1966,
Isotopes  in hydrology: Proc.* of the Symposium on
Isotopes  in Hydrology (Vienna), International Atomic
Energy Agency, Vienna.

International Atomic  Energy Agency  (IAEA), 1970,
Isotope hydrology (1970): Proc. of the Symposium on
Use of Isotopes  in Hydrology (Vienna). International
Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna.

International Atomic  Energy Agency  (IAEA), 1974,
Isotope techniques in groundwater hydrology (1970):
Proc. Vienna Symposium, International Atomic Energy
Agency, Vienna.

International Atomic  Energy Agency  (IAEA), 1978,
Isotope  hydrology  (1978):  Proc.  International
Symposium on  Isotope  Hydrology (Neuherberg).
International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna.

Jones, W.K., 1984, Dye tracers in karst areas: National
Speleological Society Bulletin, v. 36, pp. 3-9.
Kaufman,  W.J., and G.T.  Orlob, 1956, Measuring
ground-water movements with radioactive and chemical
tracers: Am. Waterworks Ass. J., v. 48, pp. 559-572.

Keely, J.F., 1984,  Optimizing pumping strategies for
contaminant studies and remedial actions: Ground Water
Monitoring Review, v. 4, no. 3, pp. 63-74.

Kenoyer, G.J., 1988, Tracer test analysis of anisotropy
in hydraulic conductivity of granular aquifers: Ground
Water Monitoring Review, v. 8,  no. 3, pp. 67-70.

Keswick, B.H., D. Wang, and C.P. Gerba, 1982, The
use of microorganisms asground-watertracers:areview:
Ground Water, v. 20, no. 2, pp. 142-149.

Keys, W.S.  and  R.F.  Brown,  1978, The use  of
temperature  logs to trace the  movement of injected
water: Ground Water, v. 16, no. 1, pp. 32-48.

Keys, W.S. and L.M. MacCary, 1971, Application of
borehole geophysics to water-resources investigations:
U.S. Geological Survey TWI 2-E1.

Kilpatrick, F.A. and E.D.  Cobb,  1985, Measurement of
discharge using tracers: U.S. Geological Survey TWI 3-
A16.

Klotz, D., H. Moser, and P. Trimborn, 1978, Single-
borehole techniques, present status and examples of
recent applications: in Proc.  IAEA  Symp. Isotope
Hydrology, Part 1, International Atomic Energy Agency,
Vienna, pp. 159-179.

Knuttson, G.,  1968,  Tracers for ground-water
investigations: in Ground Water Problems, E. Eriksson,
Y. Gustafsson, and K. Nilsson (eds.), Pergamon Press,
London.

LaMoreaux, P.E., B.M. Wilson, and B.A. Mermon (eds.),
1984, Guide to the hydrology of  carbonate rocks:
UNESCO Studies and Reports in Hydrology, No. 41.

LaMoreaux, P.E., E. Prohic, J. Zoetl, J.M.  Tanner, and
B.N. Roche (eds.), 1989, Hydrology of limestone
terranes: annotated bibliography of carbonate rocks,
volume 4: International Association of Hydrogeologists
Int. Cont. to  Hydrogeology Volume 10. Verlag Heinz
Heise GmbH., Hannover, West Germany.

Leap, D.I., 1985, A simple, two-pulse tracer method for
estimating steady-state ground water parameters;
Hydrological Science and Technology: Short Papers,
v.1, no. 1, pp. 37-43.

Lenda, A.  and A.  Zuber. 1970. Tracer dispersion in
                                                92

-------
groundwater experiments: in Proc. lAEASymp. Isotobe
Hydrology, International Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna,
pp. 619-641.

Lewis, D.C., G.J. Kriz, and R.H. Burgy, 1966, Tracer
dilution sampling  technique  to  determine  hydraijlic
conductivity of fractured  rock: Water  Resources
Research, v. 2, pp. 533-542.

Marmion, D.M., 1984, Handbook of U.S. colorants for
foods,  drugs,  and  cosmetics, 2nd ed.:  Wile|y-
Interscience, New York.

Mather, J.D., D.A. Gray, and D.G. Jenkins, 1969, The
Use of Tracers to Investigate the Relationship betwe 3n
Mining Subsidence and Groundwater Occurrence)of
Aberdare, South Wales: J. Hydrology, v. 9, pp. 136-154.

Mattson, W., 1929, The laws of soil colloidal behavior I:
Soil Science, pp. 27-28 and pp. 71-87.

Mazor, E.,  1972, Paleotemperatures  and other
hydrological parameters deduced from noble gases
dissolved in ground waters, Jordan Rift Valley, Israel:
Geochimica et Cosmochimica Acta, v. 36, pp. 1321-
1336.

Mclaughlin, M.J., 1982, A review of the use of dyes as
soil  water tracers, water S.A.: Water Research
Commission, Pretoria, South Africa, v. 8, no. 4, pp. 196-
201.

Meinzer, O.E., 1932, Outline of methods for estimating
ground water supplies: U.S. Geological Survey Water-
Supply Paper 638-C, pp. 126-131.

Milanovia,  P.T., 1981, Karst Hydrogeology: Water
Resource Publications, Littleton, CO.

Molz, F.J., J.G. Melville, O. Guven, R.D. Crocker and
K.T. Matteson, 1985, Design and performance of sine le-
well  tracer tests at the Mobile site: Water Resources
Research, v. 21, pp. 1497-1502.

Molz, F.J., O. Guven, J.G. Melville, and J.F. Keely,
1986, Performance and analysis of aquifer tracer tests
with implications for contaminant transport modeling:
(NTIS PB86-219086)  EPA 600/2-86/062.

Molz, F.J., O. Guven, J.G. Melville, and J.F. Keely,
1987, Performance and analysis of aquifer tracer tejsts
with implications for contaminant transport modeling—
a project summary: Ground Water, v. 25, pp. 337-341.
Molz, F.J., O. Guven, J.G. Melville, J.S. Nohrstedt, and
J.K. Overholtzer, 1988,  Forced-gradient tracer tests
and inferred hydraulic conductivity distributions at the
Mobile site: Ground Water, v. 26, no. 5, pp. 570-579.

Moser, H.  and W.  Rauert, 1985, Determination of
groundwater movement by  means of environmental
isotopes: State of the Art: in Relation of Groundwater
Quantity and Quality, F.X. Dunin, G. Matthess, and R.A.
Gras  (eds.), Int. Ass. Hydrological Sciences no. 146,
pp. 241-257.

Mull,  D.S., T.D. Lieberman, J.L. Smoot, and  LH.
Woosely, Jr., 1988, Application of dye-tracing techniques
fordetermining solute-transport characteristics of ground
water in karstterranes: Region 4, Atlanta, GA, EPA904/
6-88-001.

Murray, J.P., J.V. Rouse, and A.B. Carpenter, 1981,
Groundwatercontamination by sanitary landfill leachate
and domestic wastewater in carbonate terrain: principle
source diagnosis, chemical transport characteristics
and design implications: Water Research, v. 15, no. 6,
pp. 745-757.

Naymik, T.G.  and M.E. Sievers, 1983, Ground-water
tracer experiment (II)  at  Sand Ridge State  Forest,
Illinois: ISWS Contract Report 334, Illinois State Water
Survey, Champaign, IL.

Pickens, J.F., R.E. Jackson, K.J. Inch, and W.F.Merritt,
1981, Measurement of distribution coefficients using
radial injection dual-tracer tests: Water Resource
Research, v. 17, pp. 529-544.

Quinlan, J.F., 1986, Discussionof "Ground watertracers"
by Davis and others (1985) with emphasis on  dye
tracing, especially in karst terranes: Ground Water, v.
24, no. 2, pp. 253-259 and v. 24, no. 3, pp. 396-397
(References).

Quinlan, J.F., 1989, Ground-water monitoring  in karst
terranes: Recommended  Protocols and  Implicit
Assumptions: EMSL, Las Vegas, NV, EPA 600/X-89/
050.

Quinlan, J.F., R.O. Ewars, and M.S. Fiel,  1988, How to
use ground-water tracing to "prove" that leakage of
harmful  materials from a site in karst terrane  will not
occur: in Proc. Second Conf. on Environmental Problems
in Karst Terranes and Their Solutions (Nashville, TN),
National Water Well Association, Dublin,  OH, pp. 265-
288.

Rahe, T.M., C. Hagedorn, E.L. McCoy, and G.G. Klihg,
1978, Transport of antibiotic-resistant Escherichia Coli
through western Oregon hill slope soils under conditions
of saturated flow: J. Environ. Quality, v. 7, pp. 487-494.
                                                93

-------
Rainwater, K.A., W.R. Wise, and R.J. Charbeneau,
1987, Parameterestimationthrough groundwatertracer
tests: Water Resources  Research, v. 23, pp. 1901-
1910.

Repogle, J.A., L.E. Myers, and K.J. Brus, 1966, Flow
measurements with fluorescent tracers: J. Hydraulics
Division ASCE, v. 92, pp. 1-15.

Reynolds, E.R.C, 1966, The percolation of  rainwater
through soil demonstrated by fluorescent dyes: J. Soil
Science, v. 17, no.  1, pp. 127-132.

Robertson, J.B., 1969, Behavior of Xenon-133 gas after
injection underground: U.S. Geological Survey Open
File Report ID022051.

Rogers, A.S.,  1958, Physical behavior and geologic
control of radon in mountain streams: U.S. Geological
Survey Bulletin 1052E, pp. 187-211.

Rorabaugh, M.I., 1956, Ground water in Northeastern
Louisville, Kentucky: U.S. Geological  Survey Water-
Supply Paper 1360-B, pp. 101-169.

Sauty, J.P., 1978, Identification of hydrodispersive mass
transfer parameters in  aquifers by interpretation of
tracer experiments in radial converging or  diverging
flow (in French): J.  Hydrology, v. 39, pp. 69-103.

Sauty, J.P., 1980, An analysis of hydrodispersive transfer
in aquifers: Water Resources Research, v. 16, no. 1, pp.
145-158.

Slichter, C.S., 1902,  The motions of underground waters:
U.S.  Geological Survey  Water-Supply and Irrigation
Paper 67.

Slichter, C.S., 1905, Field measurement of the rate of
movement of  underground  waters: U.S. Geological
Survey Water-Supply and Irrigation Paper 140, pp. 9-
34.

Schmotzer, J.K., W.A. Jester, and R.R. Parizek, 1973,
Groundwater tracing with post sampling activation
analysis: J. Hydrology, v. 20, pp. 217-236.

SDC & AATC (Society of Dyers & Colorists and American
Association of Textile Chemists), 1971-1982, Color
Index, 3rd ed.

Smart, C.C., 1988a, Quantitative tracing of the Maligne
Karst System, Alberta, Canada: J. Hydrology, v. 98, pp.
185-204.

Smart, C.C., 1988b, Artificial tracer techniques for the
determination of the structure of conduit aquifers: Ground
Water, v. 26, no. 4, pp. 445-453.

Smart, P.L, 1976, Catchment delimitation in karst areas
by the use of qualitative tracer methods: in Proc. 3rd Int.
Symp. of Underground Water Tracing, Bled, Yugoslavia,
pp. 291-298.

Smart, P.L., 1984, A review of the toxicity of twelve
fluorescent dyes  used for water tracing:  National
Speleological Society Bulletin 46, pp. 21-33.

Smart, P.L., 1985, Applications of fluorescent dye tracers
in the planning and hydrological appraisal of sanitary
landfills: Q. J. Eng. Geol. (London) v. 18, pp. 275-286.

Smart, P.L. and I.M.S. Laidlaw, 1977, An evaluation of
some fluorescent dyes  for water tracing: Water
Resources Research, v. 13, no. 1, pp. 15-33.

Smart, P.L. and D.I. Smith, 1976,  Water tracing in
tropical regions; the use of fluorometric techniques in
Jamaica: J. Hydrology, v. 30, pp. 179-195.

Smart, P.L., F. Whitaker, and J.F. Quinlan, 1988, Ground
water tracing:  An annotated  bibliography: Turner
Designs, Sunnyvale, CA.

Smoot, J.L., D.S.  Mull,  and T.D.  Liebermann, 1987,
Quantitative dye tracing techniques for describing the
solute transport characteristics of ground-water flow in
karst terran: in 2nd Multidisciplinary Conf. Sinkholes
and the  Environmental Impacts of  Karst (Orlando),
Beck, B.F. and W.L. Wilson (eds.), Balkema, Accord,
MA, pp. 29-35.

Sorey, M.L., 1971, Measurement of vertical ground-
water velocity from temperature profiles in wells: Water
Resources Research, v. 7, no. 4, pp. 963-970.

Stiles, C.W., H.R. Crohurst, and G.E. Thomson, 1927,
Uranin test to  demonstrate  pollution of  wells: in
Experimental Bacterial and Chemical Pollution of Wells
via Ground Water and the Factors Involved, U.S. Public
Health Service Hygienic Laboratory  Bulletin No.  147,
pp. 84-87.

Sugisaki,  R., 1969, Measurement  of  effective  flow
velocity of groundwater by means of dissolved gases:
American Jour. Science, v. 259, pp. 144-153.

Sweeting, M.M.,  1973, Karst  landforms: Columbia
University Press, New York.

Symposium on Underground Water Tracing (SUWT),
1966,1stSUWT(Graz, Austria): inSteirischesBeitraege
zur Hydrogeolgie Jg. 1966/67.
                                                94

-------
Symposium on Underground Water Tracing (SUWT),
1970, 2nd SUWT (Freiburg/Br., West Germarjy):
Published in Steirisches Beitraege zur Hydrogeolgie
22(1970)5-165, and Geologisches Jahrbuch, Reihe^C.
2(1972):1-382.
Symposium on Underground Water Tracing (SUWT),
1976,3rd SUWT (Ljubljana-Bled, Yugoslavia), published
by Ljubljana Institute for Karst Research: Volume 1
(1976), 213 pp., Volume 2 (1977) 182 pp.  See allso
Gospodaric and Habic (1976).

Symposium on Underground Water Tracing (SUWT),
1981, 4th  SUWT (Bern, Switzerland): in Steirisches
Beitraege zur Hydrogeologie 32(1980):5-100;
33(1981 ):1-264;  and Beitraege zur  Geologie  der
Schweiz—Hydrologie  28  pt.1(1982):1-236;  28
pt.2(1982):1-213.

Symposium on Underground Water Tracing (SUWT),
1986,5th SUWT (Athens, Greece), published by Institute
of Geology and Mineral Exploration, Athens.

Taylor, T. A. and J. A. Dey, 1985, Bibliography of borehole
geophysics as applied to ground-water hydrology, U.S.
Geological Survey Circular 926.

Tennyson, L.C. and C.D. Settergren, 1980, Percolate
water and bromide  movement  in the root  zone of
effluent irrigation sites: Water Resources Bulletin, v. 16,
no. 3, pp. 433-437.

Tester, J.W., R.L. Bivens, and  R.M. Potter, 1982
Interwell tracer analysis of a hydraulically fractu-ed
graniticgeothermal reservoir: Soc. Petroleum Engineers
Jour. v. 8,  pp. 537-554.

Theis, C.V., 1963, Hydrologie phenomena affecting the
use of tracers in timing ground-waterflow: in Proc. IAEA
Tokyo Symp. Radioisotopes in Hydrology, International
Atomic Energy Agency, Vienna,  Austria (as cited by
Davis and others, 1985).

Thompson,  G.M.  and   J.M.  Hayes,   19J79
Trichlorofluoromethane  in ground water, a  possible
tracer and indicator of ground-water age:  Water
Resources Research, v. 15, no. 3, pp. 546-554.
Thompson, G.M., J.M. Hayes, and S.N. Davis, 19^4,
Fluorocarbon  tracers  in hydrology: Geophysical
Research Letters, v. 1, pp. 177-180.

Thrailkill, J., and others, 1983, Studies in dye-tracing
techniques and karst hydrogeology: Univ. of Kentucky,
Water Resources Research Center Research Report
No. 140.
van der Leeden,  F., 1987,  Geraghty  & Miller's
groundwater bibliography, 4th ed: Water Information
Center, Plainview, New York.

Vogel, J.C., L. Thilo, and M. Van Dijken,  1974,
Determination of groundwater recharge with tritium:
Jour. Hydrology, v. 23, pp. 131-140.

Vuataz, F.D., J. Stix, F. Goff, and C.F. Pearson, 1984,
Low-temperature geothermal potential  of  the  Ojo
Caliente warm spring area in Northern New Mexico: Los
Alamos  National Laboratory  Publication  LA-10105-
OBES/VC-666.

Wagner, O.R., 1977, The use of tracers in diagnosing
interwell reservoir heterogeneities: J.  Petroleum
Technology, v. 11, pp. 1410-1416.

Wiebenga,  W.A., W.R. Ellis, B.W. Seatonberry,  and
J.T.G. Andrew, 1967,  Radioisotopes as ground-water
tracers: Jour. Geophysical Research, v. 72, pp. 4081-
4091.

Wilkowske, C.J., J.A. Washington II, W.J. Martin,  and
R.E.Ritts,Jr.,1970,  Serratiamarcescens:Biochemical
characteristics,  antibiotic susceptibility and clinical
significance: Jour. American Medical Association, v.
214, no. 12, pp. 2157-2162.

Wilson, Jr. J.F., E.D. Cobb, and F.A. Kilpatrick, 1986,
Fluorometricproceduresfordyetracing (Revised): U.S.
Geological Survey TWI3-A12.  (updates report with the
same title by J.F. Wilson, Jr. published in 1968).

Wood, W.W. and G.G. Ehriich,  1978, Use of baker's
yeast to trace microbial movement in ground water:
Ground Water, v. 16, no. 6, pp. 398-403.
                                               95

-------
                                           Chapter 5
                     INTRODUCTION TO AQUIFER TEST ANALYSIS
Cone of Depression

Both wells and springs can be ground-water supply
sources.  However, most springs with  yields large
enough to meet municipal,  industrial,  and large
commercial and agricultural needs are located only in
areas underlain by cavernous limestones and lava
flows. Most ground-water needs, therefore, are met by
withdrawals from wells.

An  understanding of  the  response of aquifers to
withdrawals from wells is importantto an understanding
of ground-water hydrology. When withdrawals start and
water is removed from storage in the well, the water
level in the well begins to decline. The head in the well
falls below the level in the surrounding aquifer,  and
water begins to move from the aquifer into the well. As
pumping continues, the water level in the well continues
to decline, and the rate of flow into the well from the
aquifer continues to increase  until the  rate of inflow
equals the rate of withdrawal.

When water moves from an aquifer into a well, a cone
of depression is formed (Figure 5-1). Because water
must converge on the  well from all directions and
because the area through which the flow occurs
decreases toward the well, the hydraulic gradient must
get steeper toward the well.

There are several important differences between cones
of depression in confined  and unconfined aquifers.
Withdrawals from an unconfined aquifer cause drainage
of waterfrom the rocks, and the watertable declines as
the cone of depression forms (Figure 5-1 a). Because
the storage coefficient of an unconfined aquifer equals
the specific yield of the aquifer material, the cone of
depression expands very slowly. On the other hand,
dewatering of the  aquifer  results in a decrease in
transmissivity, which causes, in turn, an increase in
drawdown both in the well and in the aquifer.

Withdrawals from a confined aquifer cause a drawdown
in artesian pressure  but normally  do not  cause a
dewatering of the aquifer  (Figure 5-1 b). The water
withdrawn from a confined aquifer is derived from
expansion of the water and compression of the rock
                 Land surface
                                         Limits of cone
                                         Of dtpr«S$ion
         Lond surface
                                                           Pottnliom.tr
/ ' ' • 1 ^N. \\
/ / -' I- ^\\
£''

Drawdown \
\
Confining bed
''x////////^ /// y*/
Confined
a—
o — — -^^^
aquifer
'^
X" Cone of
/ ^~~~ depression
f
///s//////////.'/

o
	 : 	 _o
	 o
	 — o
Confining bed
                           (a)                                      (b)

 Figure 5-1. Cone of Depression in an Unconfined and a Confined Aquifer
                                               96

-------
skeleton of the aquifer. The small storage coefficient of
confined aquifers results in a rapid expansion of the
cone of  depression.  Consequently, the mutual
interference of expanding cones around adjacent wells
occurs more rapidly in confined aquifers than it does in
unconfined aquifers.

SOURCE OF WATER DERIVED FROM WELLS

Both the economic development and the effect!/e
management of any ground-water system require an
understanding of the system's response to withdrawals
from wells. The first concise description of the hydrologic
principles involved in this response was presented by
Theis(1940).
Theis pointed out that the aquifer's response
withdrawals from wells depends on:
to
  1.   The rate of expansion of the cone of depression
      caused by the withdrawals, which depends on
      the transmissivity and the storage coefficient of
      the aquifer.
  2.   The distance to areas in which the rate of wa er
      discharging from the aquifer can be reduced.
  3.   The distance to recharge areas in which the rate
      of recharge can be increased.

Over a sufficiently long period of time and under natural
conditions—that is, before the start of withdrawals
discharge from every ground-water system equals t ie
recharge to it (Figure 5-2a). This property is expressed
by the equation:

     natural discharge (D)= natural recharge (R)

In the eastern  United States  and in the more humid
areas in the West, the amount and distribution
of
precipitation are such that the period of time over which
discharge and recharge balance may be less than a
year or, at most, a few years. In the drier parts of tie
country—that is, in the areas that generally receive less
than about 500 mm of precipitation annually—the peripd
over which discharge and recharge balance may be
several years or even centuries. Over shorter periods of
time,  differences between discharge and  recharge
involve changes in ground-water storage.  When
discharge exceeds recharge, ground-water storage (JS)
is reduced by an amount (AS) equal to the differenpe
between discharge and recharge:

                 D = R + AS   (1)

Conversely, when recharge exceeds discharge, grouqd-
water storage is increased:
                 D = R - AS   (2)
When withdrawal through a well begins, water is removed
from storage in the well's vicinity as the cone of
depression develops (Figure 5-2b). Thus, the withdrawal
(Q) is balanced by a reduction in ground-water storage:

                  Q = AS   (3)

As the cone of depression expands outward from the
pumping well,  it may reach an area where water is
discharging from the aquifer. The hydraulic gradient will
be reduced toward the discharge area, and the rate of
natural discharge will decrease (Figure 5-2c). To the
extent that the decrease in  natural discharge
compensates for the pumpage, the rate at which water
is being removed from storage also will decrease, and
the rate of expansion of the cone of depression will
decline. If and when the reduction in natural discharge
(AD) equals the rate of withdrawal (Q), a new balance
will be established in the aquifer. This balance is
represented as:

                (D-AD)+Q=R   (4)

Conversely, if the cone of depression expands into a
recharge area rather than into a natural discharge area,
the hydraulic gradient between the recharge area and
the pumping well  will  increase.  If,  under natural
conditions, more water was available in the recharge
area than the aquifer could accept (the condition that
Theis referred to as rejected recharge), the increase in
the gradient away from the recharge area will permit
more recharge to occur, and the rate of growth of the
cone of depression will decrease. If the increase in
recharge (AR) equals the rate of withdrawal (Q), a new
balance willbe established in the aquifer, and expansion
of the cone of depression will cease. The new balance
is represented as:

               D + Q = R + AR   (5)

In  the eastern   United States, gaining  streams are
relatively closely spaced, and areas in which rejected
recharge occurs are relatively unimportant. In this region,
the growth of cones of depression first commonly causes
a reduction in natural discharge. If the pumping wells
are near a stream or if the withdrawals are continued
long enough, ground-water discharge to a stream may
be stopped entirely in the vicinity of the wells, and water
may be induced to move from the stream into the aquifer
(Figure  5-2d).  The tendency in  this region is for
withdrawals to change discharge areas into recharge
areas.This consideration is important where the streams
contain brackish or polluted water or where the
streamf low is committed or required for other purposes.

In summary, withdrawal of ground water through awell
reduces the water in storage in the source  aquifer
                                               97

-------
                        '' SX - _   Land  surface    "^r.
                ^^T-   -^>,.  Lang  sunace     ^   -r~~^—r^-^.     Stream-
                •:£:\Water:.fable "'••:••.•.•.•.•.••.•.... . . .-	     —    r*   "$5r^_     /
                ''. ••' v.'-: ^.-T-" T-rvT- T^-~!-T- "'.^T'-'T ~>T f.—.-r.'T'.—1—''—•^~r~r^r^-~S'^$~T^
                  Unconfined -aquifer.'-.'.
                ~_Confinking-_ bed^r_
                 Discharge (D) = Recharge (R)
                 Withdrawal (Q)= Reduction in storage (As)

                 Withdrawal (0) = Reduction  in  storage (As) + Reduction  in  discharge (Ao)
                 Withdrawal (0) = Reduction  in  discharge (Ao) + Increose in recharge (AR)
Figure 5-2. Source of Water Derived From Wells
                                                  98

-------
during the growth of the cone of depression. If the co ne
of depression ceases to expand, the rate of withdrawal
is being balanced by a reduction in. the rate of natujral
discharge and (or) by an increase in the rate of recharge.
Under this condition,                           (
                Q = AD + AR   (6)

AQUIFER TESTS
^
Determining the yield of ground-water systems and
evaluating the movement  and fate of ground-water
pollutants require, among other information, knowledge
of:

    1.  The position and  thickness of aquifers and
       confining beds.
    2.  The transmissivity and storage coefficient
  of
       the aquifers.
    3.  The hydraulic characteristics of the confining
       beds.                                  I
    4.  The position  and  nature of the aquifer
       boundaries.                            i
    5.  The location and amounts of  ground-water
       withdrawals.
    6.  The locations, kinds, and amounts of pollutants
       and pollutant practices.

Acquiring knowledge of these factors requires bpth
geologic and hydrologic investigations. One of the most
important hydrologic studies involves analyzing  tjie
change, with time, in water levels (or total heads) in an
aquifer caused by withdrawals through wells. This type
of study is referred to as an  aquifer test and, in most
cases, includes pumping a well at a constant rate for a
period ranging from several hours to several days ahd
measuring the change in water level  in observation
 Figure 5-3. Map of Aquifer Test Site
wells located at different distances from the pumped
well (Figure 5-3).

Successful aquifer tests require, among other things:

    1.  Determination of the prepumping water-level
       trend (that is, the regional trend).
    2.  A carefully controlled constant pumping rate.
    3.  Accurate water-level measurements made at
       precise times during both the drawdown and
       the recovery periods.

Drawdown is the difference between the water level at
any time during the test and the position at which the
water level would have been if withdrawals had not
started. Drawdown is very rapid at first. As pumping
continues and the cone of depression expands, the rate
of drawdown decreases (Figure 5-4).

The recovery of the water level under ideal conditions is
a mirror image of the drawdown. The change in water
level during the recovery period is the same  as  if
withdrawals had continued at the same rate from the
pumped  well but, at the moment of pump  cutoff,  a
recharge well had begun recharging water at the same
point and at the same rate. Therefore, the recovery of
the water level is the difference  between the actual
measured level and the projected pumping level (Figure
5-4).
                                                                                           15  16
      Figure 5-4.  Change of Water Level in Well B

      In addition to the constant-rate aquifer test mentioned
      above, analytical methods also have been developed
      for several other types of aquifer tests. These methods
      include tests in which the rate of withdrawal is variable
      and tests that involve leakage of water across confining
      beds into confined aquifers. The analytical methods
      available also permit analysis of tests conducted on
      both vertical wells and horizontal wells or drains.

      The  most commonly used method of aquifer-test-data
                                                99

-------
analysis—that for a vertical well pumped at a constant
rate from an aquifer not affected by vertical leakage and
lateral boundaries—is discussed below. The method of
analysis requires the use of a type curve based on the
values of W(ji) and l/u, listed in Table 5-1. Preparation
and use of the type curve are covered in the following
discussion.
    3.  The discharging  well penetrates the entire
       thickness of the aquifer, and its diameter is
       small in comparison with the pumping rate, so
       that storage in the well is negligible.

These assumptions are most nearly met by confined
aquifers at sites remote from their boundaries. However,
             10
                 7.69   5.88    5.00   4.00
                                          3.33
                                                2.86
                                                      2.5
                                                            2.22
                                                                  2.00
                                                                         1.67    1.43
                                                                                     1.25
                                                                                           1.11
10 '
1
10
10*
10'
104
10'
10*
\tf
10"
109
10'°
10"
10"
10"
10M
0.219
1.82
4.04
6.33
8.63
10.94
13.24
15.54
17.84
20.15
22.45
24.75
27.05
29.36
31.66
33.%
0.135
1.59
3.78
6.07
8.37
10.67
12.98
15.28
17.58
19.88
22.19
24.49
26.79
20.09
31.40
33.70
0.075
1.36
3.51
5.80
8.10
10.41
12.71
15.01
17.31
19.62
21.92
24.22
26.52
28.83
31.13
33.43
0.049
1.22
3.35
5.64
7.94
10.24
12.55
14.85
17.15
19.45
21.76
24.06
26.36
28.66
30.97
33.27
0.025
1.04
3.14
5.42
7.72
10.02
12.32
14.62
16.93
19.23
21.53
23.83
26.14
28.44
30.74
33.05
0.013
.91
2.%
5.23
7.53
9.84
12.14
14.44
16.74
19.05
21.35
23.65
25.%
28.26
30.56
32.86
0.007
.79
2.81
5.08
7.38
9.68
11.99
14.29
16.59
18.89
21.20
23.50
25.80
28.10
30.41
32.71
0.004
.70
2.68
4.95
7.25
;9.55
11.85-
14.15
16.46
18.76
21.06
23.36
25.67
27.97
30.27
32.58
0.002
.63
2.57
4.83
7.13
9.43
11.73
14.04
16.34
18.64
20.94
23.25
25.55
27.85
30.15
32.46
0.001
.56
2.47
4.73
7.02
9.33
11.63
13.93
16.23
18.54
20.84
23.14
25.44
27.75
30.05
32.35
0.000
.45
2.30
4.54
6.84
9.14
11.45
13.75
16.05
18.35
20.66
22.%
25.26
27.56
29.87
32.17
0.000
.37
2.15
4.39
6.69
8.99
11.29
13.60
15.90
18.20
20.50
22.81
25.11
27.41
29.71
32.02
o.ono
.31
2.03
4.26
6.55
8.R6
11.16
13.46
15.76
18.07
20.37
22.67
24.97
27.28
29.58
31.88
0.000
.26
1.92
4.14
6.44
8.74
11.04
13.34
15.65
17.95
20.25
22.55
24.86
27.16
29.46
31.76
       Exjmp!«: When 1/u-IOxKT1, W(o)-0.219; when 1/U-3.33X102, W(o)-5.23.
Table 5-1. Selected Values of W(u) for values of tu
Analysis of Aquifer-Test Data

In 1935, C.V.Theis of the NewMexico Water Resources
District of the U.S. Geological Survey developed the
first equation to include time of pumping as a factor that
could be used to analyze the effect of withdrawals from
a well. The Theis equation permitted, for the first time,
determination  of the  hydraulic characteristics of  an
aquifer before the development of new steady-state
conditions resulting from pumping.  This capacity is
important because, under most conditions, a new steady
state cannot be developed or,  if it can, many months or
years may be required.

In the development of the equation, Theis  assumed
that:

    1 . The transmissivity of the aquifer tapped by the
       pumping well is constant during the test to the
       limits of the cone of depression.
    2. The waterwithdrawn from the aquifer is derived
       entirely from storage and is discharged
       instantaneously with the decline in head.
if certain precautions are observed, the equation also
can  be used to analyze tests of unconfined aquifers.
The forms of the Theis equation used to determine the
transmissivity and storage coefficient are

           T=(Q x W(u))/(4 x K x s)    (7)

           S=(4 x T x t x u)/r2         (8)

where T is transmissivity, S is the storage coefficient, Q
is the pumping rate, s is drawdown, t is time, r is the
distance from the pumping well to the observation well,
W(u) is the well function of u, which equals
-.577216 - logeu + u - u2/(2x2!) + u3/(3x3!) - u4/(4x4!)

           and u=(r2S)/(4Tt).
                                              (9)
The Theis equation is in a form that cannot be solved
directly. To overcome this problem, Theis devised a
convenient graphic method of solution that uses a type
curve (Figure 5-5). To apply this method, a data plot of
drawdown versus time (or drawdown versus t/r2) is
                                                 100

-------
matched to the type curve of W(u) versus l/u (Figure 5-
6). At some convenient point on the overlapping part of
the sheets containing the data plot and type curve,
values of s, t (ort/r2), W(u), and l/u are noted (Figure 5-
6). These values are then substituted in the equations,
which are solved for T and S, respectively.

A Theis type curve of W(u) versus l/u can be prepared
    a
    I
     O.I
     0.01 I	1 ' i it.ill	1 	ill  I  I I mill  I i I.lull  I  i	i
       O.I       I       10   \i  10 *      IO3      10


                    t, in minutes
                      I
Figure 5-5. Theis Type Curve
                     t, in minuta*
                 10     \0*      10s     10*
10
1
"5
i
O.I
0.01
0


7


Ml
Po
1
/
1
tth
int
/
y


-

M4IC
W»l '
% =

' 1.6

DATA'
O-- 1 § K\
'" '==i

r i
>OfiOll4ATES
Om
fnfn

PLOT
5 min"1
m
=\


Typr Curve



1 10 10' IO5 IO4
                                            '0 £
                                             •I
                                             E
 Figure 5-6. Data Plot of Drawdown Versus Time
 Matched to Theis Type Curve
 from the values given in Table 5-1. The data points a e
 plotted on logarithmic graph paper—that is, graph papejr
 having logarithmic divisions in both the x and y directions.

 The dimensional units of transmissivfty (T) are L2t, where
 L is length and t is time in days. Thus, if Q is in cubic
meters per day and s is in meters, T will be in square
meters per day. Similarly, if T is in square meters per
day, t is in days, and r is in meters, S will be dimensionless.

Traditionally, in the United States, T has been expressed
in units of gallons per day per foot. The common
practice now is to report transmissivity in units of square
meters per day or square feet per day. If Q is measured
in gallons per minute, as is still normally the case, and
drawdown is measured in feet, as is also normally the
case, the equation is modified to obtain T in square feet
per day as follows:

   T=(QxW(u))/(4ns) = (gal/min) x (1.440 min/d) x
          (ft3/7.48 gal) x 1 /ft x W(u)/(4x7c)       (10)
or
                                                         T(inft2d-1) = (15.3xQxW(u))/s    (11)
(when Q is in gallons per minute and s is in feet). To
convert square feet per day to square meters per day,
divide by 10.76.

The storage coefficient is dimensionless. Therefore, if T
is in square feet per day, t is in minutes, and r is in feet,
then,

S=(4Ttu)/r2=(4/1) x ft2/d x min/ft2 x d/1440 min    (12)
                                                    or
                                                                  S=(Ttu)/360r2)   (13)
 (when T is in square feet per day, t is in minutes,
and r is in feet).

Analysis of aquifer-test data using the Theis equation
involves plotting both the type curve and the test data on
logarithmic graph paper. If the aquifer and the conditions
of the test satisfy Theis' assumptions, the type curve
has the same shape as the cone of depression along
any line radiating away from the pumping well and the
drawdown graph at any point in the cone of depression.

There are  two considerations for  using the Theis
equation for unconfined aquifers. First, if the aquifer is
relatively fine grained, water is released slowly over a
period of hours or days, not instantaneously with the
decline in head. Therefore, the value of S determined
from a short-period test may be too small.

 Second, if the pumping rate is large and the observation
well is near the pumping well, dewatering of the aquifer
may  be  significant,  and the assumption that  the
                                                 101

-------
 transmissivity of the aquifer is constant is not satisfied.
 The effect of dewatering of the aquifercan be eliminated
 with the following equation:
                 s'=s-s2/(2b)  (14)
where s is the observed drawdown in the unconfined
aquifer, b isthe aquif erthickness, and s' is the drawdown
thatwould have occurred if the aquifer had been confined
(that is, if no dewatering had occurred).

To determine the transmissivity and storage coefficient
of an unconfined aquifer, a data plot consisting of s
versus t (ort/r2) is matched with the Theis type curve of
W(u) versus 1/u. Both s and b must be in the same
units, either feet or meters.

As noted above, Theis assumed in the development of
his equation that the discharging well penetrates the
entire thickness of the aquifer. However, because it is
not always possible, or necessarily desirable, to design
a  well that  fully penetrates the aquifer  under
development, most discharging wells are open to only
a part of the aquifer that they draw from. Such partial
penetration creates vertical flow in the vicinity of the
discharging well  that may  affect drawdowns in
observation wells located relatively close  to the
discharging well. Drawdowns in observation wells that
are open to the  same zone as the discharging well will
be larger  than  the drawdowns in wells at the same
distance from the discharging well but open to other
zones. The possible effect of  partial penetration on
drawdowns must be considered  in the analysis of
aquifer-test data. If aquifer-boundary  and other
conditions permit, the  problem can be avoided by
locating observation wells beyond the zone in which
vertical flow exists.

Time-Drawdown Analysis

The Theis equation is only one of several methods that
have been developed for the analysis of aquifer-test
data. Another somewhat more convenient method,
was developed from the Theis equation byC. E.Jacob.
The greater convenience of the Jacob method derives
partly from its  use of semilogarithmic  graph paper
instead of the  logarithmic paper  used  in the Theis
method, and from the fact that, under ideal conditions,
the data plot along a straight line rather than along a
curve.

However, it is essential to note that, whereas the Theis
equation  applies at all times and places (if the
assumptions are met), Jacob's method applies only
under certain  additional conditions. These conditions
 also must be satisfied in orderto obtain reliable answers.
 To understand the limitations of Jacob's method, the
 changes that occur in the cone of depression during an
 aquifer test must be considered. The changes that are
 of concern involve both the shape of the cone and the
 rate of drawdown. As the cone of depression migrates
 outward from a pumping well, its shape (and, therefore,
 the hydraulic gradient at different points in the cone)
 changes. We can refer to this condition as unsteady
 shape. At the  start of withdrawals, the entire cone of
 depression has an unsteady shape (Figure 5-7a). After
 a test has been underway for some time, the cone of
 depression begins to assume a relatively steady shape,
 first at the pumping well and then gradually to greater
 and greater distances (Figure 5-7b).  If withdrawals
 continue long enough for increases in recharge and /or
 reductions in dischargeto balance the rate of withdrawal,
 drawdowns cease, and the cone of depression is said
 to be in a steady state (Figure 5-7c).
                                    River,
    Unsteady shape

          Steady shape

    wxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx/xxxxxx>
"mm

90—\
                                     River
Figure 5-7. Development of Cone of Depression
from Start of Pumping to Steady-State

The Jacob method is applicable only to the zone in
which steady-shape conditions prevail or to the entire
cone only after steady-state conditions have developed.
For practical purposes,  this condition is  met when
u=(r2S)/(4Tt) is equal to or less than about 0.05.
                                                102

-------
Substituting this value in the equation for u and solving
fort, we can determine thaJime at which steady-shap|e
conditions develop at the outermost observation we
Thus,
             tc = (7,200 r2S)/T   (15)
where tc is the time, in minutes, at which steady-shape
conditions develop, r is the distance from the pumping
well, in feet (or meters), S is the estimated storag'e
coefficient (dimensionless), and T is the  estimated
transmissivity, in square feet per day (or square meters
per day).

After  steady-shape conditions have  developed, th3
drawdowns at an observation well begin to fall along a
straight line on semilogarithmic graph paper, as Figure
5-8 shows. Before that time, the drawdowns  plot below
the extension of the straight line. When atime-drawdow i
graph is prepared, drawdowns are plotted on the verticeJ
(arithmetic)  axis  versus time on  the horizontl
(logarithmic) axis.
                             one log cycle, to is the time at the point where the
                             straight line intersects the zero-drawdown line, and r is
                             the distance from the pumping well to the observation
                             well.

                             These equations are in consistent units. Thus, if Q is in
                             cubic meters per day and s is in meters, T is in square
                             meters per day. S  is dimensionless, so that if r is  in
                             square meters per day, then r must be in meters and to
                             must be in days.

                             It is still common practice in the United States to express
                             Q in gallons per minute, s in feet, t in minutes.T in feet,
                             and T in square feet per day.  The equations can be
                             modified for direct substitution of these units as follows:

                             T=(2.3Q)/(4jiAs) = (2.3/47C) x (gal/min) x (1,440 min/d)
                                x (ft3/74.8 gal) x (1/ft)                      (18)

                                            T=(35Q)/s   (19)
                                                             TIME-DRAWDOWN   GRAPH
DRAWDOWN (S), METERS
M o CO °* ik ro c
- j / ^^pf^^Cl^
A 5 = 1.

-
r- 75 m
" Q - 9.3 m 3
ffl = 2.5x
t i 1 1 1 1 1 1
2.I.L 1 —
III *—


min~' ( 24!
I0~5 d
i i i 1 1 1 1 1

^- *^
— Log
cycle

55 gol nr
i f i

~~~S-



.in-



*"""* — -~-H^
^*— -

)
1 i i I I 1 1 1

Drowd
/^meoso
**' " ' i ^-^M
« — *.


i i i i 1 1 ii
"
own
rements
-

-
i i i i K u
        10-5
10-4
10-5          10-2
        TIME,  IN   DAYS
O.I
10
Figure 5-8. Time-Drawdown Graph

The slope of the straight  line  is proportional to the   where T is in square feet per day, Q is in gallons per
pumping rate and to the transmissivity. Jacob derived   minute and s is in feet, and
thefollowingequationsfordeterminationof transmissivity
and storage coefficientfromthetime-drawdowngraphs

             T = (2.3Q)/(4irAs)   (16)

              S = (2.25Tt0)/r2


where Q is the pumping rate, As is the drawdown across
                                 S=(2.25Ttrj/r2) = (2.25/1) x (ft2/d) x (min/ft2)
                                        x (d/1,440 min)                    (20)

                                           S=(Ttrj)/(640r2)   (21)
                             where T is in square feet per day, to is in minutes, and
                             r is in feet.
                                                103

-------
Distance-Drawdown Analysis

Aquifer tests should have at least three observation
wells located at different distances from the pumping
well  (Figure 5-9). Drawdowns measured at the same
time in these wells can be  analyzed with the The is
equation and type curve to determine the  aquifer
transmissivity and storage coefficient.
                           DISTANCE-DRAWDOWN GRAPH
     Observation  wells

           C     B   A
Pumping well
D to V
^^™«««i
>o l
	 -
•=s-^.
[ t

,
>

^
— r-
\
—
i
/Static water level
j^~~^ Pumping water
/ level
Confining bed
Confined I
aquifer i
Confining bed
Datum Plane
Figure 5-9.  Desirable Location for Observation
Wells in Aquifer Tests
After the test  has been underway long enough,
drawdowns in the wells  also can be analyzed by the
Jacob method, e'rtherthrough the use of a time-drawdown
graph using data from individual wells or through the
use of a distance-drawdown graph using simultaneous
measurements in all of the wells. To determine when
sufficient time has elapsed, see the discussion of time-
drawdown analysis earlier in this chapter.

In the Jacob distance-drawdown method, drawdowns
are plotted on the vertical axis versus distance on the
horizontal axis (Figure 5-10). If the aquifer and test
conditions  satisfy the Theis assumptions and the
limitation of the Jacob method, the drawdowns measured
at the same time in different wells should plot along a
straight line (Figure 5-10).

The slope of the straight line is proportional to the
pumping rate and to the transmissivity. Jacob derived
the  following equations for determination of the
transmissivity and storage coefficient from distance-
drawdown graphs:
U
UJ 2
U.
5 4
i 6
* fl
o 8
o
I-
o
t'4doys
- '0 = 30 , 0
-
-
- ^
^
... ,.,,.
s/min ( 70 v
30 ft
H





C ^^



^
-f^ AJ
Log
cycl*



^J-
=2.4 ft _

-
-
-
10        100      1000
 DISTANCE,  IN FEET
10,000
                      Figure 5-10. Distance-Drawdown Graph



                                   T = (2.3Q)/(2rcAs) (22)

                                    S . (2.25Tt)/r02  (23)

                      where Q is the pumping rate, As is the drawdown across
                      one log cycle, t is the time at which the drawdowns were
                      measured, and r0 is the distance from the pumping well
                      to the point where the straight line intersects the zero-
                      drawdown line.

                      These equations are in consistent units. For the
                      inconsistent units still in relatively common use in the
                      United States, the equations should be  used in the
                      following forms:

                                     T = (70Q)/As  (24)

                      where T is in square feet per day, Q is in gallons per
                      minute, and s is in feet and

                                   S = (Tt)/(640r02)  (25)

                      where T is in square feet per day, t is in minutes, and TQ
                      is in feet.

                      The distance TO does not indicate the outer limit of the
                      cone  of  depression. Because  nonsteady-shape
                      conditions exist in the outer part of the cone, before the
                      development of steady-state conditions, the Jacob
                      method does not apply to that part. If the Theis equation
                      were used to calculate drawdowns in the outer part of
                      the cone, it would be found that they would plot below
                      the straight line. In other words, the measurable limit of
                      the cone of depression is beyond the distance r0.

                      If the straight line of the distance-drawdown graph is
                                                104

-------
extended inward to the radius of the pumping well, ihe
drawdown indicated at that point is the drawdown in the
aquifer outside of the well. If the drawdown inside the
well is found to be greater than the drawdown outside,
the difference is attributable to well loss. (See Sing'le-
Well Tests.)

The  hydraulic conductivities and,  therefore, the
transmissivities of aquifers may be different in different
directions. These differences may cause differences' in
drawdowns measured at the same time in observation
wells located at the same distances but in different
directions fromthe discharging well. Where this condition
exists, the distance-drawdown method may yield
satisfactory resultsonly where three ormore observation
wells are located in the same direction but at different
distances from the  discharging well.

Single-Well Tests

The most useful aquifer tests are multiple-well tesis,
which are those that include water-level measuremerjts
in observation wells. It also is possible to obtain useful
data from production wells, even where observation
wells are not available. These single-well tests  may
consist of pumping  a well at a single constant rate, or at
two or more different but constant rates or, if the well is
not equipped with a pump, by instantaneously introducing
a known volume of water into the well. The following
discussion is limited to tests involving a single constant
rate.
                                                  In order to analyze the data, the nature of the drawdown
                                                  in a pumping well must be understood. The total
                                                  drawdown (st) in most, if not all, pumping wells consists
                                                  of two components (Figure 5-11). One is the drawdown
                                                  (53) in the aquifer, and the other is the drawdown (sw)
                                                  that occurs as water moves from the aquifer into the well
                                                  and up the well bore to the pump  intake. Thus, the
                                                  drawdown in most  pumping wells is greater than the
                                                  drawdown in the aquifer at the radius of the pumping
                                                  well.

                                                  The total drawdown (st) in  a pumping well can be
                                                  expressed in the form of the following equations:
                                                                         83 +
                                                                                 (26)
                                                  where 83 is the drawdown in the aquifer at the effective
                                                  radius of the pumping well, sw is well loss, Q is the
                                                  pumping rate, B is a factor  related to the hydraulic
                                                  characteristics of the aquifer and the length of the
                                                  pumping period,  and C is  a factor related to the
                                                  characteristics of the well.

                                                  The factor C is normally considered to be constant, so
                                                  that, in a constant rate test, CQ2 is also constant. As a
                                                  result, the well loss (s\w) increases the total drawdown
                                                  in the pumping well but does not affect the rate of
                                                  change in  the drawdown with time.  It  is,  therefore,
                                                  possible to analyze drawdowns in the pumping well with
                                                              Land surface
                                                       Static potentiometric surface 	
                                                             Confining bed.
                                                  7*7 /////// / / ///////
Figure 5-11. Two Components of Total Drawdown in a Pumping Well
                                                105
                                                         aquifer
                                                 I ^-Effective well radius
                                                             Confining bed
                                                                         /////

-------
 the Jacob time-drawdown method using semilogarithmic
 graph paper. (See "Time-Drawdown Analysis" earlier in
 this section.) Drawdowns are plotted on the arithmetic
 scale versus time on the logarithmic scale (Figure 5-
 12), and transmissivity is determined from the slope of
 the straight line by using the following equation:

              T = (2.3Q)/(4;rAs)  (27)

 Where well loss is present in the pumping well, the
 storage coefficient cannot be determined by extending
 the straight line to the line of zero drawdown. Even
 where well loss is not present, the determination of the
 storage coefficient from drawdowns in a pumping well
 likely will be subject to large error because the effective
 radius of the well  may differ  significantly from the
 nominal radius.
       s,- Aquifer loss

       sw- Well  loss

      	I
i
                 I
                                             c
                        2
                        a
   0        I        Z        3        4
                Pumping Rate, in
             Cubic Meters per Minute
                                          10
0


1 2
£ 3
1 4
(«
S
S


6

7
«.
X. 1 1 1 1 1 III;
\ ^v^
\ ^*^ ,
\
XV-v:



—


—

i i i i i M i
i i i i i 1 1 1
	 ».
"o
"^x *.//
/" ^x^
I I I I I ni


—
o ^ ~
^•vf » T^V0**
**^^/\ « *** to • i ^^
***"*** f*> . "^ -^
•• — 1 log cycle — —t-




I i i i i ii i
-f" /0 <:
"v*.
*»

**^*
i i i i nil
    O.I
                   I             10
                     Tims, In Minutes
                                              100
Figure 5-12. Time-Drawdown Plot With and Without
Weil Loss

In this equation, drawdown in the pumping  well is
proportional to the  pumping rate. The factor B in the
aquifer-loss term (BQ) increases with time of pumping
as long as water is being derived from storage in the
aquifer. The factor C in the well-loss term (CQ2) is a
constant if the characteristics of  the well  remain
unchanged, but, because the pumping rate in the well-
losstermissquared.drawdownduetowelllossincreases
rapidly as the pumping rate is increased. The relation
between  pumping rates and drawdown in a pumping
well, if the well was pumped for the same length of time
at each rate, is shown in Figure 5-13. The effect of well
loss on drawdown in the pumping well is important both
for  pumping wells  data analysis, and  supply well
design.

Well Interference

Pumping  awellcausesadrawdowninthe ground-water
                                                  Figure 5-13. Relation of Pumping Rate and
                                                  Drawdown
 level in the surrounding area. The drawdown in water
 level forms a conical-shaped depression in the water
 table or potentiometric surface which is referred to as a
 cone of depression. (See "Cone of Depression" at the
 beginning of this section.) Similarly a well through which
 water is injected into an aquifer (that is a recharge or
 injection well) causes a buildup in ground-water level in
 the form of a conical-shaped mound.

 The drawdown (s) in an aquifer caused by pumping at
 any point in the aquifer is directly proportional  to the
 pumping rate (Q) and the length of time (t) that pumping
 has been in progress and is inversely proportional to the
 transmissivity (T), the storage coefficient (S), and the
 square of the distance (r2) between the pumping well
 and the point. This is represented by the equation:

              s = (Q,t)/T,S,.r2  (28)

 Where pumping wells are  spaced  relatively  close
 together, pumping of one will cause a drawdown in the
 others. Because drawdowns are additive, the total
 drawdown in a pumping well is equal to its own drawdown
 plus the drawdowns caused  at its location by other
 pumping wells (Figures 5-14 and 5-15). Thedrawdowns
 in pumping wells caused  by withdrawals from other
 pumping wells are referred to as well interference. As
 Figure 5-15 shows, a divide forms in the potentiometric
 surface (or the watertable in the case of an unconfined
 aquifer) between pumping wells.

At any point in an aquifer affected by both a discharging
well and a recharging well, the change in water level is
                                               106

-------
                                 Well
                                  A
        Wei
         B
    Cone  .of
    depression  with
    well A pumping
                                   xxx xxxxx
Figure 5-14. Cone of Depression When Well A 01
       \

XXXXX X X ^
                                                        Static Potentiometric  surface
                              Cone of
f-C     depression  if well B  were
  ^^•^ pumping  and well A were idle
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
                                                                    Confined  aquifer
 B is Pumped
                                                                            Cone of
                                                                   depression  with both
                                                                   well A and  B pumping
      XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
                                                                    Confined  aquifer
                                              xxxxxxxxxx
                               XXX x x x x x x xx
Figure 5-15. Total Drawdown Caused by Overlapping Cones of Depression
equal to the difference between the drawdown and the
buildup. If the rates of discharge and recharge are the
same and if the wells are operatedonthe same schedule,
the drawdown  and the buildup will cancel midway
between the wells and the water level at that point will
remain unchanged from the static level (Figure 5-16
(See "Aquifer Boundaries" below.)
From the functional equation above, it can be seen tha
    the maximum pumping rate is directly proportional to
    the available drawdown. Forconfined aquifers, available
    drawdown is normally considered to be the distance
    between the prepumping water level and the top of the
    aquifer. Forunconfined aquifers, available drawdown is
    normally considered  to be  about 60 percent of the
    saturated aquifer thickness.
 ,   Where the pumping rate of a well is such that only a part
in the absence of well interference, drawdown in an  of the available drawdown is utilized, the only effect of
aquifer at the effective radius of a pumping well i 3  well interference is to lower the pumping level and,
directly proportional to the pumping rate. Conversely!,  thereby, increase pumping costs. In the design of a well
                                              107

-------
                         Discharging
                            well
         Land surface
                                              Pump
                            Recharging
                               well
         Static	pojentiometric
           	
            Drawdown
surface
V—
„  .£v_^=r
                                         "Buildup
                                         Confined aquifer
                                           <	1   <-
Figure 5-16.  Cones of Depression and Buildup Surrounding Discharging and Recharging Wells
field, the increase in pumping cost must be evaluated
along with the cost of the additional waterlines and
powerlines that must be installed if the spacing of wells
is increased to reduce well interference.

Because well interference  reduces  the available
drawdown, it also reduces the maximum yield of a well.
Well interference is, therefore, an important matter in
the design of well fields where it is desirable for each
well to be pumped at the largest possible rate. For a
group of wells pumped at the same rate and on the
same schedule, the well interference caused by any
well on another well in the group is inversely proportional
to the square of the distance between the two wells (r^).
Therefore, excessive well interference  is avoided  by
increasing the spacing between wells and by locating
the wells along a line rather than in a circle or in a grid
pattern.

Aquifer Boundaries

One of the assumptions inherent in the Theis equation
(and in most other fundamental ground-water flow
equations) is that the aquiferto which it is being applied
is infinite in extent. Obviously, no such aquifer exists on
Earth. However, many aquifers are areally extensive,
and, because  pumping  will not  affect recharge  or
discharge significantly for many  years, most water
pumped isfromground-waterstorage; as a consequence
water levels must decline for many years. An excellent
example of such an aquifer is that underlying the High
Plains from Texas to South Dakota.
                 All aquifers are vertically  and  horizontally bounded.
                 Vertical boundaries may include the water table, the
                 plane of contact between each aquiferand each confining
                 bed, and the plane marking the lower limit of the zone
                 of interconnected openings—in other words, the base
                 of the ground-water system.

                 Hydraulically, aquifer  boundaries are of two types:
                 recharge boundaries and impermeable boundaries. A
                 recharge boundary is a boundary along which flow lines
                 originate.  Under  certain  hydraulic conditions,  this
                 boundary will serve as a source of recharge to the
                 aquifer. Examples of recharge boundaries include the
                 zones of contact between an aquifer and a perennial
                 stream that completely penetrates the aquifer or the
                 ocean.

                 An impermeable boundary is a boundary that flow lines
                 do not cross. Such boundaries exist where aquifers
                 terminate against  impermeable material. Examples
                 include the contact between an aquifer composed of
                 sand and a laterally adjacent bed composed of clay.

                 The  position  and  nature of  aquifer boundaries are
                 criticalto manyground-waterproblems, including those
                 involved in the movement and fate of pollutants and the
                 response of aquifers to withdrawals.  Depending on the
                 direction of the hydraulic gradient, a stream, for example,
                 may be eitherthe source orthe destination of a pollutant.

                 Lateral boundaries within the cone of depression have
                 a  profound effect on the response of an aquifer to*
                                               108

-------
 withdrawals. To analyze or predict the effect of a late ral
 boundary, it is necessary to "make" the aquifer appear
 to be of infinite extent by using imaginary wells and the
 theory of images. Figures 5-17 and 5-18 show, in b|>th
 plan view and profile, how  image wells are used to
 compensate hydraulically  for the effects of  both
 recharging and impermeable boundaries.  (See "Well
 Interference" earlier in this section.)

 The key  feature of a  recharge  boundary is that
 withdrawals from the aquifer do not produce drawdow ns
 across the boundary. A perennial  stream  in intimate
 contact with an aquifer represents a recharge boundary
 because pumping from the aquiferwill induce recharge
 from the stream. The hydraulic effect of a recharge
 boundary can be duplicated by assuming that a
 recharging image well is present on the side of the
 boundary opposite the real discharging well. Water is
 injected into the image well at the same rate and on t he
 same schedule that water is withdrawn from the real
 well. In the plan view in Figure 5-17, flow lines originate
 at the boundary and equipotential lines parallel tfie
 boundary at the closest point to the pumping (real) well.
                  REAL SYSTEM

-=5S^S
HYDRAULIC
Diaclwrfna c
rrr^L

CONTERP
}
r I
Unconfci* cqulkt
ART OF REAL SYSTEM
gtfn9
^ ' i N "y*"

      PLAN VIEW OF THE HYDRAULIC CONTERPART
                                         I
Figure 5-17. Recharge or Positive Boundary
 The key feature of an impermeable boundary is that no
 watercan cross it. Such a boundary, sometimes termed
 a "no-flow boundary," resembles a divide in the water
 table orthe potentiometric surface of a confined aquifer.
 The effect of an impermeable boundary can be duplicated
 by assuming that adischarging image well is present on
 the side of the boundary opposite the real discharging
 well. The image well withdraws water at the same rate
 and on the same schedule as the real well. Flow lines
 tend to parallel   an impermeable boundary and
 equipotential lines intersect it at a right angle.

 The image-well theory is an essential tool in the design
 of well fields near aquifer boundaries.  To minimize
 lowering water levels, apply the following conditions:

    1. Pumping wells should be located parallel to and
    as close as possible to recharging boundaries.
    2. Pumping wells should be located perpendicular
    to and  as  far as  possible  from  impermeable
    boundaries.

 Figures 5-17 and 5-18 illustrate  the effect of single
                                                                   REAL SYSTEM
                                                     p«>«ril>
                                                                               t»*o<*
                                                      HYDRAULIC CONTERPART OF REAL SYSTEM


                                                                 JSS=. !  +&SF  tr*Sai
                                                     _~~ ~"  ccnfingn
    PLAN VIEW OF THE HYDRAULIC CONTERPART
Figure 5-18. Discharge or Negative Boundary
                                               109

-------
boundaries and  show how their hydraulic effect is
compensated forthrough the use of single image wells.
It is assumed in these figures that other boundaries are
so remote that they have a negligible effect on the areas
depicted. At many places, however, pumping wells are
affected by two or more boundaries. One example is an
alluvial aquifer composed of sand and gravel bordered
on one side by a perennial stream (a recharge boundary)
and on the other by impermeable bedrock  (an
impermeable boundary).

Contrary to first impression, these boundary conditions
cannot be satisfied with only a recharging image well
and a discharging image well. Additional image wells
are required, as Rgure 5-19 shows, to compensate for
the effect of the image wells on the opposite boundaries.
Because each additional image well affects the opposite
boundary, it is necessary to  continue adding image
wells until their distances from the boundaries are so
great that their effect becomes negligible.
CROSS SECTION THROUGH AQUIFER

"N



land surface
Satertabte
y^
Pumping w^ll
— =^:
Aquifer
Sin am

I
tonlinlng material


PLAN VIEW OF BOUNDARIES. PUMPING WELLS,
AND IMAGE WELLS

Impermeable
boundary ^
yBecharg*
V boundary
1 — » — n-t — a — l-xl — a — {-A -—H — I-A4 — B — h«H
- *
^ v
o o • • p
... .. .. y,
Dfcchatglng knag*
W*H
it + — - *
« • o o •
•\ «1 '% «» '»
we!
•4 	 BwoaMlo Infinity Punping Repeat* lo Hin»y 	 ».
Ml
BALANCING OF WELLS ACROSS BOUNDARIES
krp*«nMbl*
boundary
rw
1
.
I>
\.

1
Racharo*
boundary
PW
i,
>4
''
ti
Ij
'«
''
Figure 5-19. A Sequence of Image Wells


Tests Affected By Lateral Boundaries

When an aquifer test is conducted near one of the
lateral boundaries of an aquifer, the drawdown data
depart from the Theis type curve and from the initial
straight line produced  by the Jacob method. The
hydraulic effect of lateral boundaries is assumed, for
analytical convenience,  to be due to the presence of
other wells. {See "Aquifer Boundaries" earlier in this
section.) Thus,  a recharge boundary has the same
effect on drawdowns as a recharging image well located
across the boundary and at the same distance from the
boundary as the real well. The image well is assumed
to operate on the same schedule and at the same rate
as the real well. Similarly, an impermeable boundary
has the  same effect on drawdowns as a discharging
image well.

To analyze aquifer-test data affected by eithera recharge
boundary or an impermeable  boundary, the  early
drawdown data in the observation wells nearest the
pumping well must not be affected by the boundary.
These data, then, show only the effect of the real well
and can be used to determine the transmissivity (T) and
the storage coefficient (S) of the aquifer. (See "Analysis
of Aquifer-Test Data" and "Time-Drawdown Analysis"
earlier in this section.)  In the  Theis method; the type
curve is matched to the early data and a "match point"
is selected to calculate the values of T and S.  The
position of the type curve in the region where the
drawdowns depart from the type curve is traced onto the
data plot (Figures 5-20 and 5-21). The trace of the type
curve shows where the drawdowns would have plotted
if there had been no boundary effect. The differences in
drawdown between the  data plot and the trace of the
type curve show the effect of an aquifer boundary. The
direction in which the drawdowns depart from the type
curve—that isinthedirectionofeithergreaterdrawdowns
or lesser drawdowns—shows the type of boundary.

Drawdowns greater than those defined by the trace of
the type  curve indicate the presence of an impermeable
boundary because, as noted above, the  effect of such
boundaries  can be duplicated with an imaginary
discharging well. Conversely, a recharge boundary
causes drawdowns to be less than those defined by the
trace of  the type curve.

In the Jacob  method, drawdowns begin to plot along a
straight  line after the test has been underway for some
time (Figures 5-22 and  5-23). The time at which the
straight-line plot begins depends on the values of T and
S of the aquifer and on the  square of the distance
between the observation well and the pumping well.
(See "Time-Drawdown Analysis" earlier in this section.)
Values of T and S are determined from the first straight-
line segment defined by the drawdowns  after the start
of the aquifertest. The slope of this straight line depends
on the transmissivity (T) and on the pumping rate (Q).
If a boundary is present, the drawdowns will depart from
the first  straight-line segment and begin to fall along
another  straight line.

According to image-well theory, the effect of a recharge
boundary can be duplicated by assuming that water is
                                               110

-------
     10
  UJ
  5
  g 0.1
  rx
  o
   0.01
                  TIME. IN MINUTES
              10       10'      10-      10-
                                             10-
                               ..--V	
                                 'Traco of Theis
                                   type r.urve
Figure 3-20. Theis Time-Drawdown Plot Showing
a Negative Boundary
    10
                 TIME, IN MINUTES
             1O       10'      10*      10'
                                           10
w
en
UJ
i-
uu
5
 Q

 I
   0.01
                ^
                              curve
Figure 5-21. Theis Time-Drawdown Plot Showing
a Positive Boundary
0
w
£ 0.7
K
UJ
2 o 4
Z
Z~ 0 6
R 0.8
£ 1.0
Q
1.2
; 	 i





TIME. IN
0 1
-. -j-
^%>x
%



MINUTES
CX 	 j

N%
X^^
X ^*Vi
k
X

o_i_ 	 _io



k" ~"
s/
i
Figure 5-22. Jacob Time-Drawdown Plot Showing
a Negative Boundary
                  TIME. IN MINUTES
                10         10'        10'       10'
0
or:
uj 0.2
UJ
5 0.4
Z
§
o

<
0 '-0
1 7
~*~~X^V"~
* )Sv
— —" 	 —

— , 	 „







f
1'
X
x^
	 --N,.







•—*-—-"—'

_ 	

	
'""N
"""•





Figure 5-23. Jacob Time-Drawdown Plot Showing
a Positive Boundary
injected into the aquifer through a recharging image
well at the same rate that water is being withdrawn from
the real well. It follows, therefore, that, when the full
effect of a recharge boundary is felt at an observation
well, there will be no further increase in drawdown and
the water level in the well will stabilize. At this point in
both the Theis and the Jacob methods, drawdowns plot
along a  straight line having a constant  drawdown.
Conversely, an impermeable boundary causes the rate
of drawdown to increase.  In the Jacob method, as a
result, the drawdowns plot along a new straight line
having twice the slope as the line drawn through the
drawdowns that occurred  before the  boundary effect
was felt.

The Jacob method should be used carefully when it is
suspected that an  aquifer test may be affected by
boundary conditions. In many cases, the boundary
begins to affect drawdowns before the method is
applicable, the result being that T and S values
determined from the data are erroneous and the effect
of the boundary is not identified. When it is suspected
that  an aquifer test may be affected by boundary
conditions, the data should, at least initially, be analyzed
with the Theis method.

The  position and the nature of many boundaries are
obvious. For example, the most common recharge
boundaries are streams and lakes; possibly, the most
common impermeable boundaries are the bedrock
walls of alluvial valleys. The hydraulic distance to these
boundaries, however, may not be obvious. A stream or
lake may penetrate only a short distance into an aquifer
and  their bottoms may be underlain by fine-grained
material  that hampers movement of water into the
aquifer. Hydraulically, the boundaries formed by these
surface-water bodies will appear to be farther from the
                                               111

-------
pumping well than the near shore. Similarly, if a small
amount of water moves across the bedrock wall of a
valley, the  hydraulic distance to the  impermeable
boundary will be greater than the distance to the valley
wall.

Fortunately, the hydraulic distance to boundaries can
be determinedf rom aquifer-test data analysis. According
to the Theis equation, for equal drawdowns caused by
the real well  and the image  well (in  other  words,
 if sr - Sj), then

                 i"r/tr « 1 /{i  (29)

where rj-isthe distance from the observation well to the
real well, n is the distance from the observation well to
the image well, t is the time at which a drawdown of s is
caused by the real well at the observation well, and tj is
the time at which a drawdown of sj is caused by the
image well at the observation well.

Solving this equation for the distance to the image well
from the observation well, results in

                ri - rr(tj/tr)1/2  (30)

The image well is located at some point on a circle
having a radius of n centered on the observation well
(Rgure  5-24). Because the image well is the same
distance from the boundary as the real well,  the
boundary must be located halfway between the image
well and the pumping well (Figure 5-24).
                          Circle along which the
                              image well is
                                   located
                Circle along which a point
                on  the boundary is
                located
Figure 5-24. Method for Determining Location of
Boundary
If the boundary is a stream or valley wall or some other
feature whose physical position is obvious, its "hydraulic
position" may be determined by using data from a single
observation well. If, on the other hand, the boundary is
the wall of a buried valley or some other feature not
obvious from the land surface, distances to the image
well from three observation wells may be needed to
identify the position of the boundary.

Tests Affected By Leaky Confining Beds

In the development of the Theis equation for aquifer-
test data  analysis, it was assumed that all water
discharged from  the  pumping well was derived
instantaneously from storage in the  aquifer. (See
"Analysis of Aquifer-Test Data" earlier in this section.)
Therefore,  in the case of a confined aquifer, at least
during the period of the test, the movement of water into
the aquifer across its overlying and underlying confining
beds is negligible. This assumption is satisfied by many
confined aquifers. Many other aquifers,  however, are
bounded by leaky  confining beds that transmit water
into the aquifer in response to the withdrawals and
cause  drawdowns  to differ from those that would be
predicted by the Theis equation. The analysis of aquifer
tests conducted on these  aquifers requires the use of
the methods that have been developed for semiconfined
aquifers (also referred to in ground-water literature as
"leaky aquifers").

Figures 5-25, 5-26, and 5-27 illustrate three different
conditions commonly encountered inthe field. Figure 5-
25 shows  a confined aquifer  bounded by thick,
impermeable confining  beds. Water initially pumped
from such an aquifer is from storage, and aquifer-test
data can be  analyzed by using the Theis equation.
Figure 5-26 shows an aquifer overlain by a thick, leaky
confining bed that, during an aquifertest, yields significant
waterfrom storage. The aquiferinthiscase may properly
be referred to  as  a semiconfined aquifer, and  the
release of  water from storage in the confining bed
affects the  analysis of aquifer-test data. Figure 5-27
shows an aquifer overlain by a thin confining bed that
does not yield significant waterfrom storage but that is
sufficiently permeable  to transmit water from  the
overlying unconfined aquifer  into the semiconfined
aquifer. Methods have been devised largely by Madhi
Hantush and C. E. Jacob, 1955, foruse in analyzing the
leaky conditions illustrated in Figures 5-26 and 5-27.

These  methods use matching data plots with type
curves, as the Theis method does. The major difference
is that, whereas the Theis method  uses  a single type
curve, the methods applicable to semiconfined aquifers
involve "families" of type curves, each curve of which
reflects different  combinations of the hydraulic
characteristics of the aquifer and the confining beds.
                                                112

-------
             Land surface >
                          Discharging welk
                                                                           Confined
                                                                            aquifer
Figure 5-25. Nonleaky Artesian Conditions
             Water table,
                UncorTfined aquTfeF  " ~
                                           ^fer^^^H—^^Z;;!:.
-------
     10-'     1     10    w    \
-------
express W(u)/4rc as a constant. To do so  it  is first
necessary to determine values for u and, using a table
of values of u  (or l/u)  and W(u),  determine Ihe
corresponding values for W(u).

Values of u are determined by substituting inthe equat on
values of  T,  S,  r, and t that are representative of
conditions in the area.  For example, assume that in an
area under investigation and for which a large number
of values of specific capacity are available, that:
  1.   The principal aquifer is confined and aquifer tests
      indicate that it has a storage coefficient of about
      2 x IO"4 and a transmissivity of about 11,000 ft2
      d'1.
  2..  Most supply wells are 8 in. (20 cm) in diameter
      (radius 0.33 ft).
  3.   Most values of specific capacity are based on i 2-
      hour well acceptance tests (t = 0.5 d).

  Substituting these values, results in

  u =  (r2S)/(4Tt) = (0.33 ft)2 x (2 x 10'4)/(4x(11,000 ^t
      d'1)x0.5d                             (37)

  u =  (2.22 x 10'5ft2)/(2.2 x 104ft2) = 1.01 x10'9

A table of values of W(u) for values of l/u is contained in
Table 5-1. Therefore the value of u determined above
must  be converted to l/u which ,is 9.91 x I08 and this
value  is used to determine the value of W(u). Valuesj of
W(u) are given for values of l/u of 7.69 x IO8 and 10 x IO8
but not for 9.91 xlO8. However the value of 10 is close
enough  to 9.91 for  the purpose of estimating
transmissivity from specific capacity. From Table 5-1
we determine that, for a value of l/u of 10 x IO8, the val je
of W(u) is 20.15. Substituting this value we find t"ie
constant W(u)/4p to be  1.60.

In using the equation, modified as necessary to fit tie
conditions in an  area, it is important to recognize its
limitations. Among the most important factors that affect
its use are the accuracy with which the thickness of t ie
zone supplying water to the well can be estimated, t ie
magnitude of the well loss in comparison with drawdo\ vn
in the  aquifer, and the difference between the "nominal"
radius of the well and its effective radius.

Relative to these factors the common practice is to
assume that the value of transmissivity estimated from
specific capacity applies only to the screened zone onto
the open hole. To apply this value to the entire aquifer,
the transmissivity is divided by the length of the screfen
or open hole (to  determine the hydraulic conductivity
per unit of  length) and the result is multiplied by the
entire thicknessof the aquifer. The value of transmissiv ty
determined by this  method is too  large if the zone
supplying water to the well is thicker than the length of
the screen or the open hole. Similarly, if the effective
radius of the well is larger than the "nominal" radius
(assuming that the  "nominal"  radius is used in the
equation), the transmissivity based on specific capacity
again will be too large.

On the other hand, if a significant part of the drawdown
in the pumping well is due to well loss, the transmissivity
based on specific capacity will be too small. Whether
the effects of all  three of these factors cancel out
depends on the characteristics of both the aquifer and
the well.

REFERENCES

Bouwer, Herman, 1978, Groundwater hydrology: New
York, McGraw-Hill, 480p.

Ferris, J. G., D.B. Knowles, R.H. Brown,  and R.W.
Stallman, 1962, Theory of aquifer tests: U.S.  Geol.
Survey Water-Supply Paper 1536-E, pp. E69-E174.

Fetter,  C.  W., Jr.,  1980, Applied  hydrogeology:
Columbus, Charles E. Merrill, 488p.

Freeze, R. A., and  J.A.  Cherry,1979, Groundwater:
Englewood Cliffs, N.J., Prentice Hall, 604p.

Hantush, M. S., and C.E. Jacob,1955, Non-steady
radial flow in an infinite leaky aquifer:  Trans, of the
Amer. Geophysical Union, v. 36, no. 1, pp. 95-100.

Hantush, M. S., 1960, Modification of the theory of leaky
aquifers: Jour, of Geophysical Research, v. 65, no. 11,
pp. 3713-3725.

Heath, R. C., and F.W. Trainer,1981, Introduction to
ground-water hydrology:  Worthington,  Ohio, Water-
Well Journal Publishing Co., 285p.

Jacob, C. E.,  1946, Radial flow in a leaky artesian
aquifer: Trans, of the Amer. Geophysical Union, v. 27,
no. 2, pp. 198-205.

Jacob, C. E., 1950, Flow of ground water  in Rouse,
Hunter, Engineering hydraulics: New York, John Wiley,
chapter 5, pp. 321-386.

Jacob, C: E., 1963, Determining the permeability of
water-table aquifers: U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply
Paper 1536-1, pp. 1245-1271:

Lohman, S.  W,, 1972, Ground-water hydraulics: U.S.
Geol. Survey Professional Paper 708, 70p.
                                                115

-------
McCIymonds, N. E.,  and O.L. Franke,1972, Water-
transmining properties of aquifers on Long Island, New
York: U.S. Geol. Survey  Professional Paper 627-E,
24p.

Melnzer, 0. E., 1923, The occurrence of ground water in
the United States, with a discussion of principles: U.S.
Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 489,321 p.

Moulder, E.  A., 1963, Locus circles as an aid in the
location of a hydrogeologic boundary in Bentall, Ray,
comp., Shortcuts and special problems in aquifertests:
U.S. Geol. Survey Water-Supply Paper 1545-C, pp.
C110-C115.

Stallman, R. W., 1971 .Aquifer-test design, observations,
and data analysis: U.S. Geol. Survey Techniques of
Water-Resources Investigations, Book 3, Chapter B1,
26p.

Theis, C. V., 1935, The relation between the lowering of
the plezometric surface and the rate and duration of
discharge of a well using ground-water storage: Trans.
of the Amer. Geophysical Union, v. 16, pp. 519-524.

Theis,  C. V., 1940, The source of water derived from
wells, essential factors controlling the response of an
aquifer to development: Civil Engineering, v. 10, no. 5,
pp. 277-280.

Todd, D. K., 1980, Groundwater hydrology, 2d ed.: New
York, John Wiley, 535p.

Walton, W.C., 1970, Groundwater resource evaluation:
New York, McGraw-Hill, 664p.
                                               116

-------
        MODELS AND COMPUTERS IN
                                           Chapter 6
GROUND-WATER INVESTIGATIONS
Models, in the broadest sense, are simplified descrip ions
of an existing physical system.   Any ground-water
investigation that does more than simply collect and
tabulate data involves modeling. A preliminary model,
or hypothesis, describing the ground-water syste'm is
tested by collecting data. If the data fit the hypothesis,
the model is accepted; otherwise, the model must be
revised. Models can be (1) qualitative descriptions of
how processes operate in a system; (2)  simplified
physical representations of the system such as "sand
tank" physical aquifer  models and laboratory batch
experiments to measure adsorption isotherms; and (3)
mathematical representations of the physical system.
This chapterfocuses on models that can be expressed
in mathematical form and adapted for use in computer
codes. The American Society for Testing and Materials
(ASTM) defines model and computer code as follows
(ASTM.1984):
A model is an assembly of concepts in the form
of a
mathematical equation that portrays understanding of a
natural phenomenon.

A  computer code is the assembly of numerical
techniques, bookkeeping,  and control languages that
represents the model from acceptance of input data and
instruction to delivery of output.
Modeling with  computers is a specialized field
that
requires considerable training and experience.  In the
last few decades, literally hundreds of computer codes
for simulating various aspects of ground-water systems
have been developed. Refinements to existing codes
and development of new codes proceed at a rapid pace.
This chapter provides a basic understanding of modeling
and data analysis with computers, including (1) their
uses; (2) basic hydrogeologic parameters that define
their type and capabilities; (3) classification according
to mathematical approach and major  types'  of
hydrogeologic parameters  simulated; (4) special
      management considerations in their use; and (5) their
      limitations.
Uses of Models and Computers

The great advantage of the computer is that large
amounts of  data can  be manipulated quickly, and
experimental modifications can be made with minimal
effort, so that  many possible situations for a  given
problem can be studied in great detail. The danger is
that without proper selection, data collection and input,
and quality control procedures, the computer's
usefulness can be quickly undermined, bringing to bear
the adage "garbage in, garbage out."

Computer codes involving ground watercan be broadly
categorized as (1) predictive, (2) resource optimizing,
or (3) manipulative. Predictive codes simulate physical
and chemical processes in the subsurface to provide
estimates of how far, how fast, and in what directions a
contaminant may travel.   These are the most widely
used codes and are the focus of most of this chapter.

Resource-optimizing codes combine constraining
functions (e.g., total pumpage allowed) and optimization
routines for objective functions (e.g., optimization of
well field operations for minimum cost or minimum
drawdown/pumping lift) with predictive codes. The U.S.
Forest Service's multiple-objective planning process
for management of national  forests makes extensive
use of resource-optimizing codes (Iverson and Alston,
1986). The availability of such codes for ground-water
management is limited and is not a very active area of
research and development (van der Heijde arid others,
1985).

Manipulative codes primarily process and format data
for easier interpretation or to assist in data input into
predictive and resource-optimizing codes. A specific
computer code may couple one or more of these types
                                               117

-------
 of codes.  For example, codes that facilitate data entry
 (preprocessors) and data output (postprocessors) are
 becoming an increasingly common feature of predictive
 codes.

 Government Decision-Making
 Computers can assist government decisions concerning
 ground-water evaluation/protection in the areas of (1)
 policy formulation, (2) rule-making, and (3) regulatory
 action.

 A study by the Holcomb Research Institute (1976) of
 environmental modeling and decision-making in the
 United States provides a good overview of modeling for
 policy formulation, although most of the case studies
 involve surface water and resources other than ground
 water. The  Office of Technology Assessment (1982)
 more specifically addresses the use of water resource
 models for policy formulation.

 The U.S. EPA's Underground Injection Control Program
 regulations on restrictions and requirements for Class I
 wells exemplify the use of modeling to assist in rule-
 making (Proposed Rules: 52 Federal Register 32446-
 32476, August27,1987; Final Rules:53 Federal Register
 28118-28157, July 26,  1988).  The  10,000-year no-
 migration standard in 40 CFR 128.20(a)(1) for injected
 wastes is based, in  part, on numerical modeling of
 contaminant transport  in four major hydrogeologic
 settings by  Ward and  others (1987).  Furthermore,
 worst-case modeling of typical injection sites by EPA
 formed the basis for the decision not to require routine
 modeling of  dispersion in no-migration petitions.

 Ground-water flow  and, possibly, solute transport
 modeling  are required to obtain a  permit to inject
 hazardous wastes into Class I wells. Permitting decisions
 involving activities that  may pose a threat  to ground-
 water quality, such as landfills and surface storage of
 industrial  wastes, commonly require  ground-water
 simulations to demonstrate that no hazard exists. U.S.
 EPA (1987)  provides a good overview of  the use of
 models in managing ground-waterprotection programs.
Site Assessment and Remediation
Use of modeling and computer codes can be valuable
in three  phases of site-specific  ground-water
investigations: (1) site characterizaton, (2) exposure
assessment, and (3) remediation assessment.

Site Characterization. Relatively simple models (such
as analytic solutions) may be useful at the early stage
for roughly  defining the possible magnitude  of  a
contaminant problem.  Solute transport models that
account for dispersion but not retardation may be useful
in providing aworst-case analysis of the situation. They
may help in defining the size of the area to be studied
and in siting of monitoring wells. If more sophisticated
computer modeling is planned, the specific code to be
used will, to a certain extent, guide site characterization
efforts by the aquifer parameters required as inputs to
the model.  Site characterization, particularly where
water-quality samples are tested for possible organic
contaminants,  can generate large amounts  of data.
Computers are invaluable in compiling and processing
these data.

Exposure Assessment. There is growing use of exposure
assessments across EPA's regulatory programs (U.S.
EPA, 1987). Inthecaseof ground-watercontamination,
the results of an  exposure assessment will often
determine whether remediation will be required.

Remediation.  Predictive models can  be particularly
valuable  in estimating the possible effectiveness of
alternative approaches to remediating ground-water
contamination  (Boutwell and others, 1985). Table 6-1
summarizes the types of modeling required for various
remediation design features.
Hydrogeologic Model Parameters
AH modeling involves  simplifying assumptions
concerning parameters of the physical system that is
being simulated. Furthermore, these parameters will
influence the type and complexity of the equations that
are used to represent the model mathematically. There
are six major parameters of ground-water systems that
must be considered when developing or selecting a
computer code for simulating ground-water flow and six
additional parameters for contaminant transport.

Ground-Water Flow Parameters
Type of Aquifer. Confined aquifers of uniform thickness
are easier to model than unconfined aquifers because
the transmissivity remains constant. The thickness of
unconfined aquifers varies with fluctuations in the water
table, thus  complicating calculations.   Similarly,
simulation of variable-thickness confined aquifers is
complicated by the fact that velocities will generally
increase in response to  reductions and decrease in
response to increases in aquifer thickness.

Matrix Characteristics.  Flow in porous media is much
easier to model than in rocks with fractures or solution
porosity.  This is because (1)  equations  governing
laminar flow are simpler than those for turbulent flow,
                                               118

-------
O)
—I
i

i?
1
o
«
_i Dl
Design Feature

Capping, grading and
revegetation





Ground-water pumping
(and optional reinjection of treated
water)





Effects on
Ground Water

Reduction of
infiltration

Reduction of
successive
leachate
generation
Changes in heads,
direction of flow,
and contaminant
migration

Controlled plume
removal

Type of
Model Required Typical Modeling Problems

Unsaturated zone Parameters related to leaching
model, vertical characteristics of reworked soil
layered




Saturated zone Representing partial penetration
model, two-
dimensional areal,
axisym metric or
three-dimensional;
wall or 3firid3 of 	 	
— , 	 noil vl — owrreo wi 	
wells assigned to
individual node >
O
o
<5
a

-------
            O1
            o
            O)
            o
            o
            (D
            a
to
o
Design Feature
Impermeable barrier
(optional drainage
system to prevent
mounding)






Subsurface drains








Solution mining








Effects on
Ground Water
Containment of
polluted water
Routing unpolluted
ground water
around site

Changes in heads
and direction of flow


Removal of
leachate

Changes in heads,
direction of flow,
and contaminant
migration


Removal of contaminants after
induced mobilization







Type of
Model Required
Saturated zone model,
two-
dimensional area! or
cross-sectional, or
three-dimensional;
possibly two-
dimensional cross-
sectional unsaturated
zone for liners



Saturated or
combined
unsaturated-
saturated zone model,
two-
dimensional cross-
sectional or
three-dimensional
Saturated or combined
unsaturated-saturated
zone model, two-
dimensional areal,
cross-sectional or
three-dimensional
Lines of Sources
(injection) and
sinks (removal)
Typfeal Modeling Problems
Representing partial
penetration, flow and transport
around end of barrier(s)
Conductivity liner or barrier material

Large changes in conductivity
between neighboring elements

Differences in required grid
resolution

Resolution near drain







Parameters related to
mobilization (sorption
coefficient, retardation
coefficient)





                           Excavation
Removal of waste material
and pollutes soil

changes in hydraulic
characteristics and boundary
conditions

changes in heads and
direction of flow
Unsaturated, saturated,
or combined unsatur-
ated-
saturated zone model;
for unsaturated some
models minimal one-
dimensbnal vertical,
for other types
minimal two-dimen-
sional, cross-sec-
tional.
Parameters of backfill
material
                           Source: Adapted by van der Heijde et al. (1988) from Boutwell et al. (1985).

-------
which may occur in fracture; and (2) effective porosity
and hydraulic conductivity can be more easily estimated
for porous media.                             I
Homogeneity and Isotropy. Homogeneous and isotropic
aquifers are easiest to model because their properties
do not vary in any direction. If hydraulic properties and
concentrations are uniform vertically, and in one of two
horizontal dimensions, a one-dimensional simulation is
possible. Horizontal variations in properties combined
with uniform vertical characteristics can be modeled
two-dimensionally.  Most aquifers, however, show
variation in all directions and, consequently,  require
three-dimensional simulation, which also necessitates
more extensive site characterization data. The spatial
uniformity or variability of aquifer parameters such as
recharge, hydraulic conductivity,  effective porosity,
transmissivity, and storativity will determine the number
of dimensions to be modeled.

Phases. Flow of ground water and contaminated gro jnd
water in which the dissolved constituents do not ere ate
a plume that differs greatly from the unpolluted aquifer
in density orviscosityarefairlyeasyto simulate. Multiple
phases, such as water and air in the vadose zone and
NAPLs in ground water, are more difficult to simulate.
Numberof Aquifers. A single aquiferiseasiertosimu
than multiple aquifers.
ate
Flow Conditions.   Steady-state flow, where the
magnitude and direction of flow velocity are constant
                                             rto
simulate than transient flow. Transient, or unste ady
flow, occurs when the flow varies in the unsatureted
zone in response to variations in precipitation, anc in
the saturated zone when the water table fluctuates.

Contaminant Transport Parameters
Type of Source. For simulation purposes, sources can
be characterized as point, line, area, or volume. A point
source enters the ground water at a single point, sjjch
as a pipe outflow or injection well, and can be simulated
with either a one-, two-, or three-dimensional model.
An example of a line source would be containments
leaching from the bottom of a trench. An area source
enters the ground water through a horizontal or vert cal
plane. The actual  contaminant source may occupy
three dimensions outside of the aquifer, but contamin ant
entry into the aquifer can be represented as a plane for
modeling purposes. Leachate from a waste lagoon or
an agricultural field are examples of area sources A
volume source occupies three  dimensions within an
aquifer. A DNAPL  that has sunk to the bottom oi an
aquifer would  be a volume source.   Line and area
sources may be simulated  by either two- or  three-
dimensional models, whereas a volume source would
requireathree-dimensionalmodel. Figure 6-1 illustrates
the type of contaminant plume that resultsf rom a landfill
in the following cases: (1) area source on top of the
aquifer,  (2)  area source  within  the aquifer and
perpendicular to the direction of flow, (3) vertical line
source in the aquifer, and (4) point source on top of the
aquifer.

Type of Source Release. Release of an instantaneous
pulse, or slug, of contaminant is easierto model than a
continuous release.   A continuous release may be
either constant or variable.

Dispersion.  Accurate  contaminant modeling requires
incorporation of transport by dispersion. Unfortunately,
the conventional convective-dispersion equation often
does not accurately predict field-scale dispersion (U.S.
EPA, 1988).

Adsorption.  It is easiest to simulate adsorption with a
single distribution or partition coefficient.  Nonlinear
adsorption and temporal  and spatial variation  in
adsorption are more difficult to model.

Degradation.  As  with  adsorption,  simulation  of
degradation is easiest when using a simple first-order
degradation coefficient.  Second-order degradation
coefficients, which result from variations in various
parameters, such as pH, substrate concentration, and
microbial population, are much more difficult to model.
Simulation  of radioactive decay is  complicated but
easierto simulate with precision because decay chains
are well known.

Density/Viscosity Effects. If temperature or salinity of
the contaminant plume is much different than that of the
pristine aquifer, simulations must include the effects of
density and viscosity variations.

Types of Models and Codes

Ground-water models  and codes can be classified in
many different ways, including the  mathematical
approaches used  to  develop computer  codes, as
computerprediction codes, and as manipulative codes.

Mathematical Approaches
Models and codes are usually described by the number
of dimensions  simulated  and  the mathematical
approaches used. Atthe core of any model or computer
code are governing equations that represent the system
being  modeled.   Many different  approaches to
formulating and solving the governing equations are
possible. The specific  numerical technique embodied
in a computercode is called an algorithm. The following
                                                121

-------
                                                  a.  various ways to represent source.
                               precipitation

                                  I    I
  b.   horizontal spreading resulting from
      various source assumptions.
Figure 6-1. Definition of the Source Boundary Condition Under a Leaking Landfill (numbers 1 to 4
refer to cases 1 to 4) (from van der Heijde and others, 1988)
                                           122

-------
                                            c.  detailed view of 3D spreading for
                                               various ways to represent source
                                               boundary.
                                                  Case 1':
                                                  horizontal 2D-areal source at top
                                                  of aquifer (for 3D modeling)
        Case 2:  vertical 2D-source in aquifei
                (for 2D horizontal, vertically
                averaged, or 3D modeling)
                                                 Case 3:
                                                 1D vertical line source in aquifer
                                                 (for 2D horizontal, vertically
                                                 averaged, 2D cross-sectional, or
                                                 3D modeling)
        Case 4:  point source at top of aquifer
                 (for 2D or 3D modeling)
Figure 6-1. Continued
                                             123

-------
discussion compares and contrasts some of the most
important choices that must be made in mathematical
modeling.

Deterministic vs. Stochastic Models. A deterministic
model presumes that a system or process operates so
that a given set of events leads to a uniquely definable
outcome. The governing equations define precise cause-
and-effect or input-response relationships. In contrast,
a stochastic model presumes that a system or process
operates so that a given set of events leads to an
uncertain outcome.  Such models calculate the
probability,  within a desired level of confidence, of a
specific value occurring at any point.

Most available models are deterministic. However, the
heterogeneity of hydrogeologic  environments,
particularly the variability of parameters, such as effective
porosity and hydraulic conductivity, plays a key role in
influencing  the reliability  of predictive ground-water
modeling (Smith, 1987; Freeze and others,  1989).
Stochastic approaches to characterizing variability with
the use of geostafistical methods, such as kriging, are
being used with increasing frequency to characterize
soil and hydrogeologic data (Hoeksma and Kitandis,
1985;  Warrick and  others, 1986).  The governing
equations for both deterministic and stochastic models
can be solved either analytically  or numerically.

Analytical vs. Numerical Models. A model's governing
equation can be solved either analytically or numerically.
Analytical models use exact closed-form solutions of
the appropriate differential equations.  The solution is
continuous  in space and time. In contrast, numerical
models apply approximate  solutions to  the same
equations.

Analytical models provide exact solutions, but employ
many simplifying assumptions  in order to  produce
tractable solutions; thus placing a burden on the user to
test  and justify the  underlying assumptions and
simplifications (Javendel and others, 1984).

Numerical models are much less burdened by these
assumptions and, therefore, are  inherently capable of
addressing more complicated problems, but they require
significantly more data, and their solutions are inexact
(numerical approximations).  For example, the
assumptions of homogeneity  and  isotropicity are
unnecessary because the modelcan assign point (nodal)
values of transmissivity and storativity. Likewise, the
capacity to  incorporate complex boundary conditions
provides greater flexibility. The  user, however, faces
difficult choices regarding time steps, spatial grid designs,
and ways to avoid  truncation errors and numerical
oscillations  (Remson and others, 1971; Javendel and
others, 1984). Improper choices may result in errors
unlikely to occurwith analytical approaches (e.g., mass
imbalances, incorrect velocity distributions, and grid-
orientation effects).

Grid Design. A fundamental requirement of the numerical
approach is the creation of a grid that represents the
aquifer being simulated (see Figures 6-2 and 6-3). This
grid of interconnected nodes, at which process input
parameters must be specified, forms the basis for a
matrix of equations to be solved. A new grid must be
designed for each site-specific simulation based  on
data collected during site characterization.  Good grid
design is one of the most critical elements for ensuring
accurate computational results.
Figure 6-2. Typical Ground-Water Contamination
Scenario. Several Water-Supply Production Wells
are Located Downgradientof a Contaminant Source
and the Geology is Complex.
The grid design is influenced by the choice of numerical
solution technique.   Numerical solution techniques
include (1) finite-difference methods (FD); (2) integral
finite-difference methods (IFDM); (3)  Galerkin and
variational finite element methods (FE); (4) collocation
methods;  (5)  boundary (integral) element methods
(BIEM or BEM);  (6)  particle mass tracking methods,
such as the RANDOM WALK (RW) model; and (7) the
method of characteristics (MOC) (Huyakorn and Pinder,
1983; Kinzelbach, 1986).  Figure  6-4 illustrates grid
designs involving FD, FE, collocation, and boundary
methods. Finite-difference and finite-element methods
are the most frequently used and are discussed further
below.
                                               124

-------
      Value* for natural procaa* parameters would be
      specified it Meh nod* of th« grid In performing
      simulation*. The grid density is greatest at the source
      and at potential impact location*.
Figure 6-3. Possible Contaminant Transport
Model Grid Design for the Situations Shown in
Figure 6-2
        Defining discrete elements
                                         Domain
                                         boundary
                                        Discrete-element
                                        boundary
                                        Finite-difference
                                        node
                        Finite-difference net
                                           Domain
                                           boundary

                                           Discrete-element
                                          boundary


                                           Collocation
                                           point
                                        Collocation
                                        finite element
                                       -Collocation node
                   Collocation finite-element net
        Note: Eacn node represents one eouanon per independent variable, except in me ease of ccOocaSon. in wnicn each allocation pant
           represents one equation. The ooundaiy element. coKocalkxi. and fimte-eJe nent methods oKer fleubMy in geometric representation.
 Figure 6-4. Influence of Numerical Solution Technique on Grid Design (from Finder, 1984)
                                                     125
Finite Difference vs. Finite Element. The finite-element
method approximates the solution of partial differential
equations by usingfinite-difference equivalents, whereas
the finite-difference method  approximates differential
equations by an integral approach.  Figure 6-5 illustrates
the mathematical and computational differences in the
two approaches.  Table 6-2  compares  the  relative
advantages and disadvantages of the two methods. In
general, finite-difference methods are best suited for
relatively simple hydrogeologic settings, whereas finite-
element methods are required where  hydrogeology is
complex.

Ground-Water Computer Prediction Codes
Terminology for classifying computer codes according
to the kind of ground-water system they simulate is not
uniformly established.  There are so many different
ways that such models can be classified (i.e., porous vs.
fractured-rock flow,  saturated vs. unsaturated flow,
mass flow vs. chemical transport, single phase vs.
multiphase, isothermal vs. variable temperature) that a
systematic classification cannot be developed that would
not  require placement of single codes in multiple
categories.
                             Finite
                             element
                             node
                                Finite
                                element
                               Domain
                               boundary

                              Discrete-element
                              boundary
                                                                   Triangular finite-element net
                                Domain
                                boundary

                                 Discrete-element
                                 boundary

                                •Boundary
                                 element node
                                                                                     Boundary element
                                                                                     segment
                                                                     Boundary dement not

-------
                   Concepts of the
                   physical system
                          Translate to
                Partial differential equa-
                tion, boundary and Initial
                conditions
 Subdivida region
 into a grid and
 apply finite-
 difference approx-
 imations to space
 and time derivatives,
Finite-difference
approach
 Finite-element
  approach


    Transform to

Integral equation  I
                       Subdivide region
                       into elements
                       and integrate
                              First-order differential
                              equations
                                Apply finite-difference
                                approximation to
                                time derivative
                  System of algebraic
                  equations
                          Solve by direct or
                       , ,  iterative methods
                     Solution
Figure 6-5. Generalized  Model  Development by
Finite-Difference and Finite-Elment Methods (from
Mercer and Faust, 1981)
Table 6-3 identifies four major categories of codes and
11 major subdivisions, which are discussed below. This
classification scheme differs  from others (see,  for
example, Mangold and Tsang, 1987; van  der Heijde
and  others, 1988), by distinguishing among solute
transport models that simulate (1) only dispersion:, (2)
chemical reactions with a  simple retardation or
degradation factor, and (3) complex chemical reactions.

The  literature on ground-water codes often is further
confused by conflicting terminology. For example, the
term "hydrochemical" has been applied to completely
different types of codes.  Van der Heidje and others
(1988) used the term hydrochemical for codes listed in
the geochemical category in Table 6-3, whereas Mangold
and  Tsang (1987) used the same term to describe
coupled geochemical and flow  models  (chemical-
reaction transport codes in Table 6-3).

Porous Media Flow Codes. Modeling of saturated flow
in porous  media is  relatively straightforward;
consequently, by far the largest number of codes are
available in this category.  Van der Heijde and others
(1988) summarize 97 such models. These models are
not suitable  for modeling  contaminant transport if
dispersion  is a significant  factor, but  they may be
required for evaluating hydrodynamic containment of
contaminants and pump-and-treat remediation efforts.
Modeling variably saturated flow in porous media (most
                Advantages
                                          Disadvantages
                Finite-Difference Method
                Intuitive basis
                Easy data entry
                Efficient matrix techniques
                Programming changes easy
                                    Low accuracy for some problems
                                    Regular grids required
                Finite-Element Method

                Flexible grid geometry
                High accuracy possible
                Evaluates cross-product terms
                   better
                                    Complex mathematical basis
                                    Difficult data input
                                    Difficult programming
                Source: Adapted from Mercer and Faust (1981).
Table 6-2. Advantages and Disadvantages of FDM and FEM Numerical Methods
                                                 126

-------
typically soils and unconsolidated geologic materia) is
more difficult because hydraulic conductivity varies with
changes in water content in unsaturated materials.
Such codes typically must model processes, such as
capillarity, evapotranspiration, diffusion, and plant water
uptake. Van der Heijde and others (1988) summarized
29 models in this category.

Solute Transport Codes. The most important types of
Codes  in the study of ground-water contamination
simulate the transport of contaminants in porous mejdia.
This is the second largest category (73 codes) identified
by van der Heidje and others (1988) as being readily
available. Solute transport codes fall into three major
categories (see Table 6-3 for descriptions): (1) dispersion
codes, (2) retardation/degradation  codes, and
chemical-reaction transport codes.
           (3)
Dispersion codes differ from saturated flow codes only
in having  a dispersion factor, and they have limited
utility except perhaps for worst-case analyses, since
few  contaminants act as  conservative tracers.
Retardation/degradation codes are slightly more
sophisticated  because  they add a retardation or
degradation factor to the mass transport and diffusion
equations. Chemical reaction-transport codes are the
most complex (but not necessarily the most accurate)
because they  couple  geochemical codes  with flow
codes.  Chemical  reaction-transport codes may  be
classified as integrated or two-step codes.

Geochemical  Codes.  Geochemical  codes simulate
chemical reactions in ground-water systems without
considering transport processes. These fall into three
major categories (see Table 6-3): (1) thermodynamic
      Type of Code
Description/Uses
      Flow (Porous Medial
           Saturated
           Variable saturated
Simulates movement of water in saturated porous media. Used
primarily for analyzing ground-water availability.
Simulates unsaturated flow of water in the vadose (unsaturated)
zone. Used in study of soil-plant relationships, hydrotogic cycle
budget analysis.
      Solute Transport (Porous Medial
            Dispersion
           Retardation/
                 Degradation
           Chemical-reaction
Simulates transport of conservative contaminants (not subject to
retardation) by adding a dispersion factor into flow calculations.
Used for nonreactive contaminants such as chloride and for
worst-case analysis of contaminant flow.

Simulates fansport contaminants that are subject to partitioning
of transformation by the addition of relatively simple retardation or
degradation factors to algorithms for advection-dispersion flow.
Used where retardation and degradation are linear with respect to
time and do not vary with respect to concentration.

Combines an advection-dispersion code with a transport
geochemical code (see below) to simulate chemical speciation
and transport. Integrated codes solve all mass momentum,
energy-transfer, and chemical reaction equations simultaneously
for each time interval.  Two-step codes first solve mass
momentum and energy balances for each time step and then
requilibrate the chemistry using a distribution-of-species code.
Used primarily for modeling behavior of  inorganic contaminants.
Table 6-3. Classification of Types of Computer Codes
                                                127

-------
     Type of Code
Description/Uses
     GeochemicalCodes

           Thermodynamic
           Distribution-of-
                species
              (equilibrium)

           Reaction progress
              (mass-transfer)
     Specialized Codes

           Fracture rock



           Heat transport




           Multiphase flow
Processes empirical data so that thermodynamic data at a
standard reference state can be obtained for individual species.
Used to calculate reference state values for input into
geochemical speciation calculations.

Solves a simultaneous set of equations that describe equilibrium
 reactions and mass balances of the dissolved elements.
Calculates both the equilibrium distribution of species (as with
equilibrium codes) and the new composition of the water, as
selected minerals are precipitated of dissolved.
Simulates flow of water in fractured rock. Available codes cover
the spectrum of advective flow, advection-dispersion, heat, and
chemical transport.

Simulates flow where density-induced and other flow variations
resulting from fluid temperature differences invalidate
conventional flow and chemical transport modeling.  Used
primarily in modeling of radioactive waste and deep-well injection.

Simulates movement of immiscible fluids (water and nonaqueous
phase liquids) in either the vadpse or saturated zones. Used
primarily where contamination involves liquid hydrocarbons or
solvents.
     Source: Adapted from van der Heijde and others (1988) and U.S. EPA (1989).

Table 6-3. Continued
codes, (2) distribution-of-species codes, and (3) reaction
progress codes. Thermodynamic codes perhaps would
be classified more properly as manipulative codes, but
are included here because of their special association
with geochemical codes.  Such codes are especially
important for  geochemical modeling of deep-well
injection where temperatures and pressures are higher
than near-surface co nditionsforwhich most geochemical
codes were developed.  Apps (1989) reviews the
availability and use of thermodynamic codes

By themselves, geochemical codes can  provide
qualitative insights into the behavior of contaminants in
the subsurface.  They also may  assist in identifying
possible precipitation reactions that  might adversely
affect the performance of injection wells in pump-and-
                treat remediation efforts. Chemical transport modeling
                of any sophistication requires coupling geochemical
                codes with flow codes.  Over 50 geochemical codes
                have been described in the literature (Nordstrom and
                Ball, 1984), but only 15 are cited by van der Heijde and
                others  (1988) as passing their screening criteria for
                reliability and usability.

                Specialized Codes. This category contains special cases
                of flow codes and solute transport codes (see Table 6-
                3), including  (1) fractured rock, (2) heat transport, and
                (3) multiphase flow.  Fractured rock creates special
                problems in the modeling of contaminant transport for
                several reasons.  First, mathematical representation is
                more complex due to the possibility of turbulent flow and
                the need to consider roughness effects. Furthermore,
                                               128

-------
precise field characterization of fracture properties that
influence flow, such as orientation, length, and degjree
of connection between individual fractures, is extremely
difficult. In spite of these difficulties, much work is being
done inthis area (Schmelling and Ross, 1989). Van der
Heijde and others (1988) identified 27 fractured rock
models.

Heat transport models have been developed primarily
in connection with enhanced oil-recovery operations
(Kayser and Collins, 1986) and programs assessing
disposal of radioactive wastes. Van der Heijde and
others (1988) summarized 36 codes of this type. Early
work  in multiphase flow centered in the petrole|urn
industry focusing on oil-water-gas phases.  In the last
decade, multiphase behavior of nonaqueous  phase
liquids in  near-surface ground-water  systems has
received increasing attention. However, the number of
codes capable of simulating multiphase flow is still
limited.

Manipulative Codes
Manipulative codes that may be of value in ground-
waterinvestigations include (1) parameteridentificat;ion
codes, (2) data processing codes, and (3) geographic
information systems.

Parameter Identification Codes. Parameteridentification
codes most often are used to estimate the aquifer
parameters that determine fluid flow and contaminant
transport characteristics.  Examples  of such  codes
include annual recharge (Pettyjohn and Henning, 19J79;
Puri,  1984), coefficients of permeability and storage
(Shelton,  1982; Khan, 1986a and  1986b),  dnd
dispersivity (Guven and others,  1984;  Strecker and
Chu, 1986).

Data  Processing Codes.  Data manipulation  codes
specifically designed tofacilitateground-water modeling
efforts have received little attention until recently. They
are becoming increasingly popular, because they
simplify data entry (preprocessors) to other kinds of
models and facilitate the production of graphic displays
(postprocessors) of the data outputs of other models
(van der Heijde and Srinivasan, 1983;Srinivasan, 1984;
Moses and Herman, 1986). Other software packages
are available for routine and advanced  statistibs,
specialized graphics, and database management needs
(Brown, 1986).

Geo-EAS (Geostatistical  Environmental Assessment
Software) is a collection of interactive software tools for
performing two-dimensional geostatistical analyses of
spatially distributed data. It includes programs for data
file  management, data transformations, univariate
statistics, variogram analysis, cross validation, kriging,
contour mapping, post plots, and line/scatter graphs in
a user-friendly format. This package can be obtained
from the Arizona Computer Oriented Geological Society
(ACOGS), P.O. Box 44247, Tucson, AZ, 85733-4247.

Geographic  Information  Systems.  Geographic
information systems (GIS) provide data entry, storage,
manipulation, analysis, and display capabilities for
geographic, environmental, cultural, statistical, and
political data in a common  spatial framework.  EPA's
Environmental Monitoring System  Laboratory in Las
Vegas (EMSL-LV) has been  piloting use of GIS
technology at hazardous waste sites that fall under
RCRA and CERCLA guidance. The American Society
for Photogrammetry and Remote Sensing is a primary
source of information  on GIS.

Management Considerations for Code Use

The effective use of ground-water models is often
inhibited by a communication gap between managers
who make policy and regulatory decisions and technical
personnel who develop and apply the models (van der
Heijde and others, 1988). This section focuses on the
following management considerations for using models
and  codes:    personnel and  communication
requirements, cost of hardware and software options,
selection criteria, and  quality assurance.

Personnel/Communication
The successful use of mathematical models depends
on the training and experience of the technical support
staff applying the model to a problem, and on the degree
of communication between these  technical persons
and management. Managers should be aware that a
fair degree of specialized training and experience are
necessary to develop and apply mathematical models,
and relatively fewtechnical support staff can be expected
currently to have such  skills (van der Heijde and others,
1985). Technical personnel need to be familiar with a
numberof scientific disciplines, so that they can structure
models to faithfully simulate real-world problems.

A broad,  multidisciplinary  team is mandatory for
adequate  modeling of  complex problems, such as
contaminant transport in ground water.  No individual
can master the numerous disciplines involved in such
an effort; however,  staff  should  have  a working
knowledge of many sciences so that they can address
appropriate questions to specialists, and achieve some
integration of the various disciplines involved in the
project.  In practice,  ground-water modelers should
become involved in continuing education efforts, which
managers should expect and encourage. The benefits
                                                129

-------
of such efforts are likely to be large, and the costs of not
engaging in them may be equally large.

Technical staff also must be able to communicate
effectively with  management.   As with statistical
analyses, an ill-posed problem yields answers to the
wrong questions. Tables 6-3 through  6-5 list some
useful questions managers and technical support staff
should ask each other to ensure that the solution being
developed is appropriate to the problems. Table 6-3
consists of  "screening  level" questions, Table  6-4
addresses correct conceptualizations, and Table 6-5
contains questions of sociopolitical concern.

Cost of Hardware and Software Options
The nominal costs  of  the support staff, computing
f aciDties, and specialized graphics' production equipment
associated with numerical modeling efforts can be high.
In addition, quality control  activities  can  result in
substantial costs, depending on the degree to which a
manager must be certain of the model's characteristics
and accuracy of output.
As a general rule, costs are greatest for personnel,
moderate for hardware, and minimal for software. An
optimally outfitted business computer (e.g., VAX 11/
785 or IBM  3031) costs about $100,000,  but it can
rapidly pay for itself in terms of dramatically increased
speed and computational power. In contrast, a well-
complemented personal computer (e.g., IBM-PC/AT or
DEC Rainbow) may cost $10,000, but the significantly
slower speed and limited computational power  may
incur hidden costs in terms of its inability to perform
specific tasks. For example, highly desirable statistical
packages like SAS and  SPSS are unavailable or
available only with reduced capabilities for personal
computers.   Many of  the most sophisticated
mathematical models are available in their fully capable
form only on business computers.

Figure 6-6 compares typical software costs for different
levels of computing power. Obviously, the software for
less capable computers is less expensive, but the
programs are not equivalent; managers need to seriously
consider which level is appropriate. If the  modeling
      Assumptions and Limitations

         What are the assumptions made, and do they cast doubt on the model's projections for this
         problem?
         What are the model's limitations regarding the natural processes controlling the problem? Can
         the full spectrum of probable conditions be addressed?
         How far in space and time can the results of the model simulations be extrapolated?
         Where are the weak spots in the application, and can these be further minimized or
         eliminated?

      Input Parameters and Boundary Conditions

         How reliable are the estimates of the input parameters? Are they quantified within accepted
         statistical bounds?
         What are the boundary conditions, and why are they appropriate to this problem?
         Have the initial conditions with which the model is calibrated been checked for accuracy and
         internal consistency?
         Are the spatial grid design(s) and time-steps of the model optimized for this problem?

      Quality Control and Error Estimation

         Have these models been mathematically validated against other solutions to this kind of
         problem?
         Has anyone field verified these models before, by direct applications or simulation of
         controlled experiments?
         How do these models compare with others in terms of computational efficiency, and ease of
         use or modification?
         What special measures are being taken to estimate the overall errors of the simulations?
      Source: Keely(1987).

Table 6-4. Conceptualization Questions for Mathematical Modeling Efforts
                                               130

-------
       Demographic Considerations

          Is there a larger population endangered by the problem than we are able to provide sufficient
          responses to?
          is it possible to present the model's results in both nontechnical and technical formats, to
          reach all audiences?                 I
          What role can modeling play in public information efforts?
          How prepared are we to respond to criticism of the model(s)?
       PoliticaLConstraints
          Are there nontechnical barriers to using
          Can the results of the model simulation
          equivocal?

       Leoal Concerns
 this model, such as "tainted by association" with a
          controversy elsewhere?
          Do we have the cooperation of all involved parties in obtaining the necessary data and
          implementing the solution?
          Are similar technical efforts for this problem being undertaken by friend or foe?
5 be turned against us? Are the results ambiguous or
          Will the present schedule allow all regulatory requirements to be met in a timely manner?
          If we are dependent on others for key inputs to the model(s), how do we recoup tosses
          stemming from their nonperformance?
          What liabilities are incurred for projections that later turn out to be misinterpretations
          originating in the model?
          Do any of the issues relying on the app ications of the model(s) require the advice of
          attorneys?
       Source: Keely (1987).

Table 6-5. Sociopolitical Questions for Mathematical Modeling Efforts
decisions will be based on very little data, it may not
make sense to insist on the most elegant software and
hardware. If the intended use involves substantial
amounts of data, however, and sophisticated analyses
are desired, it would be unwise to opt for the  least
expensive combination.

There is an increasing trend away from both ends of the
hardware and software spectrum and toward the midc le;
that is,  the use of powerful personal computers is
increasing  rapidly, whereas  the  use of small
programmable calculators and large business computers
alike is declining. In part, this trend stemsfrom significant
improvements in the computing power and quality! of
printed outputs obtainable from personal computers. If
also is  due to the improved telecommunications
capabilities of personal computers, which are now able
to emulate the interactive terminals of large business
computers so that vast computational power can be
     accessed and the results retrieved with no more than a
     phone call. Most importantly forground-water managers,
     many of the mathematical models and data packages
     have been "down-sized" from mainframe computers to
     personal computers; many more are now being written
     directly for this  market. Figure 6-7 provides some idea
     of the costs of available software  and hardware for
     personal computers.

     Code Selection Criteria
     Technical criteria for selecting ground-water modeling
     codes have been formulated by U.S. EPA (1988) in the
     form of a decision tree (Figure 6-8). These technical
     criteria correspond roughly to the hydrogeologic model
     parameters discussed earlier. Table 6-6 summarizes
     information with respect to these technical criteria for 49
     analytical and  numerical ground-water codes.  More
     detailed information about these codes can be found in
     U.S. EPA (1988).
                                                131

-------
100
J 80
co 60
1 40
Q.
1 20
0
-
-
-
-

"''.: *.-*••'=
I1.",*:!-
'^*';V
r^f




••MMMI
??
v"^
-'"
'-
°,




>M*nm
% /S-1^

n
t 1 n
           t        2        3       4        S

            Ground-Water Modeling Software Categories

        Categories
          1 Mainframe/business computer models
          2 Personal computer versions of mainframe models
          3 Original IBM-PC and compatibles' models
          4, Handheld microcomputer models (e.g., Sharp
            PC1500)
          5 Programmable calculator models (e.g., HP4T-CV)
        Prices Include software and all available
        documentation, reports, etc.
   A code might meet all of the above technical criteria and
   still not be suitable for use due to deficiencies in the
   code itself. An ongoing program at the International
   Ground Water Modeling Center evaluates codes using
   performance standards and  acceptance criteria (van
   der Heijde, 1987). The Center has rated 296 codes in
   seven major categories using a variety of usability and
   reliability criteria-(van der Heijde and  others,  1988).
   Favorable ratings for the usability criteria include:

       Pre- and Postprocessors. Code incorporates one
       or more of this type of code.

       Documentation. Code has an adequate description
       of user's instructions and example data sets.

       Support. Code is supported and maintained by the
       developers or marketers.

       Hardware  Dependency.  Code is designed  to
       function on a variety of hardware configurations.
Figure 6-6. Average Price per Category for Ground-
Water Models from the International Ground Water
Modeling Center
              s
              £
                   isoo r
                   1250
                   1000
                    750
                    500
                    260
                                                Minimum
                                           Software sophtstfcation
                                           not proportional to prices.
                           L
                                                6
                                                         8
                                                                  10
                                                                            12   13   14    IS
                                              Vendor* of Ground-Water Model!
                          Vendors
                            1 Inlomstlonal Ground
                              Water Modeling Center
                            2 Computapipe Co.
                            3 Data Services, Inc.
                            4 GeoTranj. Inc.
                            5 Hydroiott, Inc.
                            6 In Situ, Inc.
 7 (rrisco Co.
 8 Koch and Assoc.
 9 KRS EntwpriMj. Inc.
10 Michael P. Scinki Co.
11 RockWare, Inc.
12 Sokitech Corp.
13 Thomas A. Pricket!
  & Assoc.
14 Jamet S. Ulrick Co.
15 Watershed Reeaarch, Inc.
 Figure 6-7. Price Ranges for IBM-PC Ground-Water Models Available from Various Sources (from
 Graves, 1986)
                                                    132

-------
Figure 6-8. Ground-Water Computer Code Select
o
u = Jto
to 0
8
5T
o
H
|
C •-
(A
m
TJ
>
_L
(O
00
CO

1 Ground. -Ha

[ Wn fined Aqsiifjr"?"]
( Point, Line, o

Fracture FJowf |

Transport

Areal Source? )

f Initial Value or Constant Source?!

imensional?"]
1 . 2. or 3 1

| Sinole Phase or MuH'i -Phase )

Homogeneous or
draulic Conductivity. Rechar

1 Sinale Layer o

1 Constant or Variab'


imensionai? )

( Dispersion? 1

Heterogeneous?
tie. Porosity, soecirfc >tpraqe Adsort
e Temporal
„ - . 	 . « Soatial \
r Hiilti-Uver? I

	 	 Degrac
e Thicknej; la,yer$_?_|


ition?
Variability
/ariability

ation? .
t 1st Order/2nd Order
• Radioactive Oecav

1 Steady-Sta,t£ or Transient 1

Select the Appropr
Numerical Groum
i
Continue with the Decision
Ground-Water Flow and C


Density Effects?
•iate Analytical or - , Thermal and/or Concentration
i-water MOW code
ar

Select the Appropriate Analytical or
Tree and Select a Combined v Numeric?] Contaminant Transoort Code
mtaminant Transoort fipijet : ' "'""

-------
1*11
fill
MottNaniM I I 1 i
PATHS X X
AT123O X
CHAIN X
CETOUT X
CWMTU112 X
MUTRAN X
NWnVDVM X
IMSATI ' X
FCUWATERI X
UN3AT2 X
FAEE2E XXX
NumtfScjl Flow (SL-jniod Only)
B6WTA X X
COOLEY XXX
FCODOW XXX
FUWP X X
F nesuw 1*2 xx

TCUMOI X X
USG52O XXX
VTT XXX
VI XXX
USOSJD- MODULAR XXX
USGSOO-TneSCOTT X X
Nunwfc*! TfMiport (SflturcJKfUnulurailtd)
FEUWASTE 1 X X
PERCOL X X
SATUFM X X
SECOL X X
SUUATRA-t X X
SUTRA X X
TRANUSAT X X
TRUST X X
NunwlulTri.'Kporl (Saturated Orfy)
CHAW X X
OUQUD-REEVES X
OROVE/OA1ERKN X
BOQUAO.eOOUADa X
COU3REO
EUSO320-UOC)
OPCT X X
MHT X
PcNOER X X
HOBEHTSON1 X X
SVftNT X X
TRANS (PridwR. XXX
Lonoq-— l|
TRANSAT 2 X X
Hurrariol CaufM SofcU Md Hwl Transport
CFEST X X
OWTHERM X
OCB6 X
SHALT X
SWIFT XXX
8WP2 XXX
ill
| jM
2 X
1,2,3 X
t X
1 X
1.2 X
1A3 X
1 X
1 X
2 X
2 X
3 X

2 X
2 X
3 X"
2 X
2 X

I X
2 X
2 X
2 X
3 X
3 X

2 X
1 X
2 X
3 X
1 X
2 X
1.2 X
1,2.3 X
X
X
3 X
X
1.2
2 X
X
X
X
2 X
1A3 X
2 X

3 X
1.2.3 X
2 X
1,2 X
2 X
3 X
3 X
j.
fl
X
X
X
X
X



X



X












X



X



X



X



X



1
1:





X
X
X
X
X
X


X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X


X
X
X

X
X
X
**SHi
tiillj
X X XX
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
xxx
X X X X X X
xxx
xxx

XX X
X X XX
XXXX
X X XX
XR-ZXR-2 X
X X
xxx
XX X
X XXX
xxx
X XXX
X XXX

X X X X X X
X XXX
X XXX
X XXX
X XXX
X XXX
X XXX
X XXX
XX X
XX XXX
X XXX
X X XX
X XXX
X XXX
X X XX
X XXX
X XXX
X X XX
X XXX
X X XX

X XXX
xxx
xxx
XX X
xxx
X XXX
XX X
.Llm.orArwl
a
II
°7 "?
A
A
P
P
P.L
P.UA






















PA.A
A
A
A
A
A
A
P
A
P
A
A
A


A
A
A
A
A
A
Si
:" fl
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
X


















X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X X
X X
X
X




X X
X X
X
X
X
X
t-
1
2
1.2.3
1
1
1.2
1.2.3
1


















2
1
2
3
2
1.2
1.2.3
2
2
3
2
2
1
3
2
2
1.2.3
2

3
1.2.3
2
1.2
2
3
3

nl
X
X
X X
X
X
X X
X X


















X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X X
X X
X
X X
X
X X
X X
X

X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
1

-------
Favorable ratings for the reliability criteria include:

    Review.  Both theory behind the coding and the
    coding itself are peer reviewed.

    Verification. Code has been verified.

    Field Testing.  Code has been extensively field
    tested for site-specific conditions for which extensjve
    datasets are available.

    Extent of Use. Code has been used extensively by
    other modelers.
Quality Assurance/Quality Control
The increasing use of modeling and computer codes' in
regulatory settings where decisions may be contested
in court requires careful attention to quality assurance
and quality control in both model development and
application. The American Society  for Testing and
Materials (ATSM) defines several important terms tli at
relate to QA/QC procedures forcomputercode modeling
(ASTM, 1984):

    Verification involves examination of the numerical
    technique in the computer code to ascertain that it
    truly represents the conceptual model and th'at
    there are no inherent numerical problems associated
    with obtaining a solution.

    Validation involves comparison of model resuts
    with numerical data independently  derived from
    experiments or observations of the environment^.

    Calibration is a test of a model with known input ai
    output information that is used to adjust orestima
    factors for which data are not available.
    Sensitivity is the degree to which the model result
    affected by changes in a selected input parameter.
Huyakorn and others (1984) identified three major
levels of quality control in the development of grouncl-
water models:
1.  Verification of the model's mathematics  by
    comparison of its output with  known  analytical
    solutions to specific problems.

 2.  Validation of the general framework of the model by
    successful simulation of observed field data.

3.  Benchmarking of the model's efficiency in solving
    problems by comparison with other models.    I
These levels of quality control address the soundness
and utility of the model alone, but do not treat questions
of its application to a specific problem. Hence, at least
two additional levels of quality control appear justified:

1.  Critical reviewof the problem's conceptualization to
    ensure that the modeling effort considers all physical
    and chemical aspects that may affect the problem.

2.  Evaluation of the specifics of the application, e.g.,
    appropriateness of the  boundary conditions, grid
    design, time steps, etc.  Calibration and sensitivity
    analysis to determine  if the model outputs vary
    greatly with  changes  in  input  parameters are
    important aspects of this process.

Verification of the mathematical frameworkof a numerical
model and of a code for internal consistency is relatively
straightforward. Field validation of a numerical model
consists of first calibrating the model using one set of
historical records (e.g., pumping rates and water levels
from a certain year), and then attempting to predict the
next set of historical records. In the calibration phase,
the aquifercoefficients and other model parameters are
adjusted to achieve the best  match between model
outputs and known data; in the predictive phase, no
adjustments are  made (excepting actual changes in
pumping rates,  etc.).  Presuming that the  aquifer
coefficients and  other parameters were known with
sufficient accuracy, a mismatch means that either the
model is not correctly formulated or that it does not treat
all of the important phenomena affecting the situation
being simulated (e.g., does not allowfor leakage between
two aquifers when this is actually occurring).

Field validation exercises usually leadto additional data
gathering efforts, because existingdataforthecalibration
procedure commonly are insufficient to provide unique
estimates of key parameters. Such efforts may produce
a "black box" solution that is so site-specific that the
model cannot be readily applied to another site. For this
reason, the blind prediction phase is an essential check
on the uniqueness of the parameter values  used. Field
verification is easiest if the model can be calibrated to
data sets from controlled research  experiments.

Benchmarking routines to compare the efficiency of
different models in solving the same problem have only
recently become available  (Ross  and others, 1982;
Huyakorn and others, 1984). Van derHeijde and others
(1988) discuss, in some detail, proceduresfordeveloping
QA plans for code development/maintenance and code
application.

Limitations of Computer Codes

Mathematical models are useful only within the context
of the assumptions and simplifications on which they
                                                135

-------
are based and according to their ability to approximate
the field conditions being simulated. Faust and others
(1981) rated the predictive capabilities of available
models with respect to 10 issues involving quantity and
quality of ground water (Table 6-7).  A four-tiered
classification scheme for models is shown in Table 6-7:
(1) geographic scope (site, local, regional); (2) pollutant
movement (flow only, transport without reactions, and
transport with reactions); (3) type of flow (saturated or
unsaturated); and (4) type of media (porous orf ractured).
The rating scale by Faust and others (1981) in Table 6-
7 also can be viewed as stages of model development:

    0 =    No model exists.

    1 =    Models are still in  the research stage.

    2 =    Models  can  serve as useful conceptual
           tools for synthesizing complicated
           hydrologic and quality data.

    3 -    Models can make short-term predictions (a
           few  years)  with  a  moderate  level  of
           credibility, given sufficient data.
    4 =    Models can make predictions with a high
           degree of reliability and  credibility, given
           sufficient data.

The most advanced model is only able to simulate
available supplies and conjunctive use atthe local level.
Contaminant transport modeling is generally at stage 3
for transport without reactions in saturated porous flow
at the site and local level. Models at the stage 2 level of
development  generally  include  transport without
reactions (saturated  fractured, unsaturated porous),
and transport with reactions (saturated porous) at the
site and local  level.  Models at the  earliest stage of
development  involve transport with  reactions  in
saturated, fractured media.

Advances have been made in all  areas of modeling
since the ratings in Table 6-7 were made, but the basic
relationships are essentially unchanged.  This  is
illustrated in Table 6-8, which shows the percentage of
computer codes in  seven categories that  received
favorable usability and reliability ratings by van der
Heijde and others (1988).  The heat transport and
geochemical model  categories do  not have direct
Spitltl conildtntions:
Poltutmt rnovfmtnt.
limy:
FlortcondltlonK
Isiaa
Quantity
Available supplies
Quantity
Conjunctive use
Quality
Accidental
Petroleum products
Quality
Accidental
Road salt
Quality
Accidental
Induitriat chemicals
Quality
Agriculture
Pesticides & herbicide*
Quality
Age kill turn
Sail buildup
Quality
Waste disposal
Landfills
Quality
Wait* disposal
Injection
Quality
Sea-water intrusion
Model Types
Sit»
Flow only
tit
f
3
3








at
F
2
1








unset
f










mutt!
fluid


. 1






3
Transport
w/o reactions
sat


3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
sut


2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
unsat


1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Transport
vt/ reactions
sat




2
2

2
2

at




1
'

1
1

unsat




0
0

0
0

Loot
Flow
only
sat
4
4








sat
3
3








Transport
w/o
reactions
sat


2

3
3
3
3
3
3
stlt


1

2
7
2
2
2
2
Transport
w/
reactions
sat




2
2

2
2

sat




0
0

0
a

Regional
Flow
only
sat
3
3








in
3
3








Transport
w/o
reactions
sat









2
sat









2
Table 6-7. Matrix Summarizing Reliability and Credibility of Models Used in Ground-Water Resource
Evaluation
                                                136

-------
                                               Kay to Matrix
                            Rova      issue and subissue areas.

                            Columns    mode! types and scale of applications; for example, sixth
                                     column applies to a site-scale problem in which pollutant
                                     movement is described by a transport model without reactions
                                     and with saturated flow in fractured media.

                            Application scale
                            Site       area modeled less than a few square miles.
                            Local      area modeled greater than a few square miles but less than a
                                     few thousand square miles.
                            Regional    area modeled greater than a few thousand square miles.

                            Abbreviations
                            
-------
Type of code
Saturated flow
Solute transport
Heat transport
Variable saturated flow
Fractured rock models
Multiphase flow
Geochemical
Total
97
73
36
29
27
19
15
Support
65%
67%
78%
48%
7%
5%
33%
Theory
Rev.
74%
68%
78%
72%
44%
21%
60%
Code
Rev.
12%
29%
42%
21%
33%
11%
60%
Verifi-
cation
90%
96%
97%
83%
100%
89%
100%
Field
Tested
32%
14%
6%
21%
0%
11%
0%
      Source: Adapted from van der Heijde and others (1988).
Table 6-8. Percentage of Computer Codes with Favorable Usability and Reliability Ratings
REFERENCES

American Society for Photogrammetry and Remote
Sensing (ASPRS), 1989, Fundamental of  GIS:  a
compendium, ASPRS, Falls Church, VA.

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM),
1984, Standard practices for evaluating environmental
fate  models of chemicals:  Annual Book of ASTM
Standards, E 978-84, ASTM, Philadelphia, PA.

Anderson, M.P., 1979,  Using models to simulate the
movement of contaminants through groundwater flow
systems:  CRC Critical Reviews on  Environmental
Control v. 9, no. 2, pp. 97-156.

Appel,  C.A. and J.D.  Bredehoeft,  1976,  Status of
groundwater modeling in the U.S. Geological Survey:
U.S. Geological Survey Circular 737.

Apps, J.A., 1989, Current geochemical modelsto predict
the fate of hazardous waste in the injection zones of
deep disposal wells: in Assessing the Geochemical
Fate of Deep-Well-Injected  Hazardous Waste:
Summaries of Recent Research, Chapter 6, EPA 6257
6-89/025D.

Bachmat, Y., B. Andrews, D. Holtz, and S. Sebastian,
1978, Utilization of numerical groundwater models for
water resource management: EPA 600/8-78/012.

Bear, J., 1979, Hydraulics of groundwater: McGraw-Hill
Book Company, New York.

Boutwell,  S.H., S.M. Brown, B.R. Roberts, and D.F.
Atwood, 1985, Modeling remedial actions at uncontrolled
hazardous waste sites: EPA 540/2-85/001.

Brown, J., 1986,1986 Environmental software review:
Pollution Engineering, v. 18, no. 1, pp. 18-28.

Cherry and others, 1989.

Donigan, A.S., Jr. and P.S.C. Rao, 1986, Overview of
terrestrial processes and modeling:  in Hern and
Melancon (eds.) pp. 3-35.

Faust, C.R., L.R. Silka, and J.W. Mercer, 1981, Computer
modeling and ground-water protection: Ground Water,
v. 19, no. 4, pp. 362-365.

Freeze, R.A., G. DeMarsily, L. Smith, and J. Massmann,
1989,  Some  uncertainties  about uncertainty:  in
Proceedings of  the Conference Geostatistical,
Sensitivity, and Uncertainty Methods for Ground-Water
Flow  and  Radionuclide Transport Modeling, San
                                             138

-------
Francisco, CA, September 15-17,1987. CONF-870971.
Battelle Press, Columbus, OH.

Graves, B., 1986, Ground water software-trimming the
confusio: Ground Water Monitoring Review, v. 6, no.
pp. 44-53.
  1,
Guven,  O., F.J.  Molz, and  J.G. Melville, 1984;
analysis of dispersion in a stratified aquifer: Wa
Resources Research v. 20, no. 10, pp. 1337-1354.
, An
  er
Hoeksma, R.J. and P.K. Kitandis, 1985, Analysis of the
spatial structure  of properties of selected aquifers:
Water Resources Research, v. 21, no. 4, pp. 563-572.

Holcomb Research Institute, 1976, Environmenial
modeling and decision-making:  Praeger Publishers,
New York.                                    I
Huyakorn, P.S. and G.F. Pinder, 1983, Computatioral
methods in subsurface flow:  Academic Press, Ne,w
York.

Huyakorn, P.S., A.G. Kretschek, R.W. Broome, J.\JV.
Mercer, and B.H. Lester, 1984, Testing and validation of
models for simulating solute transport in ground water:
development, evaluation, and comparison of benchmark
techniques: GWMI84-13. International Ground Watbr
Modeling Center, Butler University, Indianapolis, IN.

Iverson, D.C. and R.M. Alston, 1986, The genesis of
FORPLAN: A historical and analytical review of forest
service planning models:  GTR-INT-214.  U.S. Forejst
Service Intermountain Research Station, Ogden, UT.

Javendel,  I., C.  Doughty, and  C.F. Tsang,  1984,
Groundwater transport:   Handbook of mathematical
models: AGU Water Resources Monograph No. 10.
American Geophysical Union, Washington, DC.

Kayser, M.B. and A.G. Collins, 1986, Computer
simulation  models relevant  to  ground  water
contamination from EOR or other fluids—State-of-the-
Art.  NIPER-102: National Institute for Petroleum arid
Energy Research, Bartlesville, OK.
Khan, I.A., 1986a, Inverse problem in ground watejr:
model development: Ground Water v. 24, no. 1, pp. 32-
38.

Khan, I.A., 1986b, Inverse problem in ground wate .
model application: Ground Water v. 24, no. 1, pp. 39|-
48.

Kincaid, C.T., J.R. Morrey, and J.E. Rogers,  198 ,
Geohydrochemical models for solute migration. Volume
1: process description and computer code selection:
EPRI EA-3417-1.  Electric Power Research Institute,
Palo Alto, CA.

Kincaid, C.T. and J.R. Morrey, 1984, Geohydrochemical
models for solute migration.  Volume 2: preliminary
evaluation of selected computer codes:  EPRI EA-
3417-2. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto,
CA.

Kinzelbach,  W.,  1986, Groundwater modeling:  an
introduction with simple programs in BASIC:  Elsevier
Scientific Publishers, Amsterdam, The Netherlands

Mangold, D.C. and C.-F. Tsang, 1987,  Summary of
hydrologic and hydrochemical models with potential
applicationto deep underground injection performance:
LBL-23497. Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory, Berkeley,
CA.

Mercer, J.W. and C.R. Faust,  1981, Ground-water
modeling:  National Water Well Association,  Dublin,
OH.

Mills, W.B. and others, 1985, Waterquality assessment:
a screening procedure for Toxic and Conventional
Pollutants (Revised 1985): EPA/600/6-85/002a&b.

Morrey, J.R., C.T. Kincaid, and C.J. Hostetler, 1986,
Geohydrochemical modelsforsolute migration. Volume
3: evaluation of selected computer codes: EPRI EA-
3417-3. Electric Power Research Institute, Palo Alto,
CA.

Moses, C.O. and J.S. Herman, 1986, Computer notes
- WATIN - a computer program for generating input files
for WATEQF: Ground Water, v. 24, no. 1, pp. 83-89.

National Water Well Association/International Ground
Water Modeling  Center, 1984,  Proceedings  of
conference on practical applications of ground water
models: NWWA, Dublin, OH. [44 papers]

National Water Well Association/International Ground
Water Modeling  Center, 1985,  Proceedings  of
conference on practical applications of ground water
models: NWWA, Dublin, OH. [27 papers]

National Water Well Association/International Ground
Water Modeling  Center, 1987,  Proceedings  of
conference on solving ground Water Problems with
Models. NWWA, Dublin, OH. [45+ papers]

National Water Well Association/International Ground
Water Modeling Center, 1989, Fourth  international
conference on solving ground water problems with
models. NWWA, Dublin, OH. [44+ papers]
                                               139

-------
Nordstrom, D.K.and others, (19 total authors), 1979, A
comparison  of computerized chemical models for
equilfariumcalculationsin aqueous systems: inChemical
Modeling in Aqueous Systems: Speciation, Sorption,
Solubility and Kinetics,  E.A. Jenne, (ed.), ACS Symp.
Series 93, American Chemical Society, Washington
DC, pp. 857-892.

Nordstrom, D.K.and J.W. Ball, 1984, Chemical models,
computer programs and metal complexation in natural
waters: in Complexation of  Trace Metals in Natural
Waters, C.J.M. KramerandJ.C. Duinker(eds.), Martinus
Nijhoff/Dr. W. Junk Publishers, The Hague, pp.  149-
164.

Office of Technology Assessment (OTA), 1982, Use of
models for water resources  management, planning,
and policy. OTA, Washington, DC.

Oster,  C.A.,  1982, Review of groundwater flow and
transportmodelsintheunsaturatedzone. NUREG/CR-
2917,  PNL-4427.  Pacific Northwest Laboratory,
Richland, WA.

Pettyjohn, Wayne A. and  R.  J.  Henning, 1979,
Preliminary estimate of ground-water recharge rates in
Ohio:  Water Resources Center,  Ohio State Univ.,
323p.

Pinder.G.F., 1984, Groundwatercontaminant transport
modeling. Environ. Sci. Technol. v. 18, no. 4, pp. 108A-
114A.

Puri, S., 1984, Aquifer studies using flow simulations.
Ground Water v. 22, no. 5, pp. 538-543.

Remson, I., G.M. Hornberger, and F.J. Molz, 1971,
Numerical methods in  subsurface hydrology.  John
Wiley & Sons, New York.

Ross, B., J.W. Mercer, S.D. Thomas, and B.H. Lester,
1982, Benchmark problemsfor repository siting models.
NUREG/CR-3097.  U.S.  Nuclear Regulatory
Commission, Washington, DC.

Schechter, R.S., LW. Lake,  and M.P. Walsh, 1985,
Development of environmental attractive  leachants.
Vol. III. U.S. Bureau of Mines Mining Research Contract
Report, Washington, DC.

Schmelling, S.G. and R.R. Ross,  1989, Contaminant
transportinfractured media: modelsfordecision makers.
Superfund Ground Water Issue Paper.  EPA 540/4-89/
004.

Shefton, M.L.,  1982, Ground-water management in
basalts. Ground Water, v. 20, no. 1, pp. 86-93.
Smith, L., 1987, The role of stochastic modeling in the
analysis of groundwater problems.  Ground Water
Modeling Newsletter, v. 6, no. 1.

Sposito,  G., 1985, Chemical models of inorganic
pollutants  in soils.  CRC  Critical  Reviews in
Environmental Control.v. 15, no. 1, pp. 1-24.

Srinivasan, P.,  1984,  PIG -  A graphic interactive
preprocessor for ground-water models. GWMI 84-15.
International Ground Water Modeling Center, Butler
University, Indianapolis, IN.

Strecker, E.W.  and W. Chu,  1986, Parameter
IdentificationofaGround-WaterContaminant Transport
Model.  Ground Water, v. 2, no. 1, pp. 56-62.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency  (EPA), 1987,
The use of models in managing ground-water protection
programs, EPA 600/8-87/003.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency  (EPA), 1988,
Selection criteria for mathematical  models used in
exposure assessments: Ground-Water  Models, EPA
600/8-88/075.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency  (EPA), 1989,
Assessing the geochemical fate of deep-well-injected
hazardous waste: A Reference Guide, EPA 625/6-S9/
025a.

van  der  Heijde, P.K.M., 1984a,  Availability  and
applicability of numerical models for ground water
resources management.  GWMI 84-14. International
Ground Water Modeling Center, Butler University,
Indianapolis, IN.

van der Heijde, P.K.M., 1984b, Utilization of models as
analytictoolsforgroundwatermanagement. GWMI 84-
19. International Ground Water Modeling Center, Butler
University, Indianapolis, IN.

van der Heijde, P.K.M., 1985, The role of modeling in
development  of  ground-water protection policies.
Ground Water Modeling Newslette, v. 4, no. 2.

van der Heijde, P.K.M.,  1987, Performance standards
and  acceptance  criteria in groundwater modeling.
Ground Water Modeling Newsletter,  v., no. 2.

vanderHeijde, P.K.M. and P. Srinivasan, 1983, Aspects
of the  use  of graphic  techniques  in ground water
modeling.  GWMI 83-11. International Ground Water
Modeling Center, Butler University, Indianapolis, IN.

van der Heijde, P.K.M., Y. Bachmat,  J. Bredehoeft, B.
Andrews, D. Holtz, and S. Sebastian, 1985, Groundwater
                                              140

-------
management: The use of numerical models. 2nd ed.
AGU Water Resources Monograph No. 5, American
Geophysical Union, Washington, DC.

van der Heijde, P.K.M., A.I. El-Kadi, and S.A. Willialms,
1988, Groundwater modeling: An overview and status
report.  International Ground Water Modeling Center,
Butler University, Indianapolis, IN.

Walton, W.C., 1984, Practical aspects of groundwater
modeling:  Analytical and computer models for flow,
mass and heat transport, and subsidence. National
Water Well Association, Dublin, OH.

Wang,  H.F. and M.P. Anderson, 1982, Introduction to
groundwater modeling: Finite difference and  finite
element methods. W.H. Freeman and Company, San
Francisco, CA.

Ward,  D.S.,  D.R. Buss, and J.W. Mercer, 1987, A
numerical evaluation of class I injection wells for waste
confinement performance, Final Report. Preparec
U.S. EPA by GeoTrans, Herndon, VA.
for
Warrick, A.W., D.E. Myers, and D.R. Nielsen, 1986,
Geostatistical methods  applied to soil science:  in
Methods of Soil Analysis,  Part I—Physical and
Mineralogical Methods,  2nd ed., A. Klute (ed.), AJSA
Monograph No. 9, American Society of Agronomy,
Madison, Wl, pp. 53-82.
                                               141
                                                           •U.S. Government Printing Office: 1991— 548-187/40564

-------

-------

-------
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
 Center for Environmental
Information
Cincinnati OH 45268-1072
iarcn
                                                                                     BULK RATE
                                                                               POSTAGE & FEES PAID
                                                                                          EPA
                                                                                   PERMIT No. G-35
Official Business
Penalty for Private Use, $300
                                                               Please make all necessary changes on the above label.
                                                               detach or copy, and return to the address in the upper
                                                               left-hand corner.

                                                               If you do not wish to receive these reports CHECK HERE D;
                                                               detach, or copy this cover, and return to the address in the
                                                               upper left-hand corner.
                                                             EPA/625/6-90/016b

-------